ACH580

E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

ACH580-BCR/BDR/VCR/VDR E-Clipse Bypass Drives 1…200 HP
ACH580-PCR/PDR Packaged Drives with Disconnect 1…200 HP
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Table of Contents

Safety instructions
Use of warnings and notes in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
General safety in installation, start-up and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Electrical safety in installation, start-up and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Additional instructions for Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Additional instructions for permanent magnet motor drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
General safety in operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Cybersecurity disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

ACH580 BCR/BDR/VCR/VDR E-Clipse Bypass Drives 1…200 HP

Installation
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
E-Clipse bypass features and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installation flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Preparing for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installing the wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Control panel
Start-up
Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
E-Clipse bypass functions overview
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Relay contact (digital) inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Relay contact outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Energy Savings Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Application macros
E-Clipse HVAC Default macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Damper macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Retrofit macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Smoke Control (Override1) macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Parameters
Parameter list and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Embedded fieldbus
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Mechanical and electrical installation – Embedded Fieldbus (EFB) . . . . . . . . . 76
Communication setup – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Activate drive control functions – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Feedback from the drive – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Activate bypass control functions – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Feedback from the ABB E-Clipse Bypass – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Diagnostics – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Table of Contents
ii ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

N2 protocol technical data – system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

BACnet protocol technical data – system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Modbus protocol technical data – Drive only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ABB control profiles technical data – Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Modbus protocol technical data - system mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fieldbus adapter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Mechanical and electrical installation – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Communication setup – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Activate drive control functions – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Feedback from the drive – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Activate bypass control functions – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Diagnostics – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
ABB drives profile technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Generic profile technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Diagnostics
Diagnostic displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Correcting faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Correcting warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Maintenance
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Technical data
Motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
E-Clipse Bypass control unit connections (RBCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Dimensional references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Dimensions and weights 580-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

ACH580-PCR/PDR Packaged Drives with Disconnect 1…200 HP

Installation
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Installation flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Preparing for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Installing the wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Maintenance
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Technical data
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Table of Contents
iv ACH580 Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

Safety instructions

These are the safety instructions which you • Handle the drive carefully.
must obey when you install and operate the
• Frames R5…R9: Lift the drive with a
drive and do maintenance on the drive. If you
lifting device. Use the lifting eyes of the
ignore the safety instructions, injury, death or
drive.
damage can occur.
• Frames R5…R9: Do not tip the drive
over. The drive is heavy and its center of
Use of warnings and notes in this gravity is high. An overturning drive can
manual cause physical injury.
Warnings tell you about conditions which can
cause injury or death, or damage to the
equipment. They also tell you how to prevent
the danger. Notes draw attention to a particular
condition or fact, or give information on a
subject.
The manual uses these warning symbols:

Electricity warning tells about hazards

from electricity which can cause injury
or death, or damage to the equipment.
General warning tells about
conditions, other than those caused by
electricity, which can cause injury or death,
or damage to the equipment.
Electrostatic sensitive devices
warning tells you about the risk of
electrostatic discharge which can cause • Beware of hot surfaces. Some parts, such
damage to the equipment. as heatsinks of power semiconductors,
remain hot for a while after disconnection of
the electrical supply.
General safety in installation,
start-up and maintenance • Keep the drive in its package or protect it
otherwise from dust and burr from drilling
These instructions are for all personnel that and grinding until you install it.
install the drive and do maintenance work on it.
• Vacuum clean the area below the drive
WARNING! Obey these instructions. If before the start-up to prevent the drive
you ignore them, injury or death, or cooling fan from drawing the dust inside the
damage to the equipment can occur. drive.
• Use safety shoes with a metal toe cap to • Do not cover the air inlet and outlet when the
avoid foot injury. Wear protective gloves and drive runs.
long sleeves. Some parts have sharp edges.
• Make sure that there is sufficient cooling.
See the ACH580 Hardware Manual
(3AXD50000044839) for more information.

Safety instructions
ACH580 Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual v

• Before you connect voltage to the drive, • Frames R1…R5: Do not attempt to repair a
make sure that the drive covers are on. malfunctioning drive; contact your local
Keep the covers on during the operation. representative for replacement or repair by
authorized persons.
• Before you adjust the drive operation limits,
make sure that the motor and all driven • Frames R6…R9: Can be repaired by
equipment can operate throughout the set authorized persons.
operation limits.
• Before you activate the automatic fault reset Electrical safety in installation,
or automatic restart functions of the drive start-up and maintenance
control program, make sure that no
dangerous situations can occur. These
Precautions before electrical work
functions reset the drive automatically and
continue operation after a fault or supply These warnings are for all personnel who do
break. If these functions are activated, the work on the drive, motor cable or motor.
installation must be clearly marked as WARNING! Frames R1 … R9: Obey
defined in IEC/EN 61800-5-1, subclause these instructions. If you ignore them,
6.5.3, for example, “THIS MACHINE injury or death, or damage to the equipment
STARTS AUTOMATICALLY”. can occur. If you are not a qualified electrical
• The maximum number of drive power-ups is professional, do not do electrical installation or
five in ten minutes. Too frequent power-ups maintenance work. Go through these steps
can damage the charging circuit of the DC before you begin any installation or
capacitors. maintenance work.
• If you have connected safety circuits to the 1. Clearly identify the work location.
drive (for example, emergency stop and 2. Disconnect all possible voltage sources.
Safe torque off), validate them at the start Lock and tag.
up. For the validation of the Safe torque off,
see ACH580 HVAC control program • Open the main disconnector at the power
firmware manual (3AXD50000027537 supply of the drive.
[English]). For the validation of other safety • Make sure that reconnection is not
circuits, see the instructions provided with possible.
them.
• Disconnect any external power sources
Note: from the control circuits.
• If you select an external source for start • After you disconnect the drive, always
command and it is on, and the start wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate
command is level-triggered, the drive will circuit capacitors discharge before you
start immediately after fault reset. See continue.
parameters 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type and
20.07 Ext2 start trigger type in ACH580 3. Protect any other energized parts in the
HVAC control program firmware manual work location against contact.
(3AXD50000027537 [English]). 4. Take special precautions when close to bare
• When the control location is not set to Local conductors.
(text Hand is not shown on the top row of the 5. Measure that the installation is
panel and parameter 19.19 Off mode de-energized.
disable has value Off button disabled), the
stop key on the control panel will not stop • Use a multimeter with an impedance of at
the drive. least 1 Mohm.

Safety instructions
vi ACH580 Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

• Make sure that the voltage between the • If the drive will be connected on a corner-
drive input power terminals (L1, L2, L3) grounded TN system, make sure the EMC
and the grounding terminal (PE) is close filter is not connected (metal screws should
to 0 V. not be installed). Connections with metal
screws in these systems can cause danger
Frames R1…R3: Measure the voltage or damage. See section Checking the
between the drive UDC+ terminal and compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and
grounding terminal (PE) with one corner-grounded TN systems (North
multimeter. As there is no UDC- terminal, America) in the ACH580 Installation,
measure the voltage between the drive Operation and Maintenance Manual
T1/U terminal and grounding terminal (3AXD50000049127).
(PE) with another multimeter. Make sure
that the voltage difference between the Note: For other systems, connecting the
multimeters is close to 0 V. internal EMC filter (using metal screws) will
reduce the conducted emission.
Frames R4…R9: Measure the voltage • Use all ELV (extra low voltage) circuits
between the drive DC terminals (UDC+ connected to the drive only within a zone of
and UDC-) and the grounding terminal equipotential bonding, that is, within a zone
(PE) and make sure that it is close to 0 V. where all simultaneously accessible
6. Install temporary grounding as required by conductive parts are electrically connected
the local regulations. to prevent hazardous voltages appearing
7. Ask for a permit to work from the person in between them. You can accomplish this by a
control of the electrical installation work. proper factory grounding, that is, make sure
that all simultaneously accessible
If the drive does not operate according to these conductive parts are grounded to the
steps, refer to the ACH580-01 Hardware protective earth (PE) bus of the building.
Manual (3AXD50000044839).
• Do not do insulation or voltage withstand
Additional instructions and notes tests on the drive or drive modules.
WARNING! Obey these instructions. If Note:
you ignore them, injury or death, or • The motor cable terminals of the drive are at
damage to the equipment can occur. a dangerous voltage when the input power
• If the drive will be connected on an IT is on, regardless of whether the motor is
system (ungrounded or high-resistance- running or not.
grounded [over 30 ohms]), make sure • The DC and brake resistor terminals (UDC+,
neither the EMC filter nor the ground-to- UDC-, R+ and R-) are at a dangerous
phase varistor are connected (metal screws voltage.
should not be installed). Connections with • External wiring can supply dangerous
metal screws in these systems can cause voltages to the terminals of relay outputs
danger or damage. See section Checking (RO1, RO2 and RO3).
the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and
corner-grounded TN systems (North • The Safe torque off function does not
America) in the ACH580 Installation, remove the voltage from the main and
Operation and Maintenance Manual auxiliary circuits. The function is not effective
(3AXD50000049127). against deliberate sabotage or misuse.
WARNING! Use a grounding wrist band
Note: For other systems, connecting the when you handle the printed circuit
internal EMC filter will reduce the conducted boards. Do not touch the boards unnecessarily.
emission.

Safety instructions
ACH580 Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual vii

The boards contain components sensitive to • install a device which automatically

electrostatic discharge. disconnects the supply if the protective
earth conductor breaks.
Grounding
Additional instructions for Safety
These instructions are for all personnel who are
responsible for the electrical installation,
Functions
including the grounding of the drive. WARNING! Bypass configurations
WARNING! Obey these instructions. If (ACH580-VxR & ACH580-BxR) do not
you ignore them, injury or death, or support Safe Torque Off (STO) functionality in
equipment malfunction can occur, and bypass mode.
electromagnetic interference can increase.
• If you are not a qualified electrical Additional instructions for
professional, do not do grounding work. permanent magnet motor drives
• Always ground the drive, the motor and
adjoining equipment to the protective earth Safety in installation, start-up and
(PE) bus of the power supply. This is maintenance
necessary for the personnel safety. Proper These are additional warnings concerning
grounding also reduces electromagnetic permanent magnet motor drives. The other
emission and interference. safety instructions in this chapter are also valid.
• In a multiple-drive installation, connect each
WARNING! Obey these instructions. If
drive separately to the protective earth (PE)
you ignore them, injury or death and
bus of the power supply.
damage to the equipment can occur.
• Make sure that the conductivity of the
protective earth (PE) conductors is • Do not work on a drive when a rotating
sufficient. See section Power cable terminal permanent magnet motor is connected to it.
and lead-through data in the ACH580 A rotating permanent magnet motor
Installation, Operation and Maintenance energizes the drive including its power
Manual (3AXD50000049127). Obey the terminals.
local regulations. Before installation, start-up and maintenance
• Connect the power cable shields to the work on the drive:
protective earth (PE) terminals of the drive. • Stop the motor.
• Standard IEC/EN & UL 61800-5-1 (section
• Disconnect the motor from the drive with a
4.3.5.5.2.) requires that as the normal touch
safety switch or by other means.
current of the drive is higher than 3.5 mA AC
or 10 mA DC, you must use a fixed • If you cannot disconnect the motor, make
protective earth (PE) connection. In addition, sure that the motor cannot rotate during
• install a second protective earth work. Make sure that no other system, like
conductor of the same cross-sectional hydraulic crawling drives, can rotate the
area as the original protective earthing motor directly or through any mechanical
conductor, connection like felt, nip, rope, etc.
or • Measure that the installation is de-
energized.
• install a protective earth conductor with a
cross-section of at least 7 AWG • Use a multimeter with an impedance of at
(10 mm2) Cu, least 1 Mohm.
or • Make sure that the voltage between the
drive output terminals (T1/U, T2/V, T3/W)

Safety instructions
viii ACH580 Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

and the grounding (PE) busbar is close to Note: When the drive is not in the Hand mode,
0 V. the Off key on the control panel will not stop the
drive.
• Make sure that the voltage between the
drive input power terminals (L1, L2, L3)
and the grounding (PE) busbar is close to Cybersecurity disclaimer
0 V.
This product is designed to be connected to
• Make sure that the voltage between the and to communicate information and data via a
drive DC terminals (UDC+, UDC-) and network interface. It is Customer’s sole
the grounding (PE) terminal is close to responsibility to provide and continuously
0 V. ensure a secure connection between the
• Install temporary grounding to the drive product and Customer network or any other
output terminals (T1/U, T2/V, T3/W). network (as the case may be). Customer shall
Connect the output terminals together as establish and maintain any appropriate
well as to the PE. measures (such as but not limited to the
installation of firewalls, application of
Start-up and operation: authentication measures, encryption of data,
• Make sure the motor is not run over the installation of anti-virus programs, etc) to
rated speed with dynamic/positive protect the product, the network, its system and
displacement loads. the interface against any kind of security
breaches, unauthorized access, interference,
intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or
General safety in operation information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable
These instructions are for all personnel that for damages and/or losses related to such
operate the drive. security breaches, any unauthorized access,
interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of
WARNING! Obey these instructions. If data or information.
you ignore them, injury or death, or
damage to the equipment can occur.
• Do not control the motor with the line side
disconnect at the drive power supply;
instead, use the control panel start and stop
keys or commands through the I/O terminals
of the drive.
• Give a stop command to the drive before
you reset a fault. If you have an external
source for the start command and the start is
on, the drive will start immediately after the
fault reset, unless you configure the drive for
pulse start. See the firmware manual.
• Before you activate automatic fault reset
functions of the drive control program, make
sure that no dangerous situations can occur.
These functions reset the drive
automatically and continue operation after a
fault.

Safety instructions
 ACH580 BCR/BDR/VCR/VDR
E-Clipse Bypass Drives
1…200 HP

 2018 ABB. All Rights Reserved.

ACH580 BCR/BDR/VCR/VDR E-Clipse Bypass Drives 1…200 HP

ACH580 BCR/BDR/VCR/VDR E-Clipse Bypass Drives 1…200 HP
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 3

Installation

Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding. Failure to observe

the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard.

WARNING! Before you begin read Safety instructions on page iv.

WARNING! When the ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass is connected to the line power,
the Motor Terminals T1, T2, and T3 are live even if the motor is not running. Do not
make any connections when the ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass is connected to the
line. Disconnect and lock out power to the drive before servicing the drive. Failure to
disconnect power may cause serious injury or death.

Application
This manual is a supplement to the ACH580-01 User’s Manual and documents
E-Clipse Bypass configurations.

E-Clipse bypass features and functions

The ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass is an ACH580 AC adjustable frequency drive in
an integrated UL (NEMA) Type 1, UL (NEMA) Type 12, or UL (NEMA) Type 3R
package with a bypass motor starter. The ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass provides:
• Disconnect switch or circuit breaker with door mounted handle mechanism. The
handle can be padlocked in the OFF position (padlock not supplied).
• Bypass starter.
• Motor overload protection.
• Local operator panel with indicating lights and multifunction display.
• Provisions for external control connections.
• Embedded communications for major BMS protocols including BACnet, Johnson
Controls International N2 and Modbus.
• Optional field bus adapters for connection to additional BMS protocols including
LonWorks, Ethernet/IP, DeviceNet, and PROFINET.
• Optional drive service switch (drive input disconnect), the functional equivalent of
a three-contactor bypass arrangement.

Installation
4 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

The following shows the front view of the ACH580 E-Clipse Bypass vertical
configuration, and identifies the major components.

ACH580 Drive
ACH-AP-H
Control Panel

E-Clipse Bypass Control Panel

Operating Handle
for Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker
E-Clipse Bypass

VxR

The following shows the front view of the ACH580 E-Clipse Bypass standard
configurations, and identifies the major components.

E-Clipse Bypass
Control Panel
ACH-AP-H
Control Panel
BYPASS CONTROL

ESC ENTER

ENABLE

SELECTED HAND
FAULTED

DRIVE BYPASS
OFF/RESET

AUTO
MOTOR RUN

Operating Handle
for Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker

BxR

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 5

The following is a typical power diagram.

Disconnect Switch Drive with E-Clipse Bypass

Bypass Drive Output
or Circuit Breaker Contactor
Control

3 Phase ACH580
Drive Motor
Input Power 3 3

Service Switch Bypass

(Optional) Contactor
Drive Input Fuse

Installation flow chart

The installation of E-Clipse Bypass Configurations for ACH580 drives follows the
outline below. The steps must be carried out in the order shown. At the right of each
step are references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of
the unit.
Reference in ACH580-01
Hardware Manual
Task Reference in this Manual
(3AXD50000044839)
Installation section
PREPARE for installation Preparing for installation in Preparing for installation on page 6.
the ACH580-01 Hardware Suitable mounting location on page 7
Manual (3AXD50000044839)

PREPARE the mounting PREPARE the mounting —

location location

MOUNT the unit MOUNT the drive —

REMOVE the covers REMOVE the front cover —

from Vertical E-Clipse
Bypass Unit

INSTALL wiring Wiring overview and Install Installing the wiring starting on
the wiring page 7.

CHECK jumpers and — Check jumpers and switches on

switches page 25.

CHECK installation Check installation Check installation – Bypass on

page 19.

RE-INSTALL the covers Re-install cover —

APPLY power Apply power —

START-UP Start-up —

For more details, refer to the ACH580-01 Hardware Manual (3AXD50000044839).

Installation
6 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Preparing for installation

Drive identification
Drive labels
To determine the type of drive you are installing, refer to either:
• Serial number label attached on upper part of the
chokeplate between the mounting holes. ACH580-BCR-316A-4

• Type code label attached on the heat sink – on the

right side of the unit cover. S/N 2090501769

VFD Rating
ABB Inc.
Input 3PH 50...60 Hz Output 3PH 0...500 Hz
Made in the USA of foreign parts MTR OL INCL: SEE MANUAL
Voltage(U1) 440...480 Vac Voltage(U2) 0...U1 Vac
Mfg. Date: xx-xxxx-20xx Orig. Drive Firmware: V.2.05.0.0
Current(I1n) 240 A Current(I2n) 240 A
Orig. Bypass Firmware: V.1.01B
Short Circuit 100 kA

E-Clipse Package Rating

Power(Pn) 200 Hp S/N 2090501769
Schematic: 3AUA0000014954

ACH580–BCR–240A-4

Type code
Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on either label.
ACH580-BCR-012A-4 +…+…
AC, HVAC Drive = 580 Product Series
Construction
01 = Base Drive
BCR = E-Clipse Bypass with circuit breaker
BDR = E-Clipse Bypass with disconnect switch
PCR = Packaged Drive with circuit breaker
PDR = Packaged Drive with disconnect switch
VCR = Vertical bypass with circuit breaker
VDR = Vertical bypass with disconnect switch
VFD output current rating (See ratings chart for details)
Voltage rating
2 = 208…240 VAC
4 = 440…480 VAC
6 = 575…600 VAC
Enclosure protection class
No specification = UL (NEMA) Type 1
+B056 = UL (NEMA) Type 12
+B058 = UL (NEMA) Type 3R
Power options
+E213 = Line reactor (PxR or BxR Configurations)
+F267 = Service switch (VxR or BxR Configurations)
Input/Output option modules
+L501 = Ext 24V DC/AC and digital I/O Extension
+L512 = 115/230 V digital input interface
+L523 = Ext 24V and isolated PTC Interface
Fieldbus adaptors
+K451 = DeviceNet Adapter
+K452 = LonWorks Adapter
+K454 = Profibus Adapter
+K462 = ControlNet Adapter
+K465 = BACnet/IP (2-port) Adapter (PxR or -01 configurations)
+K475 = Ethernet Adapter
Keypad
+J429 = Control panel with Bluetooth® interface

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 7

Ratings and frame size

For ratings and frame size information refer to the chart in the Ratings section of the
ACH580-01 Hardware Manual (3AXD50000044839). This section lists technical
specifications, and identifies the drive’s frame size, which is significant, since some
instructions in this document vary, depending on the drive’s frame size. To read the
Ratings table, you need the “Output current rating” entry from Type code on page 6.
Also, when using the Ratings tables, note that there are three tables based on the
drive’s “Voltage rating”.

Suitable mounting location

In selecting a suitable mounting location for E-Clipse Bypass configurations, refer to
the Technical data on page 213 in this manual for the appropriate information on:
• Branch circuit protection
• Dimensions and weights
• UL (NEMA) Type 3R, Bx3R-1...Bx3R-4 enclosures are designed to be mounted
on a wall.

Installing the wiring

WARNING!
• Metal shavings or debris in the enclosure can damage electrical equipment and
create a hazardous condition. Where parts, such as conduit plates require cutting
or drilling, first remove the part. If that is not practical, cover nearby electrical
components to protect them from all shavings or debris.
• Do not connect or disconnect input or output power wiring, or control wires, when
power is applied.
• Never connect line voltage to drive output Terminals T1, T2, and T3.
• Do not make any voltage tolerance tests (Hipot or Megger) on any part of the unit.
Disconnect motor wires before taking any measurements in the motor or motor
wires.
• Make sure that power factor correction capacitors are not connected between the
drive and the motor.

Wiring requirements
Refer to the Wiring requirements in the ACH580-01 Hardware Manual
(3AXD50000044839). The requirements apply to all ACH580 drives. In particular:
• Use separate, metal conduit runs to keep these three classes of wiring apart:
– Input power wiring.
– Motor wiring.
– Control/communications wiring.
• Properly and individually ground the drive, the motor and cable shields.

Installation
8 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

• Use wire ties to permanently affix control/communications wiring to the hooked

wire race tie points provided maintaining a minimum 6 mm (1/4 in.) spacing from
power wiring.
• Use a separate motor conduit run for each motor.

Wiring overview
Connection and wiring diagrams – Vertical E-Clipse Bypass
ACH580 Vertical E-Clipse Bypass units are configured for wiring access from the
bottom only. The following figures show the layout and wiring connection points. For
drive control wiring, see page 52. Maintain appropriate separation of control and
power wires.

Drive Control Panel

ACH580 Drive

E-Clipse Bypass
Control Panel

E-Clipse Bypass
Control Board
Terminals (X2)

Fuses Motor
Terminals

Service Switch Motor Ground

(Optional) Lug

Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker

Input
Terminals Input
Ground Lug

V1/V2
(Vx1-1, Vx1-2)

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 9

Drive Control Panel

ACH580 Drive

E-Clipse Bypass
Control Panel

E-Clipse Bypass
Control Board
Terminals (X2)

Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker

Input
Ground Lug
Motor
Terminals

Motor Ground
Input Lug
Terminals

Service Switch
(Optional)
Fuses

V3/V4
(Vx1-3, Vx1-4)

Installation
10 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Connection and wiring diagrams – Box E-Clipse Bypass

ACH580 Box E-Clipse Bypass units are configured for wiring access from the top
(for UL (NEMA) Type 1 and 12) and from the bottom (for UL (NEMA) Type 3R). The
following figures show the layout and wiring connection points. For drive control
wiring, see page 52. Maintain appropriate separation of control and power wires.
User Power
Cable Guides

ACH580 Drive

E-Clipse Bypass
Control Board Motor
Terminals (X2) Terminals

Fuses Motor Ground

Lug
Service Switch
(Optional) Input Ground
Lug

Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker

Input Terminals

MOV and
Line Reactor
(Optional)

B1
(Bx1-1, Bx12-1)

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 11

User Power
Cable Guides

ACH580 Drive

E-Clipse Bypass
Control Board
Terminals (X2)

Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker

Input Terminals

Input Ground
Lug

Motor Ground
Lug

Motor Terminals MOV and

Line Reactor
Fuses (Optional)

Service Switch
(Optional)

B2
(Bx1-2, Bx12-2)

Installation
12 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Motor
Ground Lug

Input
Ground Lug
Motor
Terminals

Fuses ACH580 Drive

Service Switch
(Optional)
Input
Terminals
Disconnect
Switch or
Circuit Breaker

E-Clipse Bypass
Control Board
Terminals X2

B3
600V, 41A - 77A
(Bx1-3, Bx12-3*)

*Hood and filter kit not shown

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 13

Motor
Ground Lug

Input
Ground Lug ACH580 Drive

Motor
Terminals
Input
Terminals

Disconnect
Switch or
Circuit Breaker

E-Clipse Bypass
Control Board
Terminals X2

Fuses
Service Switch
(Optional)

B3
Units above 77A
(Bx1-3, Bx12-3*)

*Hood and filter kit not shown

Installation
14 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

RHTR Temperature Heater ON Heater OFF

HI/LO Jumper (X1) Temperature Temperature
Default Setting
14.4 °C 21.4 °C
(X1 jumper in LO
58 °F 70.5 °F
position)
Alternate Setting
17.8 °C 24.4 °C
(X1 jumper in HI
E-Clipse Bypass 64 °F 76.5 °F
position)
Control Board
Terminals X2 The alternate (HI) setting further reduces the
likelihood of condensate in high humidity
environments.
Disconnect
Switch or
Circuit Breaker ACH580 Drive
Input
Terminals

Input
Ground Lug

Motor
Ground Lug

Motor
Terminals

Fuses

Service Switch
(Optional)

B2
(Bx3R-2)

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 15

Install the line input wiring

Line input connections – Vertical E-Clipse Bypass
configurations
Connect the input power to the terminals at
the bottom of the disconnect switch or circuit
breaker as shown below. Also see
Connection and wiring diagrams – Vertical
E-Clipse Bypass on page 8. Connect the Ground
equipment grounding conductor to the
ground lug near the input power connection
point. Input Power Cables

Line input connections – Standard E-Clipse

Bypass configurations (wall mounted)
Connect input power to the terminals of the disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
Connect the equipment grounding conductor to the ground lug at the top of the
enclosure. For connection points for Standard E-Clipse Bypass configurations, refer
to Connection and wiring diagrams – Vertical E-Clipse Bypass on page 8 and
Connection and wiring diagrams – Box E-Clipse Bypass on page 10.

Note: Route cables through the cable guides on the left side of the enclosure. Use
separate conduits for input power and motor cables. Follow the guides to separate
the cables from each other.

Power connections – Vertical E-Clipse Bypass configurations

Line input connections
Connect the input power to the terminals at the bottom of the disconnect switch or
circuit breaker. Also see Connection and wiring diagrams – Vertical E-Clipse Bypass
on page 8. Connect the equipment grounding conductor to the ground lug near the
input power connection point.
Motor connections
Connect the motor cables to the terminals at the bottom of the bypass section. Also
see Connection and wiring diagrams – Vertical E-Clipse Bypass on page 8. Connect
the motor grounding conductor to the ground lug near the motor cable terminal block
connection point.
Power connections – Standard E-Clipse Bypass configurations (wall mounted)
Line input connections
Connect input power to the terminals of the disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
Connect the equipment grounding conductor to the ground lug at the top of the
enclosure. The figure below shows the connection points for Standard E-Clipse
Bypass configurations. Also see Connection and wiring diagrams – Box E-Clipse
Bypass on page 10.

Installation
16 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Motor connections
Connect the motor cables to the output terminal block as shown on page 17. Also
see Connection and wiring diagrams – Box E-Clipse Bypass on page 10. The motor
grounding conductor can be connected to the ground lug near the terminal block.

Note: Route cables through the cable guides on the left side of the enclosure. Use
separate conduits for input power and motor cables. Follow the guides to separate
the cables from each other.

WARNING! Check the motor and motor wiring insulation before connecting the
ACH580 to line power. Refer to the ACH580-01 Hardware Manual
(3AXD50000044839). Before proceeding with the insulation resistance
measurements, check that the ACH580 is disconnected from incoming line power.
Failure to disconnect line power could result in death or serious injury.

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 17

Install the control wiring

Connect control wiring to terminal block X1 on the ACH580 control board and to
terminal block X2 on the E-Clipse Bypass control board. For more information on
these connections, refer to the following:
• X1 terminal block location and terminal data are defined in the Installation
instructions for the drive on page 5.
• X2 terminal block location is illustrated in the figures starting with Connection and
wiring diagrams – Vertical E-Clipse Bypass on page 8.
• X2 terminal data are provided in Basic control connections for E-Clipse HVAC
Default on page 18.
• Basic connections are described in the following paragraphs. Alternate
configurations using the E-Clipse Bypass macro are described in the ACH580
HVAC control program firmware manual (3AXD50000027537).
• On Terminal Block X1 inside the ACH580, analog inputs and outputs and
additional digital input and relay output connections (AI1, AI2, AO1, AO2,
DI1…DI6 and RO1…RO6) are available for use.

Note: The E-Clipse Bypass control circuitry uses serial communications connections
(X1:29…X1:31) inside the ACH580. These connections are not available for any
other purpose and must not be reconfigured.

Basic connections
The figure on page 17 shows the basic
control connections for use with the
E-Clipse Bypass HVAC Default macro.
BYPASS CONTROL

ESC ENTER

ENABLED
These connections are described in the
following paragraphs.
HAND
SELECTED
FAULTED
DRIVE BYPASS
OFF/RESET

MOTOR RUN
AUTO

In typical installations, only analog input

wires connect to the ACH580 terminal
block, with other control connections
made on the E-Clipse Bypass control
board.
Digital I/O
control EIA-485 Use wire ties to permanently affix control/
terminals port communications wiring to the hooked wire
control
terminals race tie points provided, maintaining a
minimum 6 mm (1/4 in.) spacing from
power wiring.
Drive’s power connection terminals
J2 J7
connection connection Refer to the tables in the Technical data
Bottom view section from pages 201 – 208, which list
J8 the maximum power and motor cable
GND J6 connection
terminal sizes for connections to an input
circuit breaker or disconnect switch, a
motor terminal block and ground lugs. The
tables also list torque that should be
applied when tightening the terminals.

Installation
18 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Basic control connections for E-Clipse HVAC Default

ACH580 CONTROL BOARD

X1
1 Terminal for Signal Cable Shield
+
2 Analog Input 1
-
3 Analog Input Common
4 +10V Reference Voltage for Potentiometer
5 Analog Input 2
6 Analog Input Common
7 Analog Output 1
8 Analog Output 2
9 Analog Output Common

E-CLIPSE BYPASS CONTROL BOARD

X2
1 +24Vdc
2 +24Vdc
3 Digital Input Common
4 GND
5 Digital Input 1 (Parameter 1601) START/STOP
6 Digital Input 2 (Parameter 1602,06) NOT SEL
7 Digital Input 3 (Parameter 1603) START INTERLOCK 1
8 Digital Input 4 (Parameter 1604,07) NOT SEL
9 Digital Input 5 (Parameter 1605, 1701) NOT SEL
10 Digital Input 6 (Fixed) SMOKE CONTROL* (OVERRIDE 1)

X2
11 Relay Output 1 (parameter 1401) BYP NOT FLT
12 Default Operation: Bypass Not Faulted 11 connected to 13
Bypass Faulted 11 connected to 12
13

14
Relay Output 2 (parameter 1404) SYS RUNNING
15
Default Operation: System Running 14 connected to 16
16

17
Relay Output 3 (parameter 1407) SYS STARTED
18
Default Operation: System started 17 connected to 19
19

20
Relay Output 4 (parameter 1410) BYPASS SEL
21
Default Operation: Bypass selected 20 connected to 22
22

23
Relay Output 5 (parameter 1413) BYPASS AUTO
24
Default Operation: Bypass auto 23 connected to 25
25

Parameters Changed Relative to E-Clipse HVAC Default

Parameter Number Description Setting

• Smoke Control (Override1) is a fixed input. Closing Digital Input 6 will place the E-Clipse Bypass in Smoke
Control mode which may reassign the function of the other Digital Inputs. Refer to the Smoke Control
(Override1) documentation.

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 19

Check installation – Bypass

Control panel settings and checks
Apply power to the E-Clipse Bypass unit. The ACH580 Control Panel should show
the operating status of the drive. If the E-Clipse Bypass Control Panel displays a
PHASE SEQ (Phase Sequence) fault, remove power, wait at least 5 minutes and
then swap any two input phase wires. If the motor is a standard 208/230 V, 60 Hz
motor connected to a 240 V drive or a 460 V, 60 Hz motor connected to a 480 V
drive, the default parameter settings should be suitable for the initial tests described
below. If the motor’s rating is not 208/230 V or 460 V, 60 Hz, the Motor Nominal
Voltage and Motor Nominal Frequency parameters will need to be properly set
before proceeding. Refer to the ACH580 HVAC control program firmware manual
(3AXD50000027537) and set the parameters as required.

Note: The settings for ALL external communication between the ACH580 with
E-Clipse Bypass and any Building Automation System are configured using the
E-Clipse Bypass operator panel. DO NOT attempt to configure the external
communication connection using the ACH580 operator panel!

The settings for internal communication between the ACH580 and the E-Clipse
Bypass are configured at the factory and require no adjustment.

Drive Link recovery procedure

If the ACH580 Drive communication settings are unintentionally changed during
setup a “Drive Link Fault”, “Drive Link Error” or “Drive Setup” warning may be
displayed. Should this occur, accomplish the following steps in order.
Using the ACH580 Drive Keypad, set Parameter 9521 bit 5 to “Bypass present”. This
will automatically set up the ACH580 to support the bypass.

Installation
20 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

System check: motor connected to ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass

After performing the control panel checks and setting the ACH580 Drive Start-up
Data parameters, check the operation of the ACH580 Drive with E-Clipse Bypass
with the motor connected as follows:
1. In order to prevent the motor from starting, the system should be in the Drive mode
and the drive should be OFF when the power is disconnected at the end of the
previous series of control panel settings and checks.
2. Disconnect and lock out power to the E-Clipse Bypass unit, wait at least five minutes
before disconnecting power.
3. Connect the motor to the output terminals.

CAUTION: Be aware of the state of the contacts before applying power.

If the Advanced Override (Override 2) input contact is closed, the motor will start
across the line as soon as power is applied.
If the Start Interlock and Run Permissive input contacts are closed and the Smoke
Control (Override 1) input contact is closed, the motor will start across the line as
soon as power is applied.
If the Start/Stop, Start Interlock, and Run Permissive input contacts are closed and
the system is in the Bypass mode and in either Hand or Auto, the motor will start
across the line as soon as power is applied.
If the Start/Stop, Start Interlock, and Run Permissive input contacts are closed and
the system is in the Drive mode with the drive in either Hand or Auto mode, the
motor will start on the drive as soon as power is applied.
In order to prevent the motor from running without disconnecting the motor, open the
Run Permissive and Start Interlock contacts on bypass control board terminals X2:2,
X2:3 and X2:4 before applying power. Set the bypass to Drive mode and the drive to
OFF.

4. Apply power to the E-Clipse Bypass unit. The ACH580 Control Panel display should
be illuminated. On the bypass control panel, both the display and Enabled LED
should be illuminated. If the Enabled LED is not illuminated solid green, check to see
that closed contacts or jumpers connect terminal X2:3 to X2:4 and X2:2 to X2:7 on
the bypass control board.
5. The Drive Selected LED should be illuminated. If not, press the Drive Select key to
switch to Drive mode. Leave the system in the Drive mode when proceeding to the
next step.
6. Press the Hand key on the ACH580 Control Panel. Press and hold the UP key until
the motor just starts rotating.

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 21

Note: If the ACH580 Control Panel displays an Overcurrent, Short circuit or Earth
leakage fault, disconnect and lock out power to the E-Clipse Bypass unit. Wait at
least 5 minutes. Disconnect the motor leads from the E-Clipse Bypass unit and
Megger each motor lead to ground to determine if the motor is good. Check the
power leads from the Drive / Bypass to the motor for damaged or improper wiring. If
the ACH580 Control Panel displays any other drive faults, correct the fault condition
before proceeding to the next step.

CAUTION: Check motor rotation direction as soon as the motor begins to move. If
motor does not rotate in the correct direction, shut down the drive, disconnect and
lock out power to the drive and wait five minutes. Swap any two motor output wires
(T1, T2, and T3). Incorrect motor rotation direction may cause equipment damage.

7. Increase the speed to the highest safe operating speed.

8. Press the OFF key on the drive control panel. The motor should stop.
If the drive does not operate according to these steps, refer to the ACH580 HVAC
control program firmware manual (3AXD50000027537).
If the drive operates according to these steps, your ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass is
ready to use with preset or modified macro settings.

Note: The settings for ALL external communication between the ACH580 with E-
Clipse Bypass and any Building Automation System are configured using the
E-Clipse Bypass operator panel. DO NOT attempt to configure the external
communication connection using the ACH580 operator panel!

The settings for internal communication between the ACH580 and the E-Clipse
Bypass are configured at the factory and require no adjustment.

Installation
22 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Note: On the ACH580 drive, Parameter 9521, bit 5 must be set for proper operation
with the E-Clipse Bypass. When this bit is set, the following ACH580 parameter
values are set and write protected:
Parameter Value
20.01 – Ext1 commands 14 – Embedded fieldbus
20.02 – Ext1 start trigger type 1 – Level
20.06 – Ext2 commands 14 – Embedded fieldbus
20.07 – Ext2 start trigger type 1 – Level
20.40 – Run permissive 15 – Embedded fieldbus
20.41 – Start interlock 1 15 – Embedded fieldbus
20.42 – Start interlock 2 1 – Not used
20.43 – Start interlock 3 1 – Not used
20.44 – Start interlock 4 1 – Not used
58.01 – Protocol 1 – Modbus RTU
58.04 – Baud rate 6 – 76.8kbits/s
58.05 – Parity 2 – 8 EVEN 1
58.25 – Control profile 5 – DCU profile
58.34 – Word order 0 – HI-LO

Refer to the ACH580-01 firmware manual (3AXD50000027537) for programming

instructions.

Note: Primary Settings not to be used to configure parameters above which include:
– Start/Stop
– Interlocks and Permissive
– Communications

Note: Run motor from drive before attempting bypass operation.

System check: motor disconnected from the ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass
If you are familiar with the E-Clipse Bypass operation, you may skip the following
section. Otherwise, after performing the system checks and setting the ACH580
Drive Start-up Data parameters, become familiar with the operation of the ACH580
Drive with E-Clipse Bypass without the motor connected as follows:
1. Disconnect and lock out power to the E-Clipse Bypass unit, wait at least five minutes
after disconnecting power.
2. Disconnect the motor from the E-Clipse Bypass unit.
3. Apply power to the E-Clipse Bypass unit by turning on the branch circuit disconnect
device and the bypass disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
4. The ACH580 Control Panel display should be illuminated. On the E-Clipse Bypass
control panel, both the display and Enabled LED should be illuminated. If the

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 23

Enabled LED is not illuminated solid green, check to see that closed contacts or
jumpers connect terminal X2:3 to X2:4 and X2:2 to X2:7 on the bypass control
board.
5. On the E-Clipse Bypass control panel, either the Drive Selected or Bypass Selected
LED should be illuminated. Pressing the Drive Select or Bypass Select key should
switch the bypass back and forth between the Drive mode and the Bypass mode as
indicated by the LEDs above each button. Check that the bypass control panel
switches the system between modes. Leave the system in the Bypass mode when
proceeding to the next step.
6. Check to see that pressing the:
• Auto key on the bypass control panel causes the bottom line on the E-Clipse
Bypass display to indicate “Bypass in Auto”.
• Hand key on the bypass control panel generates a Motor Phase Fault.
• Under normal conditions (motor connected) pressing the Hand key on the bypass
control panel causes the bottom line on the E-Clipse Bypass display to indicate
“Hand #A Run”.
• OFF key on the bypass control panel causes the bottom line on the E-Clipse
Bypass display to indicate “Off Stop”.
7. For Steps 8 through 14, ACH580 Drive Parameter 99.04 must be set to “Scalar”.
After successful completion of Step 13, Parameter 99.04 may be set to “Vector” if
very specific application requirements make it necessary to use this type of motor
control. Operation using the “Vector” setting is unnecessary for control of almost all
fan and pump applications. Refer to the ACH580 firmware manual
(3AXD50000027537) for details on setting parameters.
8. Press the Drive Select key on the E-Clipse Bypass control panel. The Drive Select
LED should be illuminated.
9. Check to see that pressing the:
• Auto key on the bypass control panel causes the E-Clipse Bypass display to
indicate “Bypass in Auto”.
• Hand key on the bypass control panel causes no change to the E-Clipse Bypass
display.
• OFF key on the bypass control panel causes the E-Clipse Bypass display to
indicate “Bypass in Off”.
10. Press the HAND key on the drive control panel. Note that the top line of the control
panel display indicates “HAND” and run as a clockwise rotating arrow. The Drive
Run LED on the E-Clipse Bypass control panel should be illuminated.
11. Press the UP arrow on the drive control panel. Note that the speed reference
indication in the top line of the drive control panel display increases from “0 HZ”.
12. In the middle line of the drive control panel display, the output current indication
should indicate “0.0 A.”
13. Press the DOWN arrow on the drive control panel until the speed and frequency
indications return to “0.0.”

Installation
24 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

14. Press the OFF key on the drive control panel. Note that the bottom line of the drive
control panel display indicates “Off.”
If the ACH580 Drive and E-Clipse Bypass operate according to these steps, and you
have familiarized yourself with their operation, disconnect and lock out power to
prepare for the next test.
Refer to the Safety instructions section on page v for the warnings all personnel who
do work on the drive, motor cable or motor need to follow.
If the drive does not operate according to these steps, refer to the ACH580-01
Hardware Manual (3AXD50000044839).

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 25

Check jumpers and switches

The settings described in this section are factory set and, for most situations, do not
require adjustment. However, it is a good practice to review these settings to confirm
that they are appropriate for the configuration installed.
Jumper and switch locations
The figure below shows the locations of the SW1 DIP switch on the E-Clipse Bypass
control board. The function and setting of this switch is explained in the following
paragraph.

Serial Communications
Termination Resistors
SW1
ON=Terminated
OFF=Not Terminated
Factory
Installed
Jumpers

Hooked Wire
Race Tie
Points

DIP switch settings

The DIP switch is used to configure the serial communications termination resistors.
To reduce noise on the serial communications network, terminate the EIA-485
network using 120 ohm resistors at both ends of the network. Use the DIP switches
to connect or disconnect the on-board termination resistors. Both switches must be
positioned in the ON or OFF position to correctly configure the termination resistors.

Circuit breaker settings

On some ACH580 E-Clipse Bypasses, the circuit breaker has adjustable settings for
instantaneous current protection. The factory default settings are practical for most
applications. Refer to the “ABB SACE Instruction Sheet” (supplied with these units)
for additional information on the adjustment of these settings.

Installation
26 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 27

Control panel

Bypass control
The bypass control panel features:

“Power On Indication”
(Display Illuminated)
LCD Display

Down Up

E-CLIPSE BYPASS CONTROL Enter

Escape

ESC ENTER
Enabled LED
ENABLED
Drive and Bypass ON/Hand Key
Selected/Faulted LEDs

SELECTED HAND
FAULTED OFF/Reset Key
DRIVE BYPASS
OFF/RESET
Drive/Bypass Select Keys
Auto Key
AUTO

MOTOR RUN
Motor Run LED
Power On Indication
The Ready (Power On) indication is provided by the bypass control panel. The
bypass control panel display will be illuminated and text will be displayed when the
disconnect switch or circuit breaker is closed and control power is applied to the
bypass.
Enabled LED
The Enabled LED is illuminated green under the following conditions:
• Both the Start Interlock(s) and Run Permissive contacts are closed.
• The Start Interlock contact(s) are closed with no Start command present.
The Enabled LED flashes green if the Run Permissive contact is open, the Start
Interlock contact(s) are closed, and Start command is present.
The Enabled LED is illuminated red when the Start Interlock contact(s) are open.
Motor Run LED
The Motor Run LED is illuminated green when the motor is running in either bypass
mode or in drive mode. The Motor Run LED flashes green to indicate the system has
been placed in an Override condition.

Control panel
28 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Bypass Faulted LED

The Bypass Faulted LED is illuminated or flashes red when the motor or bypass
protection functions have shut down the bypass. The specific nature of the fault is
indicated on the bypass control display. Refer to the Diagnostics section on
page 185 for more details.
Drive Selected LED
The Drive Selected LED is illuminated green when the drive has been selected as
the power source for the motor and no drive fault is present.
Bypass Selected LED
The Bypass Selected LED is illuminated or flashes green when the bypass has been
selected as the power source for the motor and no bypass fault is present.
Drive Faulted LED
The Drive Faulted LED is illuminated red when the bypass has lost its
communications link with the drive or when the motor or drive protection functions
have shut down the drive. The specific nature of the fault is indicated on the drive
control panel display. Refer to the Diagnostics section on page 185 for more details.
Automatic Transfer
The Automatic Transfer indication is provided on the bypass control panel. The
bypass control display will continuously flash an warning to indicate the system has
automatically transferred to Bypass after a Drive fault. The Bypass Selected LED
flashes green when the system has automatically transferred to bypass operation.
The bypass event log will also record this event.
Auto Indication
The Auto Indication is provided on the bypass control panel default display when the
bypass control panel Auto key is pressed. Normally this indicates that the Auto Start
contact or communications has been selected as the means for starting and
stopping the motor in the bypass mode.
Off Indication
The Off Indication is provided on the bypass control panel default display when
bypass control panel Off key is pressed.
Hand Indication
The Hand Indication is provided on the bypass control panel default display when
the motor has been started manually in the bypass mode.
Drive Select Key
The Drive Select Key selects the drive as the power source for the motor.
Bypass Select Key
The Bypass Select Key selects the bypass as the power source for the motor.
Off/Reset Key
The Off/Reset Key may be used to manually stop the motor if the motor has been
running on bypass power. The Off/Reset key also resets most bypass faults. It may

Control panel
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 29

take several minutes before the bypass can be reset after an overload trip. If a
bypass fault condition is present the second press of this key places the bypass in
the OFF mode.
Auto Key
The Auto Key selects the Auto Start contact or communications as the means for
starting and stopping the motor in the bypass mode.
Hand Key
The Hand Key can be used to manually start the motor when the bypass has been
selected as the power source for the motor.

Bypass control panel modes

The HVAC Bypass Control Panel has several different modes for configuring,
operating and diagnosing the bypass. Select MENU and use the UP/DOWN buttons
to select modes. The modes are:
• Default Display mode – Provides (HAND/OFF/AUTO) indication of the bypass
operating control mode.
• Bypass Status mode – Provides status indications of the current system operating
conditions.
• Start-Up Parameter Mode – Provides a list of parameters or operating conditions
that may be configured or viewed during startup.
• Parameter List mode – Used to edit parameter values individually.
• Changed Parameter mode – Displays changed parameters.
• Bypass Fault Display mode – If there is an active bypass fault, the control panel
will flash the fault number and fault diagnostic indication in English.
• Bypass Warning Display mode – If there is an active bypass warning, the control
panel will flash the warning number and warning diagnostic indication in English.

Control panel
30 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

BOOT

Default Display Main Menu

Bypass Status
Enter
System Selected Esc Enter Status 1
Bypass Status
Bypass Mode Esc
Status 2
...
Up
Any state Dn
Parameters

Fault
Start-up Enter 9802 Enter
Reset Parameter edit
Parameter Menu Esc Esc
9902
Bypass ...
Fault
(Flashes over Up
Blank Display ) Dn
Parameter Parameters
Groups
Enter 01 Enter 0102 Enter
Any state Parameter List Parameter edit
Esc Esc Esc
03 0103
Alarm ... ...
Alarm
dismissed Up
Dn
Bypass Changed
Alarm Parameters
(Flashes over Changed Enter Enter
Current Display) Parameter 1 Parameter edit
Parameter Menu Esc Esc
Parameter 2
...

Alarm and Fault Displays

Silenced for 30 Seconds on Key Press

Refer to the illustration for the Bypass Control Panel’s Menu Structure.

Control panel
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 31

Start-up

Start-up
Start-Up can be performed in two ways:
• Using the Start-Up Parameter List
• Changing the parameters individually from the Full Parameter List.

Note: Run motor from drive before attempting bypass operation.

LCD Display

Down Up
E-CLIPSE BYPASS CONTROL
Escape
Enter
ESC ENTER
Enabled LED
Drive and Bypass ENABLED ON/Hand Key
Selected/Faulted LEDs

SELECTED HAND
FAULTED OFF/Reset Key

DRIVE BYPASS
OFF/RESET
Auto Key
Drive/Bypass Select Keys
AUTO

MOTOR RUN
Motor Run LED

Start-up
32 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Start-up by changing the parameters from the start-up list

To change the parameters, follow these steps:
1 The Default Display indicates the
Bypass Control mode. DRIVE SELECTED
BYPASS IN OFF

2 Press ENTER to enter the Main Menu.

*BYPASS STATUS
ENTER
STARTUP PARAMS

3 Select the Startup Params with the

Up/Down arrows and press ENTER. BYPASS STATUS
ENTER
*STARTUP PARAMS

4 Select the appropriate Parameter with

the Up/Down arrows and press *1601 START/STOP
ENTER
ENTER. 1613 BP DISABLE

5 Press the Up/Down arrows to change

the Parameter Value. *1601 START/STOP
1602 PERMISSIVE

6 Press ENTER to store the modified

value or press ESC to leave the ENTER ESC
*1601 START/STOP
or
Parameter Edit mode. 1613 BP DISABLE

7 Press ESC to return to the Main Menu,

and again to return to the. Default ESC *1601 START/STOP
Display. 1613 BP DISABLE

Start-up by changing the parameters individually from the parameter list

To change the parameters, follow these steps:
1 The Default Display indicates the
Bypass Control mode. DRIVE SELECTED
BYPASS IN OFF

2 Press ENTER to enter the Main Menu.

ENTER
*BYPASS STATUS
STARTUP PARAMS

3 Select the Parameter List with the Up/

Down arrows and press ENTER. STARTUP PARAMS
ENTER
*PARAMETER LIST

4 Select the appropriate Parameter

Group with the Up/Down arrows and 14 RELAY OUT
ENTER
press ENTER. *16 SYSTEM CTRL

5 Select the appropriate Parameter in a

group with the Up/Down arrows and *1601 START/STOP
press ENTER. ENTER
1602 PERMISSIVE

Start-up
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 33

6 Press the Up/Down arrows to change

the Parameter Value. 1601 START/STOP
[ 1:DI1 ]

7 Press ENTER to store the modified

value or press ESC to leave the ENTER
or ESC *1601 START/STOP
Parameter Edit mode. 1602 PERMISSIVE

8 Press ESC to return to the listing of

Parameter Groups, and again to ESC ESC
*16 SYSTEM CTRL
return to the Main Menu. 17 OVERRIDE

9 Press ESC to return to the Default

Display from the Main Menu. ESC
DRIVE SELECTED
BYPASS IN OFF

Note: In the Parameter Edit mode the current parameter value appears below the
parameter name.

Note: To view the default parameter value, press the Up/Down arrows
simultaneously. Press Enter to restore the default parameter value or press ESC to
leave the Parameter Edit mode.

Start-up
34 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Start-up
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 35

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

Operating modes

Note: For normal operation with the bypass, place the drive control panel in the Auto
mode. Place the E-Clipse bypass control panel to Drive (selected) and ensure the
Hand-off auto selection is set to OFF.

Drive Mode
Under normal conditions the system is in the Drive mode. The drive provides power
to the motor and controls its speed. The source of the drive’s start/stop and speed
commands is determined by the Auto or Hand mode selection of the drive’s control
panel. Commands come from the bypass control terminals (or communication) when
the Auto mode has been selected or directly from the drive control panel when the
Hand mode has been selected. The user can normally switch to the Drive mode by
pressing the Drive key on the bypass control panel.
Reverse Drive Mode
Reverse Drive mode is a subset of Drive mode; as such the drive provides power to
the motor and controls its speed and direction. The source of the drive’s start/stop,
speed and direction commands is the Reverse Drive input (DI2 - if programmed).
In this mode the system acknowledges all of the same permissives and interlocks as
Drive mode. When the Reverse Drive input contact is closed with the drive running,
the drive ramps down to zero speed then reverses motor direction and continues
running; with the drive stopped, the drive starts and runs in the reverse direction. In
either case the motor operates at the constant speed programmed on the drive. No
other start command is required. See parameter 1630 on page 66 for a description of
drive programming and wiring requirements.
Bypass Mode
In the Bypass mode, the motor is powered by AC line power through the bypass
contactor. The drive contactor opens to isolate the drive output. The source of the
bypass start/stop commands is determined by the Auto or Hand mode selection of
the bypass’ control panel. Commands come from the bypass control terminals (or
communication) when the Auto mode has been selected or directly from the bypass
control panel when the Hand mode has been selected. The user can normally switch
to the Bypass mode by pressing the Bypass key on the bypass control panel.
Alternative methods of bypass control called Overrides are also available. Refer to
the following descriptions of the Override modes.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

36 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Smoke Control Mode (Override 1)

In the Smoke Control (Override 1) mode, the motor is powered by AC line power
through the bypass contactor. The source of the start command is internal and
unaffected by external stop commands. The system also ignores all commands from
either the drive or bypass control panels, or over communications, when in this
mode. The user can switch to the Smoke Control mode by closing the Smoke
Control input contact (DI6). When the Smoke Control input contact is closed, the
system is forced to bypass and runs the motor (refer to the Note on page 55). The
Motor Run LED flashes green when the system is in Override. While in Smoke
Control mode, the system does not respond to some inputs and does respond to
other inputs, i.e., the system will ignore low priority safeties such as low temp or
FreezeStats and return duct smoke detectors. While in Smoke Control mode, the
system will respond to high priority safeties such as high static pressure and damper
end-switch proofs. The system will always respond to the electronic motor overload
protection included in the bypass controller. See the diagrams on page 56 for
suggested wiring of typical customer inputs.
Normally when the Smoke Control input contact is switched from closed to open, the
system returns to the operating mode that existed prior to entering Override and can
again be controlled using the Drive and Bypass keys. The exception to this is when
the Advanced Override (Override 2) input contact is closed, in which case the
system switches to Advanced Override mode.
Supervisory Mode
In the Bypass Supervisory mode, the bypass has the ability to control a process by
cycling the bypass contactor on and off with a hysteresis control. In this mode the
motor is powered by AC line power through the bypass contactor. The source of the
bypass start/stop commands is determined by the Auto or Hand mode selection of
the bypass’ control panel. Commands come from the analog input level (AI2) on the
ACH580 drive when the Auto mode has been selected or directly from the bypass
control panel when the Hand mode has been selected (manual). Bypass
supervisory control is enabled and configured in parameter Group 32. Once
enabled, the user can switch to the Supervisory Bypass mode by pressing the
Bypass key on the bypass control panel. Alternative methods of bypass control
called Overrides are also available. Refer to the following descriptions of the
Override modes. The Supervisory control only operates in Bypass / Auto mode. If
the user presses the Hand or Off buttons, operation is the same as normal bypass
operation. If the user selects Drive mode, the Supervisory operation is also stopped.
Returning to Bypass / Auto mode will put the bypass back to Supervisory mode.

Temp Bypass
Sensor Supervisory
Controller Traditional
Contactor
AI2
Parameter
Control
Output = Drive mode
0121
= AI2 1 if AI2 > Start Level OR NOT AUTO
ACH580 0 if AI2 < Stop Level Start >= OR OVERRIDE
Stop OR 32.01 = 0
unchanged otherwise Transitions subject Bypass
to Start Delay and Contactor
Output = Start <
Stop Delay Bypass mode
1 if AI2 > Start Level Stop AND AUTO
AND NOT OVERRIDE
0 if AI2 < Stop Level AND 32.01 = 1
unchanged otherwise

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 37

Advanced Override Mode (Override 2)

In the Advanced Override (Override 2) mode, the motor is powered either by the
drive through the drive or by AC line power through the bypass contactor.
Depending on the E-Clipse bypass parameter 1708 setting, the user can switch to
the Advanced Override mode by closing the Advanced Override input contact (DI5 -
if programmed) or as a command through communications.
When Advanced Override is active, the system does not respond to the inputs on the
Drive and E-Clipse Bypass control panel keys.
The Motor Run LED flashes green on the drive and bypass keypads when the
system is in override.
While in Advanced Override, the system responds to bypass overloads and
programmed faults. The system can be custom programmed to acknowledge or
disregard certain faults, safeties and enables. The unit default is programmed to
ignore all external safeties and run enables. See Group 17 for programmability of the
digital input and fault functions.
Normally when the Advanced Override is deactivated, the system returns to the
previous operating mode and can be controlled using the Drive and Bypass
keypads. If the system was previously in Hand mode, the system reverts to Off
mode. The exception to this is when the Smoke Control (Override 1) input contact is
closed, in which case the system remains in Smoke Control mode.
The tables on pages 38-40 provide information on how to set up the E-Clipse bypass
and the ACH580 drive for Override 2 mode. The table on page 38 describes the key
Override 2 parameters in the E-Clipse bypass. The table on page 39 describes the
key Override parameters that would be programmed in the ACH580 drive.
The table on page 40 describes how to configure Override in the ACH580 drive
using Primary Settings, instead of using parameters. In most Override 2 applications
the Primary Settings (page 40) will be used to program Override 2 applications.
Note that programming ACH580 drive Override parameters / Primary Settings is not
necessary if E-Clipse bypass parameter 1708 is set to [1] Bypass or [4] Stop. The
tables on pages 39 and 40 assume the ACH580 drive is in Scalar mode.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

38 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Programming Advanced Override (Override 2)

Parameter Parameter Name Parameter Value Comments
Number
Programming the E-Clipse Bypass for Advanced Override Operation
1701 OVERRIDE 2 [1] DI5 Digital Input 5 of the E-Clipse Bypass is used to activate Override
operation for both the VFD and the E-Clipse Bypass.
1702 Permissive Override as required Determines whether the E-Clipse's Run Permissive input can
PERMIS OVR interrupt Override operation. (The default value does not allow
Run Permissive to interrupt Override operation. If the damper
control interlock function is desired during Override operation, this
interlock must be ACKNOWLEDGED.)
1703 Interlock 1 Override as required Determines whether the Eclipse's Interlock 1 input can interrupt
INTLK1 OVR Override operation. (The default value does not allow Interlock 1
to interrupt Override operation.)
1704 Interlock 2 Override as required Determines whether the Eclipse's Interlock 2 input can interrupt
INTLK2 OVR Override operation. (The default value does not allow Interlock 2
to interrupt Override operation.)
1706 Interlock 4 Override as required Determines whether the Eclipse's Interlock 4 input can interrupt
INTLK4 OVR Override operation. (The default value does not allow Interlock 4
to interrupt Override operation.)
1707 FAULTS OVR as required Determines whether certain Eclipse Faults can interrupt Override
operation.
1708 OVR2 MODE as required
[1] BYPASS During Override 2 operation, the motor will only run at full speed in
bypass mode.
[2] VFD During Override 2 operation, the motor will only run at a controlled
E-Clipse Bypass Parameters

speed from the ACH580 VFD. Parameter Group 70 in the

ACH580 VFD is used to program its operation.
If the VFD cannot run the motor, the motor will stop.
Requires additional control wiring between E-Clipse and ACH580
VFD.
[3] VFD/BYPASS During Override 2 operation, the system will first attempt to run
the motor from the ACH580 VFD, as programmed in Parameter
Group 70 of the ACH580 VFD.
If the VFD loses power or is in a fault condition, the system will
use the E-Clipse Bypass to run the motor at full speed in bypass
mode.
Requires additional control wiring between E-Clipse and ACH580
VFD. See the diagram on page 41.
[4] STOP During Override 2 operation, the motor will stop.
1401 RO1 SELECT [7] BYP NOT FLT Relay 1 is used to delay the Override 2 command for the E-Clipse
Bypass during power-up of the system. This is to ensure that the
1402 R1 ON DLY 10.0 s (or as ACH580 VFD has had enough time to boot up before the system
required) goes into Override 2 Mode. (the value of parameter 1402 can be
adjusted as needed.)
1403 R1 OFF DLY 2.0 s
1410 RO4 SELECT [12] OVERRIDE When the E-Clipse Bypass is in the Override 1 or Override 2
mode, this relay will activate. Its normally open contacts are wired
to activate the Override function in the ACH580 VFD. This will
cause the VFD to display WARNING 2020, Override. It will also
lock out the ability to change the VFD's parameters or control it
externally.
14111 R4 ON DLY 0.0 s
14121 R4 OFF DLY 0.0 s
1413 RO5 SELECT [32] OVRD2 ENAB Enables Override 2 operation for the VFD based on the
programming of E-Clipse parameters 1701 through 1708. The
normally open contact of this relay is wired to apply control voltage
to Digital Input 4 of the ACH580 VFD. This enables the VFD to run
in Override mode. The E-Clipse Bypass can stop the VFD during
Override 2 operation by opening this contact.
14141 R5 ON DLY 0.0 s
1
1415 R5 OFF DLY 0.0 s
1) Indicates a parameter that is unchanged from its default value.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 39

Initial Programming for Override function using OVRD2, via parameters

Only required for E-Clipse parameter selections: The drive should first be set up and operating
1708, OVRD2 MODE [2] VFD or [3] VFD/BYPASS correctly with the E-Clipse Bypass.

The parameters in this section program the ACH580 VFDs operation during Override Mode.

Parameter Parameter Name Parameter Value Comments

95.21 HW option word 2 Bit 5: Bypass present Verify that the Drive is set up for E-Clipse
Bit 8: Legacy bypass bypass. Word value for 95.21 = [1] E-Clipse
present bypass is = 0010 0000.

70.02 Override enable [0] Off Default is [0] Off

[1] On • Off: Override is not being used,
[2] On, critical • On: Uses programmed number of fault
resets,
• On, Critical: infinite number of fault
resets.
70.03 Override activation source [5] DI5 high Contacts closing against the drive’s DI5 will
activate Override Mode in the ACH580 VFD.
ACH580 Parameters

70.04 Override reference source [0] Constant speed/freq Defaults to [3] Override speed/freq
[1] AI1 The drive will use the Hz value programmed
[2] AI2 in 70.06
[3] Override speed/freq Note that [0] Constant speed/freq is similar
[4] Motor potentiometer
[5] Stop
[6] Process PID set1
70.05 Override direction [0] Forward Defaults to [0] Forward
[1] Reverse
[2] to [7], DI1 to DI6
[8] to [13], -DI1 to -DI6
[9] Other
70.06 Override frequency -500 Hz to 500 Hz Defaults to 0.0 Hz. Set the value the drive
will control to in Override when 70.04 is [3].

70.20 Override fault handling [0] Fault on high priority Defaults to [1] Fault on high priority.
[1] Autoreset

70.21 Override Auto reset trials Integer value: 1 to 5 Defaults to 5 times.

70.22 Override Auto reset time Value from Defaults to 5.0 seconds.
5.0 to 120.0 secs

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

40 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Initial Programming for Override function using OVRD2, via parameters

Only required for E-Clipse parameter selections: The drive should first be set up and operating
1708, OVRD2 MODE [2] VFD or [3] VFD/BYPASS correctly with the E-Clipse Bypass.

Primary Settings > Override > Example for using a single Override frequency

The Primary Settings in this section program the ACH580 OED’s operation during Override mode.

Path > Selection Options Selected option/Description

Override mode: Disabled; Normal; Critical Normal: programmed number of fault resets, or
Critical: infinite number of fault resets.

Activate override DI1 to DI6, high Select: DI5 high

Primary Settings > Override >

from: DI1 to DI6, low See wiring diagram on page 42.

Reference from: [0] Constant speed/freq Confirm: [3] Override speed/freq (default)
[1] AI1
[2] AI2
[3] Override speed/freq
[4] Motor potentiometer
[5] Stop
[6] Process PID set1
Override -500 Hz to 500 Hz Set the appropriate value required by the engineer and air balancer.
frequency:

Direction selection: [0] Forward Confirm: Default of [0] Forward

[1] Reverse Design may require Reverse or a changeable direction.
[2] to [7], DI1 to DI6
[8] to [13], -DI1 to -DI6
[9] Other
Override safeties: Wire and Configure the Safeties at the E-Clipse bypass.
Not used ACH580 drive safeties are not used with an E-Clipse bypass.

☑ Use autoreset Default is the checkbox is unselected.

for critical faults: Critical faults are the faults that would require restarting the inverter in
normal operation.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 41

1 SCR Signal Cable Shield (screen)

2 AI1 Analog Input AI1
3 AGND Analog Input Circuit Common
4 +10V Reference Voltage 10 V DC
5 AI2 Analog Input AI2: FEEDBACK
6 AGND Analog Input Circuit Common
7 AO1 Analog Output AO1
8 AO2 Analog Output
9 AGND Analog Output Circuit Common
10 +24V Auxiliary Voltage Output +24 V DC
11 GND Auxiliary Voltage Output Common
12 DCOM Digital Input Common for All
13 DI1
14 DI2
15 DI3
16 DI4
17 DI5 (P 70.03: Override activation source: [6] DI5)
18 DI6
19 RO1C
20 RO1A
21 RO1B
22 RO2C
23 RO2A
24 RO2B
25 RO3C
26 RO3A
27 RO3B

ACH580

1 +24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

2 +24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC
3 DCOM Digital input common for all
4 GND Auxiliary voltage common
5 DI1
6 DI2
7 DI3
8 DI4
Override 2
9 DI5 Override 2 Command
Command
10 DI6
11 RO1C
12 RO1A (P 1401: R04 SEELCT: [12] OVERRIDE)
Power-up time delay for Override 2
13 RO1B
14 RO2C
15 RO2A
16 RO2B
17 RO3C
18 RO3A
19 RO3B
20 RO4C
21 RO4A (P 1410: R04 SEELCT: [12] OVERRIDE)
22 RO4B
23 RO5C
24 RO5A (P 1413: RO5 SELECT: [32] OVRD2 ENAB)
25 RO5B
SCR Screen

SCR Screen
A - Negative
B + Positive

AGND
26
27
28
29
30

E-Clipse Bypass

Recommended control wiring between ACH580 and E-Clipse Bypass to enable Advanced Override 2.
Required for E-Clipse parameter 1708 selections [2] VFD and [3] VFD/BYPASS.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

42 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Hand Mode
When the system is in the Bypass mode, the operator can manually start the motor
by pressing the Hand key on the bypass control panel. The motor will run and Hand
is indicated on the bypass control display. In order to run the motor, the Start
Interlock(s) and Run Permissive contacts must be closed (green Enabled LED) and
any bypass fault must be reset.
Auto Mode
In the Auto mode the bypass start/stop command comes from the Start/Stop input
terminal on the bypass control board (or communication). The Auto mode is selected
by pressing the Auto key on the bypass control panel. Auto is indicated on the
bypass control display when the bypass is in the Auto mode. If the system is in the
Bypass mode, the motor will run across the line if the Auto mode is selected, the
Start/Stop, Start Interlock(s) and Run Permissive contacts are closed and any
bypass fault is reset.
Off Mode
If the motor is running in the Bypass mode, the operator can manually stop the motor
by pressing the Off/Reset key on the bypass control panel. The Hand or Auto
indication on the bypass control display will change to Off. The motor can be
restarted by pressing the Hand key or the bypass can be returned to the Auto mode
by pressing the Auto key. If the system is in the Drive mode, pressing the Off/Reset
key will take the bypass out of the Auto mode, but will not affect motor operation
from the drive. If the system is switched to the Bypass mode, a motor that is running
will stop.
Bypass/Drive Mode transfers
If the drive is in the Auto mode and the motor is running in the Drive mode, the motor
will transfer to bypass operation and continue running if the system is switched to the
Bypass mode and the bypass is in the Auto mode with the Start/Stop Input contact
closed. If the motor is running in the Bypass mode, the motor will transfer to drive
operation and continue running if the system is switched to the Drive mode and the
drive is in the Auto mode with the Start/Stop Input contact closed.
Starting the motor on application of power
If the Start Interlock(s) and Run Permissive Input contacts are closed (Start
command must also be present in Auto) and the system is in the Bypass mode and
in either the Hand or Auto mode, the motor will start across the line as soon as
power is applied. If the system is in the Drive mode with the drive in the Auto mode,
the motor will start on the drive as soon as power is applied.
Automatic transfer feature
When the Automatic Transfer feature is selected, the system switches to Bypass
mode and the motor is automatically transferred to line power if the drive trips out on
a protective trip. If automatic restart has been enabled in the drive, the drive will
attempt to automatically restart before the motor is transferred to line power. The
Automatic Transfer function can be enabled through the bypass control panel. The
Automatic Transfer indication is provided on the bypass control panel. The control
panel display will continuously flash a warning to indicate the system has
automatically transferred to Bypass. The bypass event log will also record this event.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 43

Bypass control board inputs and outputs

The bypass control board has five programmable and one fixed relay contact
(digital) inputs and five programmable relay outputs that are available for connection
to external control circuits. The internal 24VDC supply is normally used in
conjunction with the relay contact inputs. The input and output functions are
described below. Refer to the Installation section on page 3 for additional information
and connection instructions.

Relay contact (digital) inputs

All Relay Contact (Digital) Inputs with the exception of the Override 1 “Smoke
Control” and “Reverse Drive” Inputs can be configured to any one of three (3)
conditions.
1. “Digital Input” (DI), in which case the bypass system will react to the defined input
function during normal operation.
2. “Not Selected”, in which case the bypass system will ignore the defined input
function as bypass control, but will continue to pass the operating state of the digital
input through communications to the building automation system.
3. “Comms”, in which case the bypass system will react to the defined input function
over communications during normal operation. The bypass system will ignore the
digital input as a defined input function, but will continue to pass the operating state
of the digital input over communications to the building automation system.
Start/Stop (DI1)
The Start/Stop input is connected to a normally open contact that starts and stops
the system. When the bypass is in the Drive mode and the drive is in the Auto mode,
the Start/Stop input contact controls the motor by starting and stopping the drive.
When the bypass is in the Bypass mode and Auto is indicated on the bypass control
display, the Start/Stop input contact controls the motor by controlling the bypass
contactor.
Permissive (DI2)
The Run Permissive input is connected to the series combination of any external
normally closed permissive contacts, such as damper end switches, that must be
closed to allow the motor to run. If any of these external contacts are open while a
Start command is present, the Enabled LED will flash green and the motor is
prevented from running.
Reverse Drive (DI2)
The Reverse Drive input can be connected to an external contact that is closed to
select the Reverse Drive mode. See Reverse Drive Mode on page 35 for a
description of this mode.
Safety Interlock (DI2…DI5)
The Safety Interlock input(s) are connected to the series combination of any external
normally closed interlock contacts, such as Firestat, Freezestat, and high static
pressure switches – switches that must be closed to allow the motor to run. If any of
these external contacts are open, the Enabled LED is illuminated red, the drive

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

44 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

output contactor, bypass contactor, and System Started relay are de-energized
preventing the motor from running.
Bypass Fault Reset (DI4)
The Bypass Fault Reset input can be connected to an external contact that is closed
to reset a bypass fault. It may take several minutes before the bypass can be reset
after an overload trip.
Advanced Override (DI5) (Override 2)
The Advanced Override (Override 2) input can be connected to an external contact
that is closed to select the Advanced Override mode. See Advanced Override Mode
(Override 2) on page 37 for a description of this mode.
Smoke Control (DI6) (Override 1)
The Smoke Control (Override 1) input can be connected to an external contact that
is closed to select the Fireman’s Override mode. See Smoke Control Mode
(Override 1) on page 36 for a description of this mode.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 45

Relay contact outputs

System Ready (1) [SYS READY]
If configured for System Ready, the relay is energized when the Drive/Bypass
System is ready to be started. Two conditions must be met in order for the System
Ready relay to energize.
• The Safety Interlock input contact(s) must be closed and
• There can be no fault present in the selected mode (Drive or Bypass) of the
system.
System Running (2) [SYS RUNNING]
If configured for System Running, the relay is energized when the Drive/Bypass
system is running. The System Running relay provides an output when the motor is
running whether powered by the drive or the bypass.
System Started (3) [SYS STARTED]
If configured for System Started, the relay is energized when the Drive/Bypass
system is started. Three conditions must be met in order for the relay to energize.
• A Start command must be present,
• The Safety Interlock input contact(s) must be closed and
• There can be no fault present in the system. The Start command can come from
the bypass control board terminal block, the drive control panel, the bypass
control panel, or communications, depending on the operational mode selected.
The System Started relay is ideal for use in damper actuator circuits, opening the
dampers only under those conditions where the system is preparing to run the motor.
Closing the dampers if the safeties open, the system faults, or when a Stop
command is issued.
Bypass Selected (4) [BYPASS MODE]
If configured for Bypass Selected, the relay is energized when Bypass Mode has
been selected as the method of motor control. The Bypass Selected relay is de-
energized when Drive Mode has been selected as the method of motor control.
Bypass Run (5) [BYPASS RUN]
If configured for Bypass Run, the relay is energized when the bypass is running. The
Bypass Run relay provides an output only when the motor is running and powered
by the bypass. The Bypass Run relay is de-energized when the motor is not being
run in bypass.
Bypass Fault (6) [BYPASS FLT]
If configured for Bypass Fault, the relay is energized when a bypass fault has
occurred or when the bypass motor overload/underload protection has tripped. The
specific nature of the fault is indicated on the bypass control panel display. The
Bypass Fault relay is de-energized during normal operation.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

46 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Bypass Not Fault (7) [BYP NOT FLT]

If configured for Bypass Not Fault, the relay is energized during normal operation.
The Bypass Not Fault relay is de-energized when power is removed from the
system, a bypass fault has occurred or when the bypass motor overload/underload
protection has tripped. The specific nature of the fault is indicated on the bypass
control panel display.
Bypass Warning (8) [BYPASS WRNG]
If configured for Bypass Warning, the relay is energized when a bypass warning is
present. The specific nature of the warning is indicated on the bypass control panel
display. The Bypass Warning relay is de-energized during normal operation.
Drive Fault (9) [DRIVE FAULT]
If configured for Drive Fault, the relay is energized when a drive fault has occurred.
The specific nature of the fault is indicated on the drive control panel display. The
Drive Fault relay is de-energized during normal control panel.
Drive Not Fault (10) [DRV NOT FLT]
If configured for Drive Not Fault, the relay is energized during normal operation. The
Drive Not Fault relay is de-energized when power is removed from the system, or
when a drive fault has occurred. The specific nature of the fault is indicated on the
drive control panel display.
Drive Warning (11) [DRIVE WARNING]
If configured for Drive Warning, the relay is energized when a drive warning is
present. The specific nature of the warning is indicated on the drive control panel
display. The Drive Warning relay is de-energized during normal operation.
Override (12) [OVERRIDE]
If configured for Override, the relay is energized when Smoke Control Override or
Advanced Override mode is selected and de-energized in all other modes. The
Override relay is de-energized during normal operation.
Bypass Hand (13) [BYPASS HAND]
If configured for Bypass Hand, the relay is energized when the motor is running in
Bypass Mode and Hand (manual operation) is selected. The Bypass Hand relay is
de-energized when Bypass Auto or Bypass Off are selected.
Bypass Off (14) [BYPASS OFF]
If configured for Bypass Off, the relay is energized when the bypass control mode
Off is selected. The Bypass Off relay is de-energized when either Bypass Auto or
Bypass Hand are selected.
Bypass Auto (15) [BYPASS AUTO]
If configured for Bypass Auto, the relay is energized when the bypass control mode
Auto is selected. The Bypass Auto relay is de-energized when either Bypass Off or
Bypass Hand are selected.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 47

Communications Control (16) [COMM CTRL]

If configured for Communications Control, the relay is energized when the
appropriate ON command is provided over the communications connection. The
relay is de-energized when the appropriate OFF command is provided over the
communications connection.
System Warning (17) [SYS WARNING]
If configured for System Warning, the relay is energized when a drive/bypass
warning is present. The specific nature of the warning is indicated on either the drive
control panel display or the bypass control panel display, depending upon the
origination of the warning. The System Warning relay is de-energized during normal
operation.
Bypass Fault/Warning (18) [BYP FLT/WRN]
If configured for Bypass Fault/Warning , the relay is energized when either a bypass
fault has occurred, the bypass motor overload/underload protection has tripped or
when a bypass warning condition is present. The Bypass Fault/Warning relay is
de-energized during normal operation.
Bypass Overload (19) [BYP OVERLD]
If configured for Bypass Overload, the relay is energized when the bypass motor
overload level has exceeded the programmed protection setting. The Bypass
Overload relay is de-energized during normal operation.
Bypass Underload (20) [BYP UNDERLD]
If configured for Bypass Underload, the relay is energized when the bypass motor
underload level has fallen below the programmed protection setting. This output is
often used for broken belt indication. The Bypass Underload relay is de-energized
during normal operation.
PCB Overtemperature (21) [PCB OVERTMP]
If configured for PCB Overtemperature, the relay is energized when the temperature
of the bypass control, printed circuit board has exceeded the fixed protection setting.
The PCB Overtemperature relay is de-energized during normal operation.
System Underload (22) [SYS UNDERLD]
If configured for System Underload, the relay is energized when either the drive or
bypass motor underload level has fallen below the programmed protection setting.
This output is often used for broken belt indication. The System Underload relay is
de-energized during normal operation.
System Fault (23) [SYSTEM FLT]
If configured for System Fault, the relay is energized when either a drive/bypass fault
has occurred or the bypass motor overload/underload protection has tripped. The
System Fault relay is de-energized during normal operation.
System Fault/Warning (24) [SYS FLT/WRN]
If configured for System Fault/Warning, the relay is energized when either a drive/
bypass fault has occurred, the bypass motor overload/underload protection has

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

48 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

tripped or when a drive/bypass warning condition is present. The System Fault/

Warning relay is de-energized during normal operation.
System External Control (25) [SYS EXT CTL]
If configured for System External Control, the relay is energized when Auto is
selected as the control mode for the selected power source (Drive or Bypass). The
System External Control relay is de-energized when either Hand or Off is selected
as the control mode for the selected power source.
System Overload (26) [SYS OVERLD]
If configured for System Overload, the relay is energized when either the drive or
bypass motor overload level has risen above the programmed protection setting.
This output is often used for motor overload indication. The System Overload relay is
de-energized during normal operation.
Contactor Fault (27) [CONTACT FLT]
If configured for Contactor Fault, the relay is energized when either a drive contactor/
bypass contactor fault has occurred. The Contactor Fault relay is de-energized
during normal operation.
System No Fault (28) [SYS NOT FLT]
If configured for System No Fault, the relay is energized during normal operation.
The System No Fault relay is de-energized when power is removed from the system,
a system fault has occurred or when the active motor overload/underload protection
has tripped. The specific nature of the fault is indicated on the control panel display
(Drive or Bypass).
Drive Link Error (29) [DRV LNK ERR]
If configured for Drive Link Error, the relay is energized when the communications
link between the drive and bypass has been interrupted. The Drive Link Error relay is
de-energized during normal operation.
External Comm Loss (30) [EXT COMM LS]
If configured for External Comm Loss, the relay is energized when the
communications link between the system (Drive/Bypass) and the external
communications network (building automation system) has been interrupted. The
External Comm Loss relay is de-energized during normal operation.
Override 2 Stop (31) [OVRD2 STOP]
If configured for Override 2 Stop, the relay is energized when the motor is expected
to stop during Override 2. For this relay to energize, Override 2 must be active and
parameter 1708 programmed for STOP. The Override 2 Stop relay is de-energized
during normal operation.
Override 2 Enable (32) [OVRD2 ENAB]
If configured for Override 2 Enable, the relay is energized when the drive is expected
to control the motor during Override 2. For this relay to energize, the drive output
contactor must be closed and any interlocks programmed as acknowledge in
parameters 1702…1707 must be present. The Override 2 Enable relay is
de-energized during normal operation.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 49

Energy Savings Estimator

The ABB E-Clipse Bypass is capable of displaying the estimated energy savings
provided by variable frequency drive operation. Additional displays provide
estimated dollar savings based upon a user provided cost per kilowatt hour and
estimated CO2 avoidance in tons.
The Energy Savings Estimator feature is activated by enabling the Learn Mode in
Parameter 1628 (LEARN MODE). Learn Mode should be activated on a day with
typical ambient conditions for best accuracy. Once the Learn Mode is enabled, the
E-Clipse Bypass will keep a running tally of the energy used to run the application for
the length of time defined in Parameter 1629. This energy usage becomes the base
line for energy savings calculations on this application.
The user can adjust the default Learn Time (48 hours) by adjusting Parameter 1629
(LEARN TIME). The minimum Learn Time setting is 6 minutes (0.1 hour) and the
maximum Learn Time setting is 200 hours. It is recommended that the E-Clipse
Bypass run in Learn Mode for at least 24 hours for increased accuracy.
The MWh Saved estimation is displayed in megawatt hours in Parameter 0114
(MWH).
The Cost Saved calculation is simply the user provided cost per kilowatt hour in
cents per kilowatt hour from Parameter 1627 (COST/KWH), times the energy saved.
The Cost Saved estimate is displayed in thousands of dollars (K$) in Parameter
0115 (COST SAVED).
The CO2 Saved calculation is a constant (0.5 tons per megawatt-hour) times the
energy saved. The CO2 Saved estimate is displayed in tons of CO2 (tn) in Parameter
0116 (CO2 SAVED). Since the application uses less energy in drive mode, less CO2
is generated by the power plant supplying power to the site.

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

50 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Energy Saving Estimator setup

Verify the connected equipment is ready for operation. Set the following Parameters:
• Parameter 1627 – set to local cost of energy in cents per kilowatt hours
• Parameter 1629 – set to desired hours of initial bypass operation to establish
energy usage baseline
• Select Bypass Mode on E-Clipse Keypad
• Parameter 1628 – set to ENABLED
• Start Bypass
• Run Bypass for at least the LEARN TIME set in Parameter 1629
• Select Drive Mode on E-Clipse Keypad
• Operate System normally

Note: The Learn Mode is terminated by any of the following conditions:

 User clears the Learn Mode request (Parameter 1628 = NOT SEL)
 The running time in Learn Mode equals the time set by Parameter 1629
 The user enters Drive Mode.

At the end of Learn Mode, the average bypass power is calculated.

From that point on, whenever the system is operated in Drive Mode, it keeps a
running total of the energy savings.

The energy savings is measured from a certain point in time. This starting point is
triggered by any of the following events:

 Learn Mode is terminated

 01.57 Inverter kWh counter (resettable)
 Drive parameter 01.15 (KWH COUNTER) is reset
 Bypass parameter 0114 (KWH SAVED) is reset

E-Clipse bypass functions overview

ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 51

Application macros

The following figures show a variety of configurations and connections using the
available E-Clipse Bypass Macros. E-Clipse Bypass macros are selected and
configured using the E-Clipse Bypass Control Panel.
E-Clipse Bypass macros provide a simple, easy method of configuring the E-Clipse
Bypass unit to the most commonly used HVAC applications.
The availability of up to four separate safety inputs (START INTERLOCKS) and a
Run Permissive, along with override and automatic transfer capabilities, provide
unparalleled integration into real world HVAC applications and building automation
systems.

Application macros
52 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

E-Clipse HVAC Default macro

E-Clipse HVAC Default

ACH580 CONTROL BOARD

X1
1 Terminal for Signal Cable Shield
Speed Reference / Process Setpoint 2 Analog Input 1
3 Analog Input Common
4 10V / 10mA Reference Voltage for Potentiometer
Process Feedback Signal 5 Analog Input 2
6 Analog Input Common

E-CLIPSE BYPASS CONTROL BOARD

X2
1 +24VDC
2 +24VDC
3 Digital Input Common
4 GND
Customer Auto Start 5 Digital Input 1 (Parameter 1601) START/STOP
6 Digital Input 2 (Parameter 1602, 06) NOT SEL
Firestat, Freezestat, High Static Switch 7 Digital Input 3 (Parameter 1603) INTERLOCK 1
8 Digital Input 4 (Parameter 1604, 07) NOT SEL
9 Digital Input 5 (Parameter 1605, 1701) NOT SEL
10 Digital Input 5 (Fixed) SMOKE CONTROL* (Override 1)

X2
11 Relay Output 1 (Parameter 1401) BYP NOT FLT
12 Default Operation: Bypass Not Faulted 11 connected to 13
13 Bypass Faulted 11 connected to 13

14 Relay Output 2 (Parameter 1404) SYS RUNNING

15 Default Operation: System Running 14 connected to 16
16

17 Relay Output 3 (Parameter 1407) SYS STARTED

18 Default Operation: System Started 17 connected to 19
19

20 Relay Output 4 (Parameter 1410) BYPASS SEL

21 Default Operation: Bypass Selected 20 connected to 22
22

23 Relay Output 5 (Parameter 1413) BYPASS AUTO

24 Default Operation: Bypass In Auto 23 connected to 25
25

Parameters Changed Relative to E-Clipse HVAC Default

Parameter Number Description Setting

* Smoke Control (Override1) is a fixed input. Closing Digital Input 6 will place the E-Clipse Bypass in Smoke
Control mode which may reassign the function of the other Digital Inputs. Refer to the Smoke Control
(Override1) documentation.

Application macros
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 53

Damper macro
Damper
ACH580 CONTROL BOARD

X1
1 Terminal for Signal Cable Shield
Speed Reference / Process Setpoint 2 Analog Input 1
3 Analog Input Common
4 10V / 10mA Reference Voltage for Potentiometer
Process Feedback Signal 5 Analog Input 2
6 Analog Input Common

E-CLIPSE BYPASS CONTROL BOARD

X2
1 +24VDC
2 +24VDC
3 Digital Input Common
4 GND
Customer Auto Start 5 Digital Input 1 (Parameter 1601) START/STOP
Damper End Switch 6 Digital Input 2 (Parameter 1602) RUN PERMISSIVE
Firestat, Freezestat, High Static Switch 7 Digital Input 3 (Parameter 1603) INTERLOCK 1
Firestat, Freezestat, High Static Switch 8 Digital Input 4 (Parameter 1604) INTERLOCK 2
9 Digital Input 5 (Parameter 1605) NOT SEL
10 Digital Input 5 (Fixed) SMOKE CONTROL* (Override 1)

X2
11 Relay Output 1 (Parameter 1401) BYP NOT FLT
12 Default Operation: Bypass Not Faulted 11 connected to 13
13 Bypass Faulted 11 connected to 12

14 Relay Output 2 (Parameter 1404) SYS RUNNING

15 Default Operation: System Running 14 connected to 16
16

17 Relay Output 3 (Parameter 1407) SYS STARTED

18 Default Operation: System Started 17 connected to 19
To Damper Actuator
19

20 Relay Output 4 (Parameter 1410) BYPASS SEL

21 Default Operation: Bypass Selected 20 connected to 22
22

23 Relay Output 5 (Parameter 1413) BYPASS AUTO

24 Default Operation: Bypass In Auto 23 connected to 25
25

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Number Description Setting
1602 Damper End Switch DI2
PERMISSIVE
1604 Firestat, Freezestat, High Static Switch DI4
INTERLOCK 2

* Smoke Control (Override1) is a fixed input. Closing Digital Input 6 will place the E-Clipse Bypass in Smoke
Control mode which may reassign the function of the other Digital Inputs. Refer to the Smoke Control
(Override1) documentation.

Application macros
54 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Retrofit macro
Retrofit
ACH580 CONTROL BOARD

X1
1 Terminal for Signal Cable Shield
Speed Reference / Process Setpoint 2 Analog Input 1
3 Analog Input Common
4 10V / 10mA Reference Voltage for Potentiometer
Process Feedback Signal 5 Analog Input 2
6 Analog Input Common

E-CLIPSE BYPASS CONTROL BOARD

X2
1 +24VDC
2 +24VDC
3 Digital Input Common
4 GND
Customer Auto Start 5 Digital Input 1 (Parameter 1601) START/STOP
Damper End Switch 6 Digital Input 2 (Parameter 1602) RUN PERMISSIVE
Firestat, Freezestat, High Static Switch 7 Digital Input 3 (Parameter 1603) INTERLOCK 1
8 Digital Input 4 (Parameter 1604, 07) NOT SEL
Formerly Fireman’s Override 9 Digital Input 5 (Parameter 1605) OVERRIDE 2 (E-Bypass Retrofit)
Formerly Bypass Override 10 Digital Input 5 (Fixed) SMOKE CONTROL* (Override 1)

X2
11 Relay Output 1 (Parameter 1401) BYP NOT FLT
12 Default Operation: Bypass Not Faulted 11 connected to 13
13 Bypass Faulted 11 connected to 12

14 Relay Output 2 (Parameter 1404) SYS RUNNING

15 Default Operation: System Running 14 connected to 16
16

17 Relay Output 3 (Parameter 1407) SYS STARTED

To Damper Actuator 18 Default Operation: System Started 17 connected to 19
19

20 Relay Output 4 (Parameter 1410) BYPASS SEL

21 Default Operation: Bypass Selected 20 connected to 22
22

23 Relay Output 5 (Parameter 1413) BYPASS AUTO

24 Default Operation: Bypass In Auto 23 connected to 25
25

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Number Description Setting
1602 Damper End Switch DI2
PERMISSIVE
1701 Refer to page 37 DI5
OVERRIDE 2 (Advanced Override)

* Smoke Control (Override1) is a fixed input. Closing Digital Input 6 will place the E-Clipse Bypass in Smoke
Control mode which may reassign the function of the other Digital Inputs. Refer to the Smoke Control
(Override1) documentation.

Application macros
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 55

Smoke Control (Override1) macro

ACH580 CONTROL BOARD

X1
1 Terminal for Signal Cable Shield
Speed Reference / Process Setpoint 2 Analog Input 1
3 Analog Input Common
4 10V / 10mA Reference Voltage for Potentiometer
Process Feedback Signal 5 Analog Input 2
6 Analog Input Common

E-CLIPSE BYPASS CONTROL BOARD

X2
1 +24VDC
2 +24VDC
3 Digital Input Common
4 GND
Fire Shutdown & Customer Auto Start 5 Digital Input 1 (Parameter 1601) START/STOP
Damper End Switch 6 Digital Input 2 (Parameter 1602) RUN PERMISSIVE
High Static Switch 7 Digital Input 3 (Parameter 1603) INTERLOCK 1
Manual Smoke Control & Supply SD 8 Digital Input 4 (Parameter 1604) INTERLOCK 2
Freezestat & Return SD 9 Digital Input 5 (Parameter 1605) INTERLOCK 3
Automatic Smoke Control 10 Digital Input 6 (Fixed) SMOKE CONTROL* (Override 1)

X2
11 Relay Output 1 (Parameter 1401) BYP NOT FLT
12 Default Operation: Bypass Not Faulted 11 connected to 13
13 Bypass Faulted 11 connected to 12

14 Relay Output 2 (Parameter 1404) SYS RUNNING

15 Default Operation: System Running 14 connected to 16
16

17 Relay Output 3 (Parameter 1407) SYS STARTED

To Damper Actuator 18 Default Operation: System Started 17 connected to 19
19

20 Relay Output 4 (Parameter 1410) BYPASS SEL

21 Default Operation: Bypass Selected 20 connected to 22
22

23 Relay Output 5 (Parameter 1413) BYPASS AUTO

24 Default Operation: Bypass In Auto 23 connected to 25
25

Parameter Number Description Setting

1602 Damper End Switch DI2
PERMISSIVE
1603 High Pressure Switch, High Priority Safeties DI3
INTERLOCK 1
1604 Supply Smoke Detector, Emergency Shutdown DI4
INTERLOCK 2
1605 Freezestat, Low Priority Safeties DI5
INTERLOCK 3

* Smoke Control (Override1) is a fixed input. Closing Digital Input 6 will place the E-Clipse Bypass in Automatic
Smoke Control mode. The Macro change will be implemented when DI6 closes. All Interlock and Permissives
are required before the motor runs. Refer to the Smoke Control (Override1) documentation.

Application macros
56 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Typical wiring diagram showing a conventional wiring and use of the E-Clipse
Bypass using Override 1 macro.
Typical system wiring with use of E-Clipse Bypass:
X2 E-Clipse Bypass Controller Input

3 Normal Operation:
• Close Start/Stop (X2:5)
4 Smoke • Fan starts, assuming that
Normal X2: 6, 7, 8, and 9 are all
Control
closed
(DI1) Start/Stop
5 [Terminal X2:5]
1 0 Emergency Shutdown:
Normal
Auto Start / Stop • Open auto fire shutdown,
(DI2) Run Enable
6 1 1 unit stops
Damper [Terminal X2:6]
End Switch Smoke Control Mode:
(DI3) High Priority
7 Safeties 1 1 • Close contact on X2:10
High [Terminal X2:7]
Manual
Pressure • Fan starts regardless of
Pressure
(DI4) Emergency position of internal HOA
8 Shutdown 1 1 switch and inputs
[Terminal X2:8]
Supply Duct Auto Fire X2:5 and X2:9
Smoke Shut Down
9
(DI5) Low Priority Safeties
1 0 • Inputs X2:6, 7 and 8
[Terminal X2:9]
Freezestat Return Duct
followed
Smoke
(DI6) Smoke Control
• Internal overloads
10 0 1 followed
[Terminal X2:10]
Auto
Pressure

Application macros
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 57

Alternate wiring examples

Alternate wiring examples showing analog input connections for using PID control in
ACH580. Also, these examples show how 24VAC can be connected to digital input
on E-Clipse Bypass Control Board.

ACH580 CONTROL BOARD

X1
1 Terminal for Signal Cable Shield
Speed Reference / Process Setpoint 2 Analog Input 1
3 Analog Input Common
4 10V / 10mA Reference Voltage for Potentiometer
Process Feedback Signal 5 Analog Input 2
6 Analog Input Common
7 Analog Input 1
8 Analog Input 2
9 Analog Input Common

10 +24VDC
11 GND
12 Digital Input Common

Customer Supplied “24VAC” Wiring

E-CLIPSE BYPASS CONTROL BOARD

24VAC X2
1 +24VDC
2 +24VDC
3 Digital Input Common
4 GND
Customer Auto Start 5 Digital Input 1 (Parameter 1601) START/STOP
6 Digital Input 2 (Parameter 1602, 06) PERMISSIVE, INTERLOCK 4
Firestat, Freezestat,
7 Digital Input 3 (Parameter 1603) INTERLOCK 1
High Static Switch
8 Digital Input 4 (Parameter 1604, 07) INTERLOCK 2, RESET SRC
9 Digital Input 5 (Parameter 1605, 1701) INTERLOCK 3, OVERRIDE 2
10 Digital Input 6 (Fixed) SMOKE CONTROL* (Override 1)
X2
11 Relay Output 1 (Parameter 1401) BYP NOT FLT
12 Default Operation: Bypass Not Faulted 11 connected to 13
13 Bypass Faulted 11 connected to 12

14 Relay Output 2 (Parameter 1404) SYS RUNNING

15 Default Operation: System Running 14 connected to 16
16

17 Relay Output 3 (Parameter 1407) SYS STARTED

18 Default Operation: System Started 17 connected to 19
19

20 (Parameter 1410)
Relay Output 4 BYPASS SEL
21
Default Operation: Bypass Selected 20 connected to 22
22

23 Relay Output 5 (Parameter 1413) BYPASS AUTO

24 Default Operation: Bypass In Auto 23 connected to 25
25

Application macros
58 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Application macros
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 59

Parameters

Parameter list and descriptions

Parameter data is specific to bypass firmware version.

Group 01: Actual Data

Group 01: Actual Data
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
0101 MOTOR CURR 0.1 A — Display motor current in any mode.
0102 INPUT VOLT 1V — Average of line-line input voltages
0103 DI STATUS 1 000000 - 111111 — DI1-> 110010 <- DI6
0104 RO STATUS 1 00000 - 11111 — RO1-> 11001 <- RO5
0105 PCB TEMP 0.1 ºC — Temperature of bypass board
0106 KW 1 kWh 0 - 65535 0 Bypass-mode kilowatt hours
HOURS (R) (resettable).
0107 COMM RO 1 0-FFFFh — Serial link control word that can be
linked to relay output control (see
group 14)
0108 RUN TIME(R) 1 hr 0 - 65535 hr 0 Bypass-mode run time (resettable).
0109 ON TIME 1(R) 1 day 0 - 65535 days 0 Total power on time of bypass, days
(resettable)
0110 ON TIME 2(R) 2sec 00:00:00 - 0 Total power on time of bypass,
23:59:58 hr:min:sec (resettable)
0111 A-B VOLT 1V — Phase A - Phase B voltage
0112 B-C VOLT 1V — Phase B - Phase C voltage
0113 C-A VOLT 1V — Phase C - Phase A voltage
0114 MWH(R) 0.001 MWH - 1 0.001 MWH - 0 Drive kWh savings over bypass
SAVED MWH 65535 MWH operation (resettable)
0115 COST SAVED(R) 0.001 K$ - 1 K$ 0.001 K$ - 65535 0 Drive cost savings over bypass
K$ operation (reset by parameter 0114)
0116 CO2 SAVED(R) 0.1 tn 0.1 - 6553.5 tn 0 Drive CO2 savings over bypass
operation (reset by parameter 0114)
0117 KWH SAVE L 1 0 - 65535 0 Calculated drive savings (kWh) =
(65536 x [parameter 0017 +
parameter 0018])/256
0118 KWH SAVE H 1 0 - 65535 0 Calculated drive savings (kWh) =
(65536 x [parameter 0017 +
parameter 0018])/256
(R) Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode.

Parameters
60 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Group 03: Status

Group 03: Status
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
0301 FBUS CW 1 — b0: 1 = Start 0 Control word 1 from field
b1: 1 = Fault reset bus
b2: 1 = Run disable
b3: 1 = Field bus local
b4: 1 = Start disable 1
b5: 1 = Start disable 2
b6: 1 = Start disable 3
b7: 1 = Start disable 4
b8: 1 = Override 2
b9: 1 = Link On
b10 - b15: not used
0303 FBUS SW 1 — b0: 1 = Ready 0 Status word 1 to field
b1: 1 = Enabled bus
b2: 1 = Started
b3: 1 = Running
b4: 1 = Field bus local
b5: 1 = Fault
b6: 1 = Warning
b7: 1 = Notice
b8: 1 = Request control
b9: 1 = Override
b10: 1 = Powered up
b11: 1 = Bypass mode
b12: 1 = Panel local mode
b13 - 15: not used
0305 FLT WORD 1 — b0: 1 = Coil current measurement 0 Bypass fault status,
b1: 1 = Bypass contact stuck word 1
b2: 1 = Drive contact stuck
b3: 1 = Bypass coil open
b4: 1 = Drive coil open
b5: 1 = Undervoltage
b6: not used
b7: 1 = Drive AI2 fault
b8: 1 = Motor overload
b9: 1 = Input phase A loss
b10: 1 = Input phase B loss
b11:1 = Input phase C loss
12: 1 = Drive 1st start fault
b13: 1 = coil power supply fault
b14: not used
b15: 1 = Earth fault
0306 FLT WORD 2 — b0: 1 = Motor Underload 0 Bypass fault status,
b1: 1 = Max cycling fault word 2
b2: 1 = Drive link fault
b3: 1 = Reverse rotation
b4: 1 = Phase A current
measurement
b5: 1 = Phase C current
measurement
b6: 1 = Bypass coil shorted
b7: 1 = Drive coil shorted
b8: not used
b9: not used
b10: 1 = Invalid sub-assembly
b11: 1 = Serial 1 Err
b12: 1 = EFB Config File
b13: 1 = Force Trip
b14: 1 = EFB 1
b15: 1 = EFB 2

Parameters
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 61

Group 03: Status

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
0307 FLT WORD 3 — b0: 1 = EFB 3 0 Bypass fault status,
b1: 1 = Open motor phase word 3
b2: not used
b3: not used
b4: 1 = Control board
temperature
b5: not used
b6: not used
b7: not used
b8: 1 = RBIO ID error
b9: 1 = Stack overflow
b10: 1 = Timed scan
overflow
b11: 1 = Serial flash corrupt
b12: 1 = Unknown drive
b13: 1 = Unknown bypass
b14 - b15: not used
0308 WRN WORD 1 — b0: 1 = Input phase A loss 0 Bypass warning status,
b1: 1 = Input phase B loss word 1
b2: 1 = Input phase C loss
b3: 1 = Auto transfer active
b4: 1 = External Comm
Error
b5: 1 = Permissive
b6: 1 = PCB Temp
b7: 1 = Drive Setup
b8: 1 = Bypass run delay
b9: 1 = Motor Temp
b10: 1 = Underload
b11: 1 = Bypass disabled
b12: 1 = Drive link error
b13: 1 = Drive test
b14: 1 = Drive 1st start
needed
b15: 1 = Low input voltage
0309 WRN WORD 2 — b0: not used 0 Bypass warning status,
b1: not used word 2
b2: Override 1
b3: Override 2
b4: 1 = Interlock 1
b5: 1 = Interlock 2
b6: 1 = Interlock 3
b7: 1 = Interlock 4
b8: 1 = Mode auto lock
b9: 1 = Mode local lock
b10: 1 = Comm config error
b11: 1 = FIG parameter
configuration
b12: 1 = Drive faulted
b13 - b15: not used

Group 04: Fault Log

Group 04: Fault Log
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
0401 LAST FAULT 1 3001 - 3999 0 Last fault declared
See 'Faults' page
0402 F1 TIME 1 1, days ago 0 - 65535 0 Time since last fault, days
0403 F1 TIME 2 2, ago 00:00:00 - 23:59:58 0 Time since last fault,
hr:min:sec
0404 F1 VOLTAGE 1V 0 - 1200V 0 Input voltage at last fault
0405 F1 CURRENT 0.1A 0.0 - 6553.5A 0 Motor current at last fault
0406 F1 EVENT 1 — See parameter 501 0 Last event status before last
fault
0407 F1 E1 TIME 2, before 00:00:00 - 23:59:58 0 Time before last fault of last
event: hr:min:sec if time < 1
day
1, days before 0 - 9999 days if time >= 1 day
0408 F1 EVENT 2 — See parameter 501 0 2nd to last event status before
last fault

Parameters
62 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Group 04: Fault Log

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
0409 F1 E2 TIME 2, before 00:00:00 - 23:59:58 0 Time before last fault of 2nd
last event: hr:min:sec if time <
1 day
1, days before 0 - 9999 days if time >= 1 day
0410 FAULT 2 1 3001 - 3999 0 2nd to last fault
See 'Faults' page
0411 F2 TIME 1 1, days ago 0 - 65535 0 Time since 2nd to last fault,
days
0412 F2 TIME 2 2, ago 00:00:00 - 23:59:58 0 Time since 2nd to last fault,
hr:min:sec
0413 F2 VOLTAGE 1V 0 - 1200V 0 Input voltage at 2nd to last
fault
0414 F2 CURRENT 0.1A 0.0 - 6553.5A 0 Motor current at 2nd to last
fault
0415 F2 EVENT 1 — See parameter 501 0 Last event status before 2nd
to last fault
0416 F2 E1 TIME 2, before 00:00:00 - 23:59:58 0 Time before 2nd last fault of
last event: hr:min:sec if time <
1 day
1, days before 0 - 9999 days if time >= 1 day
0417 F2 EVENT 2 — See parameter 501 0 2nd to last event before 2nd to
last fault
0418 F2 E2 TIME 2, before 00:00:00 - 23:59:58 0 Time before 2nd last fault of
2nd last event: hr:min:sec if
time < 1 day
1, days before 0 - 9999 days if time >= 1 day
0419 FAULT 3 1 3001 - 3999 0 3rd to last fault
See 'Faults' page
0420 FAULT 4 1 3001 - 3999 0 4th to last fault
See 'Faults' page
0421 FAULT 5 1 3001 - 3999 0 5th to last fault
See 'Faults' page

Group 05: Event Log

Group 05: Event Log
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
0501 LAST EVENT — b0: 1 = Bypass mode 0 Status at last event
b1: 1 = Safeties In
b2: 1 = Permissive
b3: 1 = Start
b4: 1 = In Auto Transfer
b5: 1 = Override 2
b6: 1 = Override 1
b7: 1 = Drive Fault
b8: 1 = Bypass Fault
b9: 1 = System Started
b10: 1 = System Running
b11:1 = Drive First Start
Completed
b12: not used
b13: not used
b15,b14: 0,0 = Off; 0,1 =
Hand, 1,0 = Auto; 1,1 = not
valid
0502 E1 TIME 1 1, days ago 0 - 65535 0 Time since last event,
days
0503 E1 TIME 2 2, ago 00:00:00 - 23:59:58 0 Time since last event,
hr:min:sec
0504 EVENT 2 — See parameter 501 0 Status of 2nd to last event
0505 E2 TIME 1 1, days ago 0 - 65535 0 Time since 2nd last event,
days
0506 E2 TIME 2 2, ago 00:00:00 - 23:59:58 0 Time since 2nd last event,
hr:min:sec
0507 EVENT 3 — See parameter 501 0 Status of 3rd to last event

Parameters
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 63

Group 05: Event Log

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
0508 E3 TIME 1 1, days ago 0 - 65535 0 Time since 3rd last event,
days
0509 E3 TIME 2 2, ago 00:00:00 - 23:59:58 0 Time since 3rd last event,
hr:min:sec
0510 EVENT 4 — See parameter 501 0 Status of 4th to last event
0511 E4 TIME 1 1, days ago 0 - 65535 0 Time since 4th last event,
days
0512 E4 TIME 2 2, ago 00:00:00 - 23:59:58 0 Time since 4th last event,
hr:min:sec

Group 14: Relay Outputs

Group 14: Relay Outputs
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
1401 RO1 SELECT 1 0 = NOT SEL BYP NOT Selects function for digital
1 = SYS READY FLT output. Define the event or
2 = SYS RUNNING (7) condition that activates
3 = SYS STARTED relay 1.
4 = BYPASS SEL
5 = BYPASS RUN
6 = BYPASS FLT
7 = BYP NOT FLT
8 = BYPASS WRNG
9 = DRIVE FAULT
10 = DRV NOT FLT
11 = DRIVE WARNING
12 = OVERRIDE
13 = BYPASS HAND
14 = BYPASS OFF
15 = BYPASS AUTO
16 = COMM CTRL
17 = SYS WARNING
18 = BYP FLT/WRN
19 = BYP OVERLD
20 = BYP UNDERLD
21 = PCB OVERTMP
22 = SYS UNDERLD
23 = SYSTEM FLT
24 = SYS FLT/WRN
25 = SYS EXT CTL
26 = SYS OVERLD
27 = CONTACT FLT
28 = SYS NOT FLT
29 = DRV LNK ERR
30 = EXT COMM LS
31 = OVRD2 STOP
32 = OVRD2 ENAB
1402 R1 ON DLY 0.1 sec 0-3600.0s 0s Delay from active state to
active output.
1403 R1 OFF DLY 0.1 sec 0-3600.0s 0s Delay from inactive state
to inactive output.
1404 RO2 SELECT 1 See RO 1 Select. SYS
RUNNING
(2)
1405 R2 ON DLY 0.1 sec 0-3600.0s 0s Delay from active state to
active output.
1406 R2 OFF DLY 0.1 sec 0-3600.0s 0s Delay from inactive state
to inactive output.
1407 RO3 SELECT 1 See RO 1 Select. SYS
STARTED
(3)
1408 R3 ON DLY 0.1 sec 0-3600.0s 0s Delay from active state to
active output.
1409 R3 OFF DLY 0.1 sec 0-3600.0s 0s Delay from inactive state
to inactive output.
1410 RO4 SELECT 1 See RO 1 Select. BYPASS
SEL
(4)

Parameters
64 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Group 14: Relay Outputs

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
1411 R4 ON DLY 0.1 sec 0-3600.0s 0s Delay from active state to
active output.
1412 R4 OFF DLY 0.1 sec 0-3600.0s 0s Delay from inactive state
to inactive output.
1413 RO5 SELECT 1 See RO 1 Select. BYPASS
AUTO
(13)
1414 R5 ON DLY 0.1 sec 0-3600.0s 0s Delay from active state to
active output.
1415 R5 OFF DLY 0.1 sec 0-3600.0s 0s Delay from inactive state
to inactive output.

Group 16: System Control

Group 16: System Control
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
1601 START/STOP 1 0 = NOT SEL DI 1 Selects source for system start
1 = DI1 (1) command.
2 = COMM
1602 PERMISSIVE 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Selects source for the
1 = DI2 (0) permissive command.
2 = COMM
1603 INTERLOCK 1 1 0 = NOT SEL DI 3 Selects source for the interlock 1
1 = DI3 (1) command.
2 = COMM
1604 INTERLOCK 2 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Selects source for the interlock 2
1 = DI4 (0) command.
2 = COMM
1605 INTERLOCK 3 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Selects source for the interlock 3
1 = DI5 (0) command.
2 = COMM
1606 INTERLOCK 4 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Selects source for the interlock 4
1 = DI2 (0) command.
2 = COMM
1607 RESET SRC 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Selects source for fault reset
1 = DI4 (0) command (rising edge).
2 = COMM
1608 AUTO XFR 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Enabled allows auto transfer to
1 = ENABLE (0) bypass on all drive faults except
the conditional faults which
require an additional enable.
NOT SEL prevents auto transfer
to bypass for all drive faults
including the conditional faults.
1609 OC TRANSFR 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Drive over current causes auto
1 = ENABLE (0) transfer. Requires global auto
transfer enable also.
1610 OV TRANSFR 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Drive over voltage causes auto
1 = ENABLE (0) transfer. Requires global auto
transfer enable also.
1611 UV TRANSFR 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Drive under voltage causes auto
1 = ENABLE (0) transfer. Requires global auto
transfer enable also.
1612 AI TRANSFR 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Drive AI loss causes auto
1 = ENABLE (0) transfer. Requires global auto
transfer enable also.
1613 BP DISABLE 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Disables bypass mode.
1 = DISABLE (0)
1614 BP RUN DLY 1 sec 0 - 300 secs 0s Bypass contactor pick-up delay
when starting bypass or
transferring from Drive mode.
1615 SAVE PARAM 1 0 = DONE 0 Save User Settings (SaveImm +
1 = SAVE SavePwrd).

Parameters
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 65

Group 16: System Control

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
1616 DISP WRNGS 1 0 = DISABLE ENABLE Enables warnings to be
1 = ENABLE (1) displayed:
INP PHASE A LOSS,
INP PHASE B LOSS,
INP PHASE C LOSS,
MTR OVERLOAD,
BYPASS DISABLED,
DRIVE SETUP,
PCB TEMP
DRIVE LINK ERROR
DRIVE FAULTED
1617 DRIVE TEST 1 0 = DISABLE DISABLE Enables drive test mode. Drive
1 = ENABLE (0) contactor is opened.
1618 PASS CODE 1 0 - 65535 123 Pass code entry to edit panel
lock parameter and view/edit
security lock parameters. The
security parameters are
1640 – 1644. Default: 123
1619 PAR LOCK 1 0 = LOCKED OPEN When switched to "LOCKED"
1 = OPEN (1) prevents parameter changes
from panel. Does not affect to
Field Bus writes, expect
changing the lock value itself:
correct password must always
be set first, even in case of Field
Bus.
1620 PERMSV TXT 1 0 = PERMISSIVE PERMISSIVE Alternative text choices for
1 = DAMPER (0) warning 4006.
END SWTCH
2 = VALVE
OPENING
3 = PRE-LUBE
CYCLE
1621 INTLK1 TXT 1 0 = INTERLOCK 1 INTERLOCK 1 Alternative text choices for
1 = VIBRATION (0) warning 4021.
SWITCH
2 = FIRESTAT
3 = FREEZESTAT
4=
OVERPRESSUR
E
5 = VIBRATION
TRIP
6 = SMOKE
WARNING
7 = SAFETY
OPEN
8 = LOW
SUCTION
1622 INTLK2 TXT 1 0 = INTERLOCK 2 INTERLOCK 2 Alternative text choices for
... (0) warning 4022.
See parameter 1621 for range.
1623 INTLK3 TXT 1 0 = INTERLOCK 3 INTERLOCK 3 Alternative text choices for
... (0) warning 4023.
See parameter 1621 for range.
1624 INTLK4 TXT 1 0 = INTERLOCK 4 INTERLOCK 4 Alternative text choices for
... (0) warning 4024.
See parameter 1621 for range.
1625 COMM CTRL 1 0 = DRIVE ONLY DRIVE ONLY Selects comm control mode. In
1 = SYSTEM (0) drive only mode, control of drive
is made through drive points,
and control of bypass over
comms is not possible. In
system mode, control of system
(bypass or drive) is made
through bypass points.

Parameters
66 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Group 16: System Control

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
1626 MODE LOCK 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL When Mode Lock is AUTO
1 = AUTO MODE (0) MODE, the control panel will not
2 = LOCAL MODE allow switching to Hand or Off.
When Mode Lock is LOCAL
MODE, the control panel will not
allow switching to Auto.
1627 COST/KWH 0.1 c/kWh 0.0 - 100.00 c/ 7.0 c/kWh Cost of energy: cents/kWh
kWh
1628 LEARN MODE 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL When enabled, bypass learns
1 = ENABLED (0) average power consumption
while operating in bypass mode
1629 LEARN TIME 0.1 Hr 0.0 - 200.0 Hr 48.0 Hr Time that learn mode will be
active after it is enabled
1630 START REV 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL
1 = DI2 (0) Drve

DI3

DComm

DComm

DI2

Rev Request
+24V
ByPass

• Selects source for drive start

reverse command for a
constant frequency for wiring
diagram above and
programming below.
• Reverse request can only be
selected for DI2 on the
E-Clipse
• Drive Param 20.21
(Direction) needs to be set for
REQUEST.
• Drive Param 28.22 (Constant
Frequency Sel 1) needs to be
set to DI3.
• Drive Param 28.26 (Constant
Frequency 1) needs to be set
for frequency required. Use
positive value.
• Drive Param 28.21 bit 1
(Direction enable) set to 1.
• When E-Clipse input DI2 is
energized the bypass sets
drive’s reverse run request
over the communication link.
• The same signal input for
bypass DI2 goes to Drive DI3
and sets constant frequency.
• The Reverse request has
priority over normal Run
input, this means that if
both DI1 and DI2 are closed
at the same time motor will
run reverse at the constant
frequency.

Parameters
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 67

Group 16: System Control

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
1631 DRV/BYPASS 1 0 = KEYPAD KEYPAD Selects source for drive/bypass
1 = DI5 (0) mode command.
(0) Keypad – The drive/bypass
mode selection is made
from the bypass keypad
(DRIVE or BYPASS select
keys).
(1) DI5 – The drive/bypass
mode selection from the
bypass keypad is disabled
and selection is made from
the digital input. When DI5
is energized the system is
set to bypass mode.
1640 PASS SET 0 – 65535 0 Sets the passcode that is
compared against parameter
1618- PASS CODE. Passcode
required to open.
1641 PASS CNFRM 0 – 65535 0 Confirms the setting of
parameter 1640 - PASS SET.
1642 ABB ACCESS 0 = LOCKED LOCKED Locks access to factory only
1 = OPEN (0) parameters and factory debug
tool. Passcode required to open.
1643 FB LOCK 0 = LOCKED OPEN • Allows Fieldbus writing of
1 = OPEN (1) parameters. Applies to
embedded and FBA.
• Does not affect control of the
bypass over the fieldbus.
• Does not affect bypass
parameters in group 53- FBA
DATA OUT.
• Does not affect writing of
parameters to the drive.
Passcode required to open.
1644 DNLD LOCK 0 = LOCKED OPEN Allows locking of program and
1 = OPEN (1) serial flash downloads.
Passcode required to open.

Group 17: Override 2

Group 17: Override 2
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
1701 OVERRIDE 2 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Selects source for override 2
1 = DI5 (0) command.
2 = COMM
1702 PERMSV OVR 1 0 = ACKNOWLEDGE DISREGARD Acknowledge or disregard
1 = DISREGARD (1) permissive during override 2.
1703 INTLK1 OVR 1 0 = ACKNOWLEDGE DISREGARD Acknowledge or disregard
1 = DISREGARD (1) interlock 1 during override 2.
1704 INTLK2 OVR 1 0 = ACKNOWLEDGE DISREGARD Acknowledge or disregard
1 = DISREGARD (1) interlock 2 during override 2.
1706 INTLK4 OVR 1 0 = ACKNOWLEDGE DISREGARD Acknowledge or disregard
1 = DISREGARD (1) interlock 4 during override 2.
1707 FAULTS OVR 1 0 = ACKNOWLEDGE DISREGARD Acknowledge or disregard
1 = DISREGARD (1) overrideable bypass faults during
override 2.
All faults can be overridden
except:
3009, 3021, 3022, 3023, 3024,
3027, 3034, 3101, 3202, 3203,
3204, 3205, 3206
1708 OVRD2 MODE 1 1 = BYPASS BYPASS 1 = Use bypass contactor only
2 = VFD (1) 2 = Use drive only
3 = VFD/BYPASS 3 = Use drive, switch to bypass
4 = STOP on drive fault
4 = Both contactors open

Parameters
68 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Note: For wiring requirements and additional configuration detail refer to Advanced
Override Mode (Override 2) on page 37.

Group 30: Fault Function

Group 30: Fault Function
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
3001 UL ACTION 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL Selects action to be taken if
1 = FAULT (0) underload occurs.
2 = WARNING
3002 UL TIME 1 sec 10 - 400 sec 20 sec Time below underload level
before fault is declared.
3003 UL TRIP % 1% 0 - 100% 20% Sets power level at which
underload is declared.
3004 COMM LOSS 1 0 = NOT SEL NOT SEL This parameter serves similar
1 = FAULT (0) purpose as parameter 58.14 in
2 = CONST SP7 drive which specifies behavior if
3 = LAST SPEED communication link goes down.
3005 COMM TIME 0.1s 0.0 - 600.0s 0 Sets the communication fault
time used with COMM LOSS
parameter. A value of “0”
disables the timer.
3006 PHASE LOSS 1 0 = DISABLE 1 Provides input phase loss
1 = ENABLE detection for bypass mode.
3007 PHASE SEQ 1 0 = DISABLE 1 Indicates if drive and bypass
1 = ENABLE would run the motor in the same
direction.

Group 32: Supervisory Control

Group 32: Supervisory Control
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
3201 SUPER CTRL 1 0 = DISABLE DISABLE Enable supervisory control in
1 = ENABLE (0) bypass mode.
3202 START LVL 1% 0 - 100% 70% Value of drive's AI2 that causes
bypass contactor closure.
Applies only in supervisory mode.
3203 STOP LEVEL 1% 0 - 100% 30% Value of drive's AI2 that causes
bypass contactor opening.
Applies only in supervisory mode.
3204 START DLY 1s 20 - 3600s 40s Time that close condition must be
present before contactor is closed.
Applies only in supervisory mode.
3205 STOP DLY 1s 20 - 3600s 60s Time that open condition must be
present before contactor is
opened.
Applies only in supervisory mode.
3206 FBK LOSS 1 0 = BYP STOP BYP START Bypass contactor operation if drive
1 = BYP START (1) link fault, drive AI2 loss or
excessive cycling.

Group 33: Information

Group 33: Information
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
3301 FW VERSION hex — Revision of main application
firmware.
3302 PT VERSION hex — Revision of panel text file.
3303 LP VERSION — — Loading package version.
3304 CB VERSION — — Control board version.
3305 TEST DATE — —

Parameters
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 69

Group 33: Information

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
3306 DRIVE TYPE — — Drive Type - copy of drive's
parameter 07.03.
3307 SUB ASMBLY — — Bypass Sub assembly type.
3308 PLANT CODE 1 0-9 0 Part of bypass serial number:
Shows 1 digit plant code. Identifies
the factory where the device was
made
3309 MFG 1 0107 - 5299 0 Part of bypass serial number:
DATE Shows 4 digit manufacturing date.
WWYY. (2 digits for the week
number 01-52 and 2 digits for the
year)
3310 UNIT 1 00001 - 65535 0 Part of bypass serial number:
NUM Shows 5 digit unit number here.
Tells order number of a unit
manufactured during a certain
week. Maximum number is 65525.

Group 50: Bypass EFB

Group 50: Bypass EFB
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
5003 BP MAC ID 1 0 - 65535 256 Bypass station ID (NODE ADDRESS)
5008 BP OK MSG 1 0 - 65535 0 Contains a count of valid messages received by the
bypass.
During normal operation, this counter is increasing
constantly.
5013 TOKEN CNT 1 0 - 65535 0 Contains a count of the number of times the bypass
has received the token.
5040 BP OB ID L 1 0 - 65535 0 BACnet Device object ID lower word.
The Bypass’s Device object ID must be unique
across all BACnet devices in the building network.
Valid values are 0…4194303. The Device Object ID
is formed as a combination of parameter 5040 and
5099. To set an ID from 1 to 65535 set this
parameter = to the desired ID and set 5099 = 0. To
set an ID greater than 65535, set this parameter to
the lower 4 digits of the ID and set 5099 to the
remaining upper digits. For example, to set the ID to
71234, set the 5040 = 1234 and 5099 = 7. The
default values of 5040 = 0 and 5099 = 0 are
handled specially. This case uses parameter 5003,
the MAC ID as the value for the device object ID.
5099 BP OB ID H 1 0 - 419 0 BACnet Device object ID upper word. See
parameter 5040 for description of how to use this
parameter.

Parameters
70 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Group 51: External Comm Mode

Group 51: External Comm Mode
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
5101 FBA TYPE 1 0 = NOT DEFINED — Displays type of attached
1 = Profibus fieldbus adapter module.
15 = LonWorks
37 = DeviceNet
502 = Modbus TCP
2222 Ethernet/IP
5102 FBA PAR 2 1 0 - 65535 0 Fieldbus specific - consult FBA
... ... User’s Manual.
5126 FBA PAR 26
5127 REFRESH 1 0 = DONE 0 Validates any changed adapter
1 = REFRESH module configuration
parameters. After refreshing,
value reverts automatically to
DONE.
5128 FBA PAR 28 1 0 - 0xFFFF 0 Parameter table version
5129 FBA PAR 29 1 0 - 0xFFFF 0 Bypass type code
5130 FBA PAR 30 1 0 - 0xFFFF 0 Mapping file version
5131 FBA PAR 31 1 0-6 0 Fieldbus adapter status
5132 FBA PAR 32 1 0 - 0xFFFF 0 Module common software
version
5133 FBA PAR 33 0 - 0xFFFF 0 Module application software
version

Group 52: FBA Data In

Group 52: FBA Data In
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
5201 DATA IN 1 1 0 = Not In Use 0 Specifies information to be
... ... 1 = Control Word (ABBDP) read from the drive (into
2 = Ref 1 (ABBDP) the network). Only for
5210 DATA IN 10
3 = Ref 2 (ABBDP) modules that support the
4 = Status Word (ABBDP) cyclic low scanner function
5 = Actual Value 1 (ABBDP) (such as FMBT-12).
6 = Actual Value 2 (ABBDP) For specifying values 1-6,
0101h -063FFh = Drive select ABB drive’s profile
parameters information, like status
8101h - E3FFh = Bypass word or actual values.
parameters + 8000h To specify drive
parameters, use the format
ggh.pph where ggh is the
parameter group in
hexadecimal and pph is
the parameter in
hexadecimal.
For instance, drive
parameter 30.14 is
encoded as 1E0Eh.
Bypass parameter is
specified as 8000h +
ggh.pph. For instance,
bypass parameter 0114 is
encoded as 810Eh.

Parameters
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 71

Group 53: FBA Data Out

Group 53: FBA Data Out
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
5301 DATA OUT 1 1 0 = Not In Use — Specifies information to be
... ... 1 = Control Word (ABBDP) written to the drive (out of
5310 DATA OUT10 2 = Ref 1 (ABBDP) the network). Only for
3 = Ref 2 (ABBDP) modules that support the
4 = Status Word (ABBDP) cyclic low scanner function
5 = Actual Value 1 (ABBDP) (such as FMBT-12).
6 = Actual Value 2 (ABBDP) For specifying values 1-6,
0101h -063FFh = Drive select ABB drive’s profile
parameters information, like control
8101h - E3FFh = Bypass word of reference.
parameters + 8000h To specify drive
parameters, use the format
ggh.pph where ggh is the
parameter group in
hexadecimal and pph is the
parameter in hexadecimal.
For instance, drive
parameter 30.14 is
encoded as 1E0Eh.
Bypass parameter is
specified as 8000h +
ggh.pph. For instance,
bypass parameter 0114 is
encoded as 810Eh.

Group 58: Drive EFB

The drive's Group 58 must be replicated on bypass, since the EFB link on the drive
is reserved for internal communication with the bypass. All Group 58 functionality
associated with selection by 98.02 is hosted on the bypass controller for drive.
Group 58 parameters on the bypass are a subset of the Group 58 parameters on the
drive.

Group 58: Drive EFB

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
5802 DV PROT ID hex 0x0000 - 0xFFFF 0x0000 Protocol ID and revision:
Format:
XXYY where XX = protocolID and
YY = program revision
5803 DV MAC ID 1 0 - 65535 256 Default value is protocol-
dependent: Modbus and N2 is 1,
BACnet is 128. Drive station ID
(NODE ADDRESS)
Refer to Communication setup –
EFB on page 79 for more
information.
5804 BAUD RATE 0.1 kbit/s 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 9.6 Default value is protocol-
38.4, 57.6, 76.8 dependent: Modbus and N2 is
9.6, BACnet is 38.4. Defines the
communication speed of the
RS485 link in kbits per second
(kb/s).
Refer to Communication setup –
EFB on page 79 for more
information.
5805 EFB PARITY 1 0=8 NONE 1, 0 Defines the data length, parity and
1=8 NONE 2, stop bits to be used with the
2=8 EVEN 1, RS485 link communication.
3=8 ODD 1 Default value is protocol-
dependent: Modbus is 1, N2 and
BACnet is 0. Refer to
Communication setup – EFB on
page 79 for more information.

Parameters
72 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Group 58: Drive EFB

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
5807 DV STATUS 1 0=IDLE, 0 Contains the status of the drive
1=EXECUT INIT, EFB protocol.
2=TIME OUT,
3=CONFIG ERR,
4=OFF-LINE,
5=ON-LINE,
6=RESET,
7=LISTEN ONLY
5808 DV OK MSG 1 0 - 65535 0 Contains a count of valid
messages received by the drive.
• During normal operation, this
counter is increasing
constantly.
5811 UART ERROR 1 0 - 65535 0 Contains a count of the messages
with a character error received by
the drive.
5812 DV CRC ERR 1 0 - 65535 0 Contains a count of the messages
with a CRC error received by the
drive.
5813 TOKEN CNT 1 0 - 65535 0 Contains a count of the number of
times the drive has received the
token.
5817 TX DELAY 1 0 - 65535 0 Defines the drive minimum
response delay in addition to any
fixed delay imposed by the
protocol.
5818 EFB CNTRL 1 0 - 0xFFFF 0 Displays the raw (unmodified)
control word sent by the Modbus
controller to the drive. This
parameter is read-only.
5819 EFB STAT 1 0 - 0xFFFF 0 Status word sent by the drive to
the Modbus controller. this
parameter is read-only.
5825 PROFILE 1 0=ABB DRV LIM, 0 Selects the communications
1=DCU PROFILE, profile used by the EFB protocol.
2=ABB DRV FULL
5840 DV OB ID L 1 0 - 65535 4303 BACnet Device object ID lower
word.
The Drive’s Device object ID must
be unique across all BACnet
devices in the building network.
Valid values are 0…4194303. The
Device Object ID is formed as a
combination of parameter 5840
and 5899. To set an ID from 1 to
65535 set this parameter = to the
desired ID and set 5899 = 0. To
set an ID greater than 65535, set
this parameter to the lower 4 digits
of the ID and set 5899 to the
remaining upper digits. For
example, to set the ID to 71234,
set the 5840 = 1234 and 5899 = 7.
The default values of 5840 = 0
and 5899 = 0 are handled
specially. This case uses
parameter 5803, the MAC ID as
the value for the device object ID.
5841 MAX MASTER 1 0 - 127 127 The Drive’s highest master
address for devices on the
BACnet MS/TP bus.
5842 MAX INF FR 1 0 - 10 1 The maximum number of
information frames the drive may
transmit before it must pass the
token.
5899 DV OB ID H 1 0 - 419 419 BACnet Device object ID upper
word. See parameter 58.40 for
description of how to use this
parameter.
58100 DB REV 1 0 - 65535 0 BACnet Database Revision

Parameters
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 73

Group 58: Drive EFB

Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
58105 DV IO 5 1 0 – FFFFh (values less 0 Defines the address in the drive
than 0101h are which the Modbus master
ignored) accesses when it reads from or
writes to register address 40005.
Drive parameter is specified as
ggh.pph. For instance, drive
parameter 30.14 is encoded as
1E0Eh.
58106 DV IO 6 1 0 – FFFFh (values less 0 Defines the address in the drive
than 0101h are which the Modbus master
ignored) accesses when it reads from or
writes to register address 40006.
Drive parameter is specified as
ggh.pph. For instance, drive
parameter 30.14 is encoded as
1E0Eh.
58107 DV IO 7 1 0 – FFFFh (values less 0 Defines the address in the drive
than 0101h are which the Modbus master
ignored) accesses when it reads from or
writes to register address 40007.
Drive parameter is specified as
ggh.pph. For instance, drive
parameter 30.14 is encoded as
1E0Eh.
58108 DV IO 8 1 0 – FFFFh (values less 0 Defines the address in the drive
than 0101h are which the Modbus master
ignored) accesses when it reads from or
writes to register address 40008.
Drive parameter is specified as
ggh.pph. For instance, drive
parameter 30.14 is encoded as
1E0Eh.
58109 DV IO 9 1 0 – FFFFh (values less 0 Defines the address in the drive
than 0101h are which the Modbus master
ignored) accesses when it reads from or
writes to register address 40009.
Drive parameter is specified as
ggh.pph. For instance, drive
parameter 30.14 is encoded as
1E0Eh.
58110 DV IO 10 1 0 – FFFFh (values less 0 Defines the address in the drive
than 0101h are which the Modbus master
ignored) accesses when it reads from or
writes to register address 40010.
Drive parameter is specified as
ggh.pph. For instance, drive
parameter 30.14 is encoded as
1E0Eh.
58111 DV IO 11 1 0 – FFFFh (values less 0 Defines the address in the drive
than 0101h are which the Modbus master
ignored) accesses when it reads from or
writes to register address 40011.
Drive parameter is specified as
ggh.pph. For instance, drive
parameter 30.14 is encoded as
1E0Eh.
58112 DV IO 12 1 0 – FFFFh (values less 0 Defines the address in the drive
than 0101h are which the Modbus master
ignored) accesses when it reads from or
writes to register address 40012.
Drive parameter is specified as
ggh.pph. For instance, drive
parameter 30.14 is encoded as
1E0Eh.

Parameters
74 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Group 98: Options

Group 98: Options
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
9802 COMM PROT 1 0=NOT SEL 0 This parameter sets the
1=STD MODBUS communication protocol that the
2=N2 package will communicate to the
4=EXT FBA building automation system.
5=BACNET

Group 99: Startup Data

Group 99: Startup Data
Code Name Resolution Range Default Description
9902 B.P. MACRO 1 1 = HVAC DEFAULT 1 Select bypass macro.
2 = DAMPER Predefined set of parameter
3 = RETROFIT values for certain application
4 = SMOKE CONTROL is loaded in use.

Parameters
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 75

Embedded fieldbus

Overview
The ABB E-Clipse bypass can be set up to accept control for the ACH580 drive and/
or the E-Clipse Bypass from an external system using standard communication
protocols. When using communication, the ABB E-Clipse bypass can:
• Receive system control information from the fieldbus,
• Receive drive only control information from the fieldbus, or
• Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available
control locations, such as digital or analog inputs, and the control panel.
Fieldbus Controller
Fieldbus

Other Devices

Connect using either:

• Standard embedded fieldbus (EFB) at
terminals X2:26…30
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) module
mounted in slot 2 (option Fxxx)

Two basic fieldbus communications configurations are available:

• Embedded fieldbus (EFB) – Using the EIA 485 interface at terminals X2:26…30
on the control board, a control system can communicate with the system using:
– Modbus® - RTU EIA 485
– Metasys® N2 EIA 485
– BACnet® MS/TP EIA 485
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) – See Fieldbus adapter on page 161.

NOTE: Throughout this manual, references to parameters pertain to parameters and

adjustments in the ABB E-Clipse Bypass.

Unless specifically called-out as drive parameters, all parameter adjustments are in

the ABB E-Clipse bypass.

In this document any references to “system” refers to ABB E-Clipse Bypass and
ACH580 drive.

Embedded fieldbus
76 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Control interface
In general, the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive
consists of:
Protocol Control Interface Reference for more information
Modbus • Output Words The content of these words is defined by profiles. For
– Control word details on the profiles used, see Modbus protocol
technical data – Drive only starting on page 138
– Reference1
– Reference2
• Input Words
– Status word
– Actual value 1
– Actual value 2
– Actual value 3
– Actual value 4
– Actual value 5
– Actual value 6
– Actual value 7
– Actual value 8
N2 • Binary output objects N2 protocol technical data – system on page 100 and
• Analog output objects Bypass overview on page 109
• Binary input objects
• Analog input objects
BACnet • Device management BACnet protocol technical data – system on page 114
• Binary output objects
• Analog output objects
• Binary input objects
• Analog input objects

Note: The words “output” and “input” are used as seen from the fieldbus controller
point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller
to the bypass.

Mechanical and electrical installation – Embedded Fieldbus (EFB)

Warning! Connections should be made only while the bypass is disconnected from
the power source.

Bypass terminals 26…30 are for EIA 485 communications.

• Use Belden 9842 or equivalent. Belden 9842 is a dual twisted, shielded pair cable
with a wave impedance of 120 Ω.
• Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the EIA 485 link. Use this pair to
connect all A (-) terminals together and all B (+) terminals together.
• Use both of the other wires in the other pair for the reference/common
(terminal 29).

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 77

• Do not directly ground the EIA 485 network at any point. Ground all devices on
the network using their corresponding earthing terminals.
• As always, the grounding wires should not form any closed loops, and all the
devices should be earthed to a common ground.
• Connect the EIA 485 link in a daisy-chained bus, without dropout lines.
• Do not connect the shield at the bypass. Tie the shields together at the bypass.
Only load the shield connection at the EIA 485 master.
• For configuration information see the following:
– Communication setup – EFB section.
– Activate drive control functions – EFB section.
– The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data.
– To reduce noise on the network, terminate the EIA 485 network using 120 Ω
resistors at both ends of the network. Use the DIP switch to connect or
disconnect the termination resistors. Refer to page 78 for the diagram and
table.

Embedded fieldbus
78 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Preferred wiring diagram

ABB E-CLIPSE BYPASS RS485:

Terminal Block: X2

SCR Screen

SCR Screen
A - Negative
B + Positive
Required Wiring:
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135
(Twisted Pair and Reference

AGND
ON ON with Isolated Devices)
See Note 5

ON
26 27 28 29 30

See Note 2: Shield

NOTES:
1. Use 3 Conductor Cable - 1 twisted triplet. Tie 3rd wire to AGND:
X2-29. See Note 3: Ground G R – +
2. Tie shield wires together at Drive - Do Not terminate at SCR.
3. Terminate shield ONLY at “Ground” terminal in the Building
See Note 4: Reference/Common
Automation Controller.
4. Terminate AGND wire at “Reference” terminal in the Building
Automation Controller.
5. The transceiver in the E-Clipse bypass is a 1/8th load device. Only
Building Automation
255 ACH550 drives with E-Clipse bypass may be connected to a Controller
given EIA-485 segment without repeaters. Network biasing is
required per ANSI / ASHRAE Standard 135.

Alternate wiring diagram

ABB E-CLIPSE BYPASS RS485:

Terminal Block: X2
SCR Screen

SCR Screen
A - Negative
B + Positive

AGND

ON ON ALTERNATE WIRING:
26 27 28 29 30 4 Conductor with Shield

NOTES:

1. Use 2 Conductor Cable - 2 twisted pair w/shield.

Tie 3rd & 4th wire (2nd pair) to AGND: X2-29. G R - +
2. Terminate shield at “Reference” terminal
in the Building Automation Controller!
See Note 2: Reference/Common

Building Automation
Controller

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 79

Communication setup – EFB

The addition of serial communications to the ABB E-Clipse bypass system is done
by bringing the network connection to the bypass and using the bypass software to
direct messages either to the drive or to the bypass control software. The user
makes no connection to the drive fieldbus terminals since this channel is reserved
for the bypass control interface to the drive.
For all EFB Protocols, the drive is viewed as one node and the bypass is viewed as
a separate node. This node and bypass, along with the physical and logical
connections for communications are illustrated in the following figure.

RBCU (E-Clipse Bypass Control Unit) Bypass

E-Clipse bypass
1625 = (0) Drive Only
Drive serial Internal
Drive interface communication MODBUS
ACH580 2)
Bypass parameter drive control enabled 1)
group 58 Interface Factory configured
Drive node ID Do not alter
Drive parameter
E-Clipse bypass
RS485

Fieldbus parameter1625 = (1) System

Interface Drive & Bypass serial
communication control
1) Parameter 1625 only activates serial communication
enabled 1)
control. Both the drive and bypass will be visible to the
Network Client serial communication link. For all configurations both the
Bypass interface bypass and drive node ID must be set to a unique value.
Bypass parameter
2) The ACH580 connected to the E-Clipse bypass has
group 50 been programmed at the factory. Unless specified, do
Drive node ID
not modify drive parameters. Use bypass parameters
group 58 for drive serial communication configuration.

Setup of the drive logical connection is done in parameter Group 58 on the bypass
keypad. This group contains, among other things, the Drive MAC ID and Device
Object Instance ID. Group 58 on the drive must not be modified from the settings
defined by drive parameter 95.21, HW options word2; bit 5, Bypass present.
Selection of the EFB protocol is done in bypass parameter 9802. Setup of the
bypass logical connection is done in parameter Group 50 on the bypass keypad.
The user can use bypass parameter 1625, COMM CTRL to determine if control
signals (start and enables) go to the drive or to the system. Parameter 1625 = 0
(DRIVE ONLY) is intended for legacy applications where the network was only able
to control the drive. Parameter 1625 = 1 (SYSTEM) provides new functionality where
control signals control both the drive and bypass depending on the drive/bypass
mode selected on the bypass keypad. In both cases, non-control related points are
visible on the bypass. Parameter 1625 should be left as DRIVE ONLY when the
Building Automation System is only monitoring, and not controlling, the drive
package over communications.

Embedded fieldbus
80 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

E-Clipse ACH580

1625 = System Mode

Bypass Drive

(Group 50) (Group 58)

Control: Control:
- Start / Stop - Reverse
- Run Permissive - Ext 1 / Ext2
- Start Interlock 1…4 - Reference 1
- Reference 2
Status:
- Ready Status:
- Enabled - Actual Values
- Started
- Running

Refer to the figure for the System mode diagram.

Fieldbus communication selection

To activate the fieldbus communication, set parameter 9802 COMM PROT =
• 1 (STD MODBUS).
• 2 (N2)
• 4 (EXT FBA) - See Fieldbus adapter on page 161
• 5 (BACNET)

Note: In System mode, the Building Automation System writes to either the bypass
or the drive, through two logical nodes. A common physical port supports both
nodes. Group 58 is used to configure (i.e., baud rate) and diagnose the common
physical port. Group 58 is also used to configure (i.e., MAC ID and Device Object
Instance ID) and diagnose the drive logical node. Group 50 is used to configure
(i.e., MAC ID and Device Object Instance ID) and diagnose the bypass logical node.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 81

Serial communication configuration – Drive

Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that
define the communication process. These parameters and descriptions are defined
below. In particular, note that the station ID may require adjustment.

Bypass EFB Protocol Reference

Description
Parameter Modbus N2 BACnet
1625 COMM CONTROL 1625 = 0 (Drive Only) for control signals (Start/Stop
and enables) to go to drive only.
1625 = 1 (System) for control signals to go to the
system (drive or bypass, depending on keypad mode
selection)
5802 DV PROT ID Do not edit. Any non-zero value entered for
Contains the identification and parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL, sets this
program revision of the parameter automatically. The format is: XXYY, where
protocol. xx = protocol ID, and YY = program revision.

5803 DV MAC ID Set each bypass on the Sets MS/TP MAC ID. A
Defines the drives node network with a unique temporary value of 0
address of the EIA 485 link. value for this parameter. places the protocol
Default: 1 channel in reset.
Note: For a new Default: 128
address to take affect,
the system power must
be cycled OR 5302
must first be set to 0
before selecting a new
address. Leaving 5302
= 0 places the EIA 485
channel in reset,
disabling
communication.
5804 EFB BAUD RATE Default: 9.6 kbits/s Default: 38.4 kbits/s
Defines the communication Do not edit for N2
speed of the EIA 485 link in
kbits per second (kbits/s).
1.2 kbits/s
2.4 kbits/s
4.8 kbits/s
9.6 kbits/s
19.2 kbits/s
38.4 kbits/s
57.6 kbits/s
76.8 kbits/s

Embedded fieldbus
82 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Bypass EFB Protocol Reference

Description
Parameter Modbus N2 BACnet
5805 EFB PARITY Default: 1 Default: 0
Defines the data length, parity
and stop bits to be used with
the EIA 485 link
communication.
• The same settings must be
used in all on-line stations.
0=8 NONE 1 – 8 data bits,
No parity, one stop bit.
1=8 NONE 2 – 8 data bits,
No parity, two stop bits.
2=8 EVEN 1 – 8 data bits,
Even parity, one stop bit.
3=8 ODD 1 – 8 data bits,
Odd parity, one stop bit.
5825 PROFILE Default: 0 Default: 0
Selects the communication
profile used by the EFB
protocol.
0 = ABB DRV LIM – Operation
of Control/Status Words
conform to limited ABB
Drives Profile, as used in
ACH550/580.
1 = DCU PROFILE – Operation
of Control/Status Words
conform to 32-bit DCU
Profile.
2 = ABB DRV FULL –
Operation of Control/Status
Words conform to ABB
Bypass Profile, as used in
ACH550.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 83

Bypass EFB Protocol Reference

Description
Parameter Modbus N2 BACnet
5840 DV OB ID L Resolution: 1
BACnet Device object ID lower Range: 0-65535
word. Default: 0
The Drive’s Device object ID
must be unique across all
BACnet devices in the building
network. Valid values are
0…4194302. The Device
Object ID is formed as a
combination of parameter 5840
and 5899. To set an ID from 1
to 65535 set this parameter =
to the desired ID and set 5899
= 0. To set an ID greater than
65535, set this parameter to
the lower 4 digits of the ID and
set 58.99 to the remaining
upper digits. For example, to
set the ID to 71234, set the
5840 = 1234 and 5899 = 7. The
default values of 5840 = 0 and
5899 = 0 are handled specially.
This case uses parameter N/A N/A
5803, the MAC ID as the value
for the device object ID.
5841 MAX MASTER Resolution: 1
The Drive’s highest master Range: 0-127
address for devices on the Default: 127
BACnet MS/TP bus.
5842 MAX INF FR Resolution: 1
The maximum number of Range: 0-10
information frames the drive Default: 1
may transmit before it must
pass the token.
5899 DV OB ID H Resolution: 1
BACnet Device object ID upper Range: 0-419
word. See parameter 5840 for Default: 0
description of how to use this
parameter.
58100 DB REV Resolution: 1
BACnet Database Revision Range: 0-65535
Default: 0

Note: After any changes to the communication settings, the communication channel
must be reset by either cycling the system power, or by clearing (set to 0 and enter)
and then restoring the station ID (5803) to desired station ID.

Embedded fieldbus
84 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Serial communication configuration – Bypass

Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that
define the communication process. These parameters and descriptions are defined
below. In particular, note that the station ID may require adjustment.

Bypass EFB Protocol Reference

Description
Parameter Modbus N2 BACnet
1625 COMM CONTROL 1625 = 0 (Drive Only) for control signals (Start/Stop
and enables) to go to drive only.
1625 = 1 (System) for control signals to go to the
system (drive or bypass, depending on keypad
mode selection)
5003 BP STATION ID Set each bypass on the Sets MS/TP MAC ID. A
Defines the drives node address network with a unique temporary value of 0
of the EIA 485 link. value for this places the protocol
parameter. channel in reset.
When this protocol is Default: 256
selected, the default
value for this parameter
is: 256
Note: For a new
address to take affect,
the system power must
be cycled OR 5003
must first be set to 0
before selecting a new
address. Leaving 5003
= 0 places the EIA 485
channel in reset,
disabling
communication.
The default value fro
Modbus and N2 is 1.
5040 BY OB ID L N/A N/A Resolution: 1
BACnet Device object ID lower Range: 0-65535
word. Default: 0
The Drive’s Device object ID
must be unique across all
BACnet devices in the building
network. Valid values are
0…4194303. The Device Object
ID is formed as a combination of
parameter 50.40 and 50.99. To
set an ID from 1 to 65535 set
this parameter = to the desired
ID and set 58.99 = 0. To set an
ID greater than 65535, set this
parameter to the lower 4 digits of
the ID and set 58.99 to the
remaining upper digits. For
example, to set the ID to 71234,
set the 5040 = 1234 and 5099 =
7. The default values of 5840 = 0
and 5899 = 0 are handled
specially. This case uses
parameter 5003, the MAC ID as
the value for the device
object ID.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 85

Bypass EFB Protocol Reference

Description
Parameter Modbus N2 BACnet
5099 BY OB ID H N/A N/A Resolution: 1
BACnet Device object ID upper Range: 0-419
word. See parameter 5040 for Default: 0
description of how to use this
parameter.

Note: After any changes to the communication settings, the communication channel
must be reset by either cycling the system power, or by clearing (set to 0 and enter)
and then restoring the station ID (5002) to desired station ID.

Activate drive control functions – EFB

Controlling the drive

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
• Tell the drive (via the bypass) to accept fieldbus control of the function.
• Define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control.
• Define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. For the protocol-specific details, see the specific protocol
technical data section in this manual.

Start/stop control (Drive only)

Using the fieldbus for start/stop control of the drive only requires:
• Bypass parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
• Control commands must be addressed to the Drive node with parameter 1625 set
to 0 (DRIVE ONLY). For SYSTEM control refer to Start/stop control (System) on
page 91.
Protocol Reference
Bypass Modbus1 N2
Value Description
Parameter BACnet
DCU
ABB DRV
PROFILE
1601 START/ 2 (COMM) Start/Stop by 40001 bits 40031 bits BO1 BV10
STOP fieldbus with Ext1 0…3 (see 0, 1 (see
or Ext2 selected. page 150) page 151)
1625 COMM 0 (DRIVE Enable drive only N/A
CTRL ONLY) control.
1) For Modbus, the protocol reference can depend on the profile used, hence two columns in
these tables. One column refers to the ABB Drives profile, selected when parameter 5825 = 0
(ABB DRV LIM) or 5825 = 2 (ABB DRV FULL). The other column refers to the DCU profile
selected when parameter 5825 = 1 (DCU PROFILE). See ABB control profiles technical data –
Drive section on page 146.

Embedded fieldbus
86 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Input reference select

Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires:
• Drive parameter values set with the drive keypad as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Scalar Control Vector Control
Value
(Group 28) (Group 22)
Ext1/Ext2 Select 19.11 32, EFB MCW bit 11
Ref1 28.11 22.11
Ext1 Flexibility to write to 3.09
Ref2 28.12 22.12
(EFBRef1) or 3.10
Ref1 28.15 22.15 (EFBRef2)
Ext2
Ref2 28.16 22.16

EFB Ref1/Ref2
Modbus
Drive Parameter N2 BACnet
ABB DRV DCU Profile
40001 40031
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 Selection BO5 BV13
bit11 bit5
3.09 EFB Ref1 40002 AO1 AV16
3.10 EFB Ref2 40003 AO2 AV17

Reference
As described earlier in Control interface, the REFERENCE word is a speed or
frequency reference.

Reference scaling
Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the following, as appropriate:
• Modbus Register 40002 in the Modbus protocol technical data – Drive only
section.
• N2 analog output objects – Drive in the N2 protocol technical data – system
section.
• The slope of points 60 and 61 in the BACnet protocol technical data – system
section.
The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives Profile (EFB)
Reference
Reference Range Scalar Remarks
Type
Frequency -20000 = -(par 46.02) Final reference limited
-32767… +20000 = (par 46.02) by 30.13/30.14
REF1
+32767 Speed -20000 = -(par 46.01) Final reference limited
+20000 = (par 46.01) by 30.11/30.12
Frequency -20000 = -(par 46.02) Final reference limited
-32767… +20000 = (par 46.02) by 30.13/30.14
REF2
+32767 Speed -20000 = -(par 46.01) Final reference limited
+20000 = (par 46.01) by 30.11/30.12

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 87

Drive relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Modbus
Drive Parameter Value Setting
DCU N2 BACnet
ABB DRV
PROFILE
10.24 RO1 RELAY 62, RO/DIO Relay Output 1 controlled 402659 bit 0 or 00033 BO7 BO0
Source OUTPUT 1 control word by fieldbus.
10.27 RELAY 62, RO/DIO Relay Output 2 controlled 402659 bit 1 or 00034 BO8 BO1
OUTPUT 2 control word by fieldbus.
10.30 RELAY 62, RO/DIO Relay Output 3 controlled 402659 bit 2 or 00035 BO9 BO2
OUTPUT 3 control word by fieldbus.
15.071) RELAY 62, RO/DIO Relay Output 4 controlled 402659 bit 3 or 00036 BO10 BO3
OUTPUT 4 control word by fieldbus.
15.101) RELAY 62, RO/DIO Relay Output 5 controlled 402659 bit 4 or 00037 BO11 BO4
OUTPUT 5 control word by fieldbus.
15.231 DIGITAL 62, RO/DIO Digital Output 1 controlled 402659 bit 8 or 00038 BO12 BO5
DO1 Source OUTPUT 1 control word by fieldbus.
1) More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.

For example: To control relays 1 and 2 using serial communication:

Set parameters 10.24 RO1 Source = 62, RO/DIO control word.
Then, for example using N2:
• To turn Relay 1 On: Force object BO7 to On.
• To turn Relay 2 On: Force object BO8 to On.
• To turn both Relay 1 and 2 On: Force objects BO7 and BO8 On.

Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.

Protocol Reference
Modbus
Drive Parameter Value Setting
DCU N2 BACnet
ABB DRV
PROFILE
10.21 RO Status RO 1-3 STATUS Relay 1…3 status. N/A 402581 or 00033...35 BI4…BI6 BI0…BI2
15.04 RO/DO RO 4-5 STATUS Relay 4…6 status. N/A 403844 or 00036...37 BI7…BI8 BI3…BI4
Status DOI STATUS N/A 403844 or 00038 BI9 BI5

Analog output control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Embedded fieldbus
88 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Protocol Reference
Modbus
Drive Parameter Value Setting
ABB DCU N2 BACnet
DRV PROFILE
13.12 AO1 Source 37, AO1 Data Storage Analog Output 1 – – –
controlled by writing to
13.91 AO1 Data Storage – parameter 13.91. 403419 AO14 AO0

13.22 AO2 Content Sel 38, AO2 Data Storage Analog Output 2 – – –
controlled by writing to
13.92 AO2 Data Storage – parameter 13.92. 403420 AO15 AO1

PID control setpoint source

Using the fieldbus for the PID control setpoint requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied setpoint value in the appropriate location. (As defined
in Analog output control)
Drive Parameter Value Description Protocol Reference
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 24 (Setpoint data Communication channel setpoint –
source storage) source
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 3 (AI1 scaled) Optional analog input value. Needed if –
source combining communication reference
with analog input value
40.18 Set 1 setpoint 0 (In1) Setpoint is 40.92 value itself/+AI1/*AI1 –
function 1 (In1+In2)
3 (In1*In2)
NOTE: For 41.16 – 41.18, PID set 2 can be used. Setpoint data storage still uses 40.92, even when PID set 2 is used.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 89

Feedback from the drive – EFB

Pre-defined feedback
Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see input word/point/object
listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 100.
Protocol Reference
Drive Parameter
Modbus N2 BACnet
01.01 Motor Speed Used 400257 AI3 AV0
01.06 Output Frequency 400262 AI1 AV1
01.07 Motor Current 400263 AI4 AV4
01.10 Motor Torque 400266 AI5 AV5
01.14 Output Power 400270 AI6 AV6
01.11 DC Voltage 400267 AI11 AV2
01.13 Output Voltage 400269 AI12 AV3
01.57 Inverter KWH Counter (resettable) 400313 AI8 AV8
10.02 DI Delayed Status 402562 BI12 BI6
10.21 RO Status 402581 BI4, BI5, BI6 BI0
58.19 EFB Status Word – bit 0 (STOP) 414867 bit 0 BI1 BV0
58.19 EFB Status Word – bit 2 (REV) 414867 bit 2 BI2 BV1

Note: With Modbus, any parameter can be accessed using the format: 4 followed by
the parameter number. Example: 400000 + (group #) * 256 + parameter#

Embedded fieldbus
90 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Mailbox read/write
The ACH580 provides a “Mailbox” function to access parameters that have not been
pre-defined by the protocol. Using mailbox, any drive parameter can be identified
and read. Mailbox can also be used to adjust parameter settings by writing a value to
any parameter identified. The following table describes the use of this function.
Protocol Reference
Name Description
Modbus1) N2 BACnet
Mailbox Enter the number of the drive group and
Parameter parameter number using the format:
(group #) * 256 + parameter #.
AO19 AV25
Example: drive parameter 28.01 is entered as
(28 * 256) + 1 = 7169
Mailbox Data Contains the parameter value after a read, or Does not AO20 AV26
enter the desired parameter value for a write. apply.
Mailbox Read A binary value triggers a read – the value of
the “Mailbox Parameter” appears in “Mailbox BO19 BV15
data”.
Mailbox Write A binary value triggers a write – the drive
value for the “Mailbox Parameter” changes to BO20 BV16
the value in “Mailbox data”.
1) Modbus provides direct access to all parameters using the format: 400000 + (group #) * 256
+ parameter #.

Example: drive parameter 28.01 is mapped as 40000 + 28 * 256 + 1 = 407169.

Actual value scaling

When using Modbus, the scaling of actual values is set by the parameter resolution.
(Refer to the Parameter list and descriptions section in the ACH580 HVAC control
program firmware manual (3AXD50000027537) for parameter resolutions.) For
example:
Feedback Integer Scaling (Feedback Integer) / (Scaling) = Scaled Value
100 (example: 12.11 AI1 actual 1000 = 1 unit 100 / 1000 = 0.1 mA
feedback)
10 10 = 1% 10 / 10 = 1%

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 91

Activate bypass control functions – EFB

Controlling the bypass

Fieldbus control of various bypass functions requires configuration to:
• Tell the system to accept fieldbus control of the function.
• Define as a fieldbus input, any bypass data required for control.
• Define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive/bypass.
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function.

Start/stop control (System)

Using the fieldbus for start/stop control of the system requires:
• Bypass parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
• Control commands must be addressed to the Bypass node with parameter 1625
set to 1 (SYSTEM). For DRIVE ONLY control refer to Start/stop control (Drive
only) on page 85.
Protocol Reference
Bypass Parameter Value Description
Modbus N2 BACnet
1601 START/ 2 (COMM) Start/Stop by 400001 bit 0 BO1 BV10
STOP fieldbus with Ext1 or
Ext2 selected.
1625 COMM CTRL 1 (SYSTEM) Enable system N/A
control.

Embedded fieldbus
92 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Miscellaneous system control

Note: Control of system commands is dependent upon the setting of bypass

parameter 1625.

Using the fieldbus miscellaneous system control requires:

• Bypass parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Bypass Parameter Value Setting Modbus N2 BACnet
1602 RUN 2 (COMM) Run permissive by 400001 bit 2 BO2 BV12
PERMISSIVE (Not fieldbus.
Recommended)
1603 START 2 (COMM) Source for Start 400001 bit 4 BO10 BV15
INTERLOCK 1 (Not Interlock 1 is the
Recommended) fieldbus
Command word.
1604 START 2 (COMM) Source for Start 400001 bit 5 BO11 BV16
INTERLOCK 2 (Not Interlock 2 is the
Recommended) fieldbus
Command word.
1605 START 2 (COMM) 400001 bit 6 BO12 BV17
INTERLOCK 3 (Not
Recommended)
1606 START 2 (COMM) 400001 bit 7 BO13 BV18
INTERLOCK 4 (Not
Recommended)
1607 RESET SRC 2 (COMM) Fault reset by 400001 bit 1 BO3 BV14
fieldbus
1625 COMM CTRL 1 (SYSTEM) Enable System N/A
Control.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 93

Bypass relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• Bypass parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Modbus
Bypass
Value Setting
Parameter 1625 = N2 BACnet
1625 =
“DRIVE
“SYSTEM”1
ONLY”2
1401 RELAY 16 Relay Output 1 400263 bit 0 433031 bit 0 BO5 BO0
OUTPUT 1 (Comm controlled by fieldbus.
Ctrl)
1404 RELAY 16 Relay Output 2 400263 bit 1 433031 bit 1 BO6 BO1
OUTPUT 2 (Comm controlled by fieldbus.
Ctrl)
1407 RELAY 16 Relay Output 3 400263 bit 2 433031 bit 2 BO7 BO2
OUTPUT 3 (Comm controlled by fieldbus.
Ctrl)
1410 RELAY 16 Relay Output 4 400263 bit 3 433031 bit 3 BO8 BO3
OUTPUT 4 (Comm controlled by fieldbus.
Ctrl)
1413 RELAY 16 Relay Output 5 400263 bit 4 433031 bit 4 BO9 BO4
OUTPUT 5 (Comm controlled by fieldbus.
Ctrl)
1) Written via Bypass node.
2) Written via Drive node.

For example: To control relays 1 and 2 using serial communication:

From the bypass keypad, set parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 and 1402 RELAY
OUTPUT 2 = 16 (COMM CTRL).

Then, for example using N2:

• To turn Relay 1 On: Force object BO5 to On.
• To turn Relay 2 On: Force object BO6 to On.
• To turn both Relay 1 and 2 On: Force objects BO5 and BO6 On.

Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuraton as defined below

.
Bypass Parameter Value N2 BACnet
0104 RO Status RO 1-5 STATUS Relay 1…5 status. B10…B14 B10…B14

Embedded fieldbus
94 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Communications fault
When using fieldbus control, specify the bypass’ action if external serial
communication is lost.
Bypass Parameter Value Setting
3004 COMM LOSS 0 (Not Sel) Set for appropriate drive/bypass response. NOTE:
1 (Fault) If the system is in bypass mode when
communication is lost, choices 2 and 3 will cause
2 (Const Sp7) the bypass contactor to remain in its present state.
3 (Last Speed)
3005 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss.

Feedback from the ABB E-Clipse Bypass – EFB

Pre-defined feedback
Inputs to the controller (bypass outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by
the protocol. This feedback does not require bypass configuration. The following
table lists a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see input word/point/
object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol.
Protocol Reference
Bypass Parameter
Modbus N2 BACnet
0101 MOTOR CURR 400257 AI1 AV0

Note: As noted above, Modbus provides direct access to all parameters using the
format: 400000 + (group #) * 256 + parameter #.

Example: drive parameter 28.01 is mapped as 40000 + 28 * 256 + 1 = 407169.

Type Name Description N2 BACnet

DI System Ready System is ready to accept start command (either BI1 BV7
mode).
DI System Enabled System is enabled to start motor (either mode). BI2 BV9
DI System Started System start interlocks are made and start BI3 BV1
command has been received (either mode).
Motor runs if run permissive is active.
DI System Running Motor is running (either mode). BI4 BV0
DI Fieldbus Local System is under fieldbus local control (either BI5 N/A
mode).
DI Bypass Fault Bypass is faulted. BI6 BV2
DI Bypass Warning Bypass is alarming. BI7 BV5
DI Comm Control System is configured for control in the comm BI8 N/A
channel
DI Override Override status BI9 BV13
DI DI1 Status Bypass digital input 1 status BI10 BI5

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 95

Type Name Description N2 BACnet

DI DI2 Status Bypass digital input 2 status BI11 BI6
DI DI3 Status Bypass digital input 3 status BI12 BI7
DI DI4 Status Bypass digital input 4 status BI13 BI8
DI DI5 Status Bypass digital input 5 status BI14 BI9
DI DI6 Status Bypass digital input 6 status BI15 BI10
DI RO1 Status Bypass relay output 1 status BI16 BI0
DI RO2 Status Bypass relay output 2 status BI17 BI1
DI RO3 Status Bypass relay output 3 status BI18 BI2
DI RO4 Status Bypass relay output 4 status BI19 BI3
DI RO5 Status Bypass relay output 5 status BI20 BI4
DI Bypass Select 1=Bypass mode, 0=Drive mode BI21 BV4
DI System Underload Reports system underload status (either mode) BI22 BV8
DI System Fault Reports system fault status (either mode) BI23 BV3
DI Bypass Run Reports motor running status in bypass mode BI24 BV6

Diagnostics – EFB

Fault queue for drive diagnostics (read via Drive node)

For general ACH580 diagnostics information, see the Diagnostics section on
page 185. For specific ACH580 fault codes, refer to the ACH580 Hardware Manual
(3AXD50000044839).
Type Name Description Modbus N2 BACnet
AI Last Fault Reports last drive fault 401025 AI17 AV18
AI Previous Fault Reports fault previous to last 401026 AI18 AV19
AI Oldest Fault Reports third-oldest fault 401027 AI19 AV20

Fault queue for bypass diagnostics (read via Bypass node)

For general E-Clipse Bypass diagnostics information, see Diagnostics section on
page 185. For specific E-Clipse bypass fault codes, see Fault listing on page 186.
Type Name Description Modbus N2 BACnet
AI Last Fault Reports last drive fault 401025 AI2 AV3
AI Warning Word 1 Reports warning word 1 400776 AI3 AV4
AI Warning Word 2 Reports warning word 2 400777 AI4 AV5

Embedded fieldbus
96 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Serial communication diagnostics

Network problems can be caused by multiple sources. Some of these sources are:
• Loose connections
• Incorrect wiring (including swapped wires)
• Bad grounding
• Duplicate station numbers
• Incorrect setup of bypass or other devices on the network
The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 58
EFB Protocol parameters 5808…5819. The Parameters section on page 59
describes these parameters in detail. Group 58 applies to the drive external
communications. Group 50 applies to the bypass external communications.

Diagnostic situations
The sub-sections below describe various diagnostic situations – the problem
symptoms and corrective actions.
Normal operation
During normal network operation, 5808…5819 bypass parameter values act as
follows at each bypass:
• 5808 DV OK MESSAGES advances (advances for each application message
properly received and addressed to this drive).
• 5812 DV CRC ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when an invalid
message CRC is received).
• 5811 UART ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when character format
errors are detected, such as parity or framing errors).
• 5819 DV status value varies depending on network traffic.
• BACnet protocol: 5813 TOKEN CNT (MS/TP token counter) advances for each
token passed to this drive. (Does not apply for other protocols.)
Loss of communication
The action taken by the ABB E-Clipse Bypass, if communication is lost, is configured
in Communications fault. The parameters are 3004 COMM LOSS and 3005 COMM
TIME. The Parameters section describes these parameters in detail.
No master station on line
If no master station is on line: Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors (5812
EFB CRC ERRORS and 5811 EFB UART ERRORS) increase on any of the
stations.
To correct:
• Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the
network.
• Verify that the cable is connected, and is not cut or short circuited.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 97

Duplicate stations
If two or more stations have duplicate numbers:
• Two or more drives cannot be addressed.
• Every time there is a read or write to one particular station, the value for 5812
EFB CRC ERRORS or 5811 EFB UART ERRORS advances.
To correct: Check all station numbers and edit conflicting values.
Swapped wires
If the communication wires are swapped (terminal A on one drive is connected to
terminal B on another):
• The value of 5808 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance.
• The values of 5812 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5811 EFB UART ERRORS are
advancing.
To correct: Check that the EIA-485 lines are not swapped.
Fault 3028 – EXT COMM LOSS
If the bypass’ control panel shows fault code 3028 “EXT COMM LOSS”, check for
either of the following:
• The master system is down. To correct, resolve problem with master system.
• The communication connection is bad. To correct, check communication
connection at the bypass.
• The time-out selection for the bypass is too short for the given installation. The
master is not polling the bypass within the specified time-out delay. To correct,
increase the time set by parameter 3005 COMM TIME.

Embedded fieldbus
98 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting table below should be followed in order from top to bottom by
parameter number. Begin the troubleshooting process by displaying the first
parameter in the table (58.11) and determining if the display on the panel exhibits the
symptom. If it does, review the possible cause(s) and take the necessary corrective
action(s). Once the symptom for this parameter is eliminated, continue to the next
parameter and repeat the process until you have reached the end.
The parameters in the list refer to Drive EFB 58xx and E-Clipse Bypass EFB 58xx.
The factory default setting for E-Clipse Bypass EFB parameter 5003 prevents the
network from seeing the E-Clipse Bypass. Change this setting ONLY if the bypass
will be seen as a node on the network. Troubleshoot the E-Clipse Bypass EFB
(50xx) portion ONLY if the bypass will be seen as a node on the network.
Display on
Parameter
Panel Possible Cause Corrective Action
Number
(Symptom)
5811 Rapidly 1. Duplicate 1. Ensure Drive EFB parameters 5803 [also
UART Increasing Addresses 5840 and 5899 when using BACnet] and
ERRORS Numeric Bypass EFB parameters 5003 [also 5040
Value 1 and 5099 when using BACnet] are
unique. 5803 and 5003 must be unique
addresses on the segment. [5840, 5899
and 5040, 5099 must be unique
addresses on the network when using
2. Swapped Wires BACnet].
3. Incorrect Baud Rate 2. Swap wires B(+) and A(-).
4. Incorrect Parity 3. Adjust parameter 5804 and Cycle power.
4. Change parity using parameter 5805 and
5. Too many devices cycle power.
on wire 5. Limit to 31 unit loads on 1 segment.
6. Noise on EIA-485
wire 6. Install EIA-485 (3 conductor shielded)
data grade cable communications wire.
7. Blown EIA-485 See drawings on page 78.
transceiver 7. Find and correct ground loop or high
voltage problems before replacing any
component assemblies.
Perform the following steps to determine if
the EIA-485 transceiver is damaged.
a. Power unit down.
b. Remove bus wires and re-tighten
connections.
c. Turn bus termination ON.
d. Measure impedance between B(+)
and A(-)
ACH580 121 ohms +/- 5%
E-Clipse 140 ohms +/- 5%
If measurements are not within the
specified range the EIA-485 transceiver is
bad, replace the assembly containing the
EIA-485 port.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 99

Display on
Parameter
Panel Possible Cause Corrective Action
Number
(Symptom)
5812 Rapidly 1. Duplicate 1. See Corrective Action 1. Parameter
DV CRC Increasing Addresses Number 5811
ERR Numeric 2. Too many devices 2. Limit to 31 unit loads on 1 segment
Value 1 on wire (Bypass = 1 unit load)
3. Noise on EIA-485 3. See Corrective Action 6. Parameter
wire Number 5811
5819 IDLE 1. No network 1. Land communication wires as shown in
DV STATUS connection drawings on page 78. Check Repeater (if
installed onsite)
2. Blown EIA-485 2. See Corrective Action 7. Parameter
transceiver Number 5811
3. Change application number in the
Siemens field panel.
5813 Not 1. Drive device 1. Change parameter 5803 to a unique value
5013 Increasing address parameter below 128.
Numeric 5803 is set to 128 or
TOKEN CNT Value greater.
(BACnet 2. E-Clipse Bypass 2. Change parameter 5003 to a unique value
Only) device address below 128.
parameter 5003 is Note: The default value for parameter
set to 128 or greater. 5003 is 256. This setting prevents the
network from seeing the bypass. Change
this setting ONLY if the bypass will be
seen as a node on the network.
3. Max Masters is set 3. Change Max Masters property at all
too low on all drives. devices on bus to 127.
5808 OK 1. Master/Client not 1. Add device and points to the building
DV OK MSG Message communicating with control system.
Counter not drive.
increasing 1 2. Failed router 2. Replace router.
1) Reset by pressing UP and DOWN arrows simultaneously in edit mode. Save change by pressing
ENTER.

Embedded fieldbus
100 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

N2 protocol technical data – system

System overview
The N2 Fieldbus connection to the system is based on an industry standard RS-485
physical interface. The N2 Fieldbus protocol is a master-slave type, serial
communication protocol, used by the Johnson Controls Metasys® system. In the
Metasys architecture the N2 Fieldbus connects object interfaces and remote
controllers to Network Control Units (NCUs).
The N2 Fieldbus can also be used to connect the system to the Metasys Companion
product line.
This section describes the use of the N2 Fieldbus with the E-Clipse Bypass
connection.
Supported features
In the N2 Fieldbus protocol the ACH580 and E-Clipse Bypass may appear as a
“virtual object”.
Metasys
Analog Inputs

Binary Inputs
ACH580
Virtual Object Analog Outputs

Binary Outputs

Internal values, Float, Integer, Byte

Metasys
Analog Inputs

Binary Inputs
E-Clipse Bypass
Virtual Object Analog Outputs

Binary Outputs

Note: Metasys inputs are drive outputs and

drive inputs are Metasys outputs
Internal values, Float, Integer, Byte

A virtual object is made up of:

• Analog Inputs
• Binary Inputs
• Analog Outputs
• Binary Outputs
• Internal values for Floating point, Integer, and Byte values.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 101

Metasys integration
The following diagram shows the drives’ integration to the Johnson Controls
Metasys system.
N1LAN

NCU
N2 Fieldbus

The following diagram shows the drives’ integration to the Johnson Controls
Metasys Companion system.
PC-Version
PC Version Panel
PanelVersion/LTD
Version/LTD

Converter Converter
RS232 -RS485

N2 Fieldbus

On the N2 Fieldbus each system can be accessed by the full complement of

Metasys FMS features, including Change-of-State (COS) monitoring, warning
notification, scheduling, trend, and totalization.
On one N2 Fieldbus segment there can be up to 32 nodes while integrating the
E-Clipse Bypass system with Johnson Controls Metasys. Each E-Clipse bypass may

Embedded fieldbus
102 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

consume two nodes on a N2 fieldbus segment, if both the drive and bypass objects
are being polled by the system.
Drive device type
For the Metasys and Metasys Companion products, the device type for the ACH580
drive is VND.
When bypass parameter 1625 COMM CTL= (0) DRIVE ONLY, drive’s N2 objects are
all supported using the drive’s device address. The bypass’s N2 objects related to
the control word are no longer valid. For further information on the functional
implications of the setting of parameter 1625, see Communication setup – EFB on
page 79.
Bypass N2 Objects Not Valid
Number Object Bypass Parmeter
BO1 SYSTEM START Command Word
BO2 SYSTEM DISABLE Command Word
BO3 SYSTEM RESET Command Word
BO4 OVERRIDE Command Word
B10 START INTERLOCK 1 Command Word
B11 START INTERLOCK 2 Command Word
B12 START INTERLOCK 3 Command Word
B13 START INTERLOCK 4 Command Word

When bypass parameter 1625 COMM CTL= (1) SYSTEM, drive’s N2 following
objects related to control are no longer available when using the drive’s device
address.
Drive N2 Objects Not Valid
Number Object Bypass Parameter
BO1 START/STOP Command Word
BO2 RUN PERMISSIVE Command Word
BO3 N2 LOCAL CTL Command Word

Drive Overview
The ACH580 drive does not support N2 Fieldbus communication “internal values”.
All of the Analog and Binary I/O objects are listed below.
Analog Input – The analog input objects support the following features:
• Analog Input actual value in engineering units
• Low Warning limit
• Low Warning limit
• High Warning limit
• High Warning limit
• Differential value for the hysteresis of the Alarms and Warnings

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 103

• Change of State (COS) enabled

• Warning Enabled
• Warning Enabled
• Override value is received, but there is no action taken.
Binary Input – The binary input objects support the following features:
• Binary Input actual value
• Normal / Warning state specification
• Warning Enabled
• Change of State (COS) enabled
• Override value is received, but there is no action taken.
Analog Output – The analog output objects support the following features:
• Analog Output value in engineering units
• Override value is used to change the Analog Output value. It is not possible to
return to the previous value by removing the override. The override feature is
used only to change the value.
Binary Output – The binary output objects support the following features:
• Binary Output value
• Override value is used to change the Binary Output value. It is not possible to
return to the previous value by removing the override. The override feature is
used only to change the value.

N2 analog input objects – Drive

The following table lists the N2 Analog Input objects defined for the ACH580 drive.
N2 Analog Inputs:
Drive
Number Object Resolution Units Range
Parameter
AI1 OUTPUT FREQUENCY 01.06 0.1 Hz 0…250
AI2 RATED SPEED 01.62 0.1 % 0…100
AI3 SPEED 01.01 1 rpm 0…9999
AI4 CURRENT 01.07 0.1 A 0…9999
AI5 TORQUE 01.10 0.1 % -200…200
AI6 POWER 01.17 0.1 kW 0…65535
AI7 DRIVE TEMPERATURE 05.11 0.1 % -40…160
AI8 KILOWATT HOURS 01.58 1 kWh 0…65535
AI9 MEGAWATT HOURS Derived value 1 MWh 0…65535
AI10 RUN TIME 05.03 1 H 0…65535
AI11 DC BUS VOLTAGE 01.11 1 V 0…999
AI12 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 01.13 1 V 0…999
AI13 PRC PID FEEDBACK 40.97 0.1 % 0…100

Embedded fieldbus
104 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

N2 Analog Inputs:
Drive
Number Object Resolution Units Range
Parameter
AI14 PRC PID DEVIATION 40.99 0.1 % 0…100
AI15 EXT PID FEEDBACK Derived value 0.1 % 0…100
AI16 EXT PID DEVIATION Derived value 0.1 % 0…100
AI17 LAST FAULT Derived value 1 fault code
AI18 PREV FAULT Derived value 1 fault code
AI19 OLDEST FAULT Derived value 1 fault code
AI20 AI 1 ACTUAL 12.101 0.1 % 0…100
AI21 AI 2 ACTUAL 12.102 0.1 % 0…100
AI22 AO 1 ACTUAL 13.11 0.1 mA 0…20
AI23 AO 2 ACTUAL 13.21 0.1 mA 0…20
AI24 MOTOR TEMP Derived value 1 °C 0…200
1) Rated Speed Is A Percent Of Maximum Frequency (Parameter 2008) If The Drive Is In Scalar
Mode, And Is A Percent Of Maximum Speed (Parameter 2002) In Speed Mode.

N2 binary input objects – Drive

The following table lists the N2 Binary Input objects defined for the ACH580 drive.
N2 Binary Inputs:
Number Object Drive Parameter Range
BI1 STOP/RUN Status Word, BIT2 0 = Stop, 1 = Drive Running
BI2 FORWARD/REVERSE Status Word, BIT11 0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse
BI3 FAULT STATUS Status Word, BIT15 0 = OK, 1 = Drive Fault
BI4 RELAY 1 STATUS 10.21, BIT0 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI5 RELAY 2 STATUS 10.21, BIT1 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI6 RELAY 3 STATUS 10.21, BIT2 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI7 RELAY 4 STATUS 15.04, BIT0 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI8 RELAY 5 STATUS 15.04, BIT1 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI9 DIGITAL OUT 1 STATUS 15.04, BIT5 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI10 INPUT 1 STATUS 10.02, BIT0 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI11 INPUT 2 STATUS 10.02, BIT1 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI12 INPUT 3 STATUS 10.02, BIT2 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI13 INPUT 4 STATUS 10.02, BIT3 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI14 INPUT 5 STATUS 0119 (bit mask 02) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI15 INPUT 6 STATUS 10.02, BIT5 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI16 EXTERNAL 2 SELECT DCU status word, BIT14 0 = EXT1 = EXT2
BI17 HAND/AUTO DCU status word, BIT12 0 = AUTO, 1 = HAND
BI18 WARNING DCU status word, BIT16 0 = OK, 1 = WARNING
BI20 DRIVE READY DCU status word, BIT0 0 = Not Ready, 1 = Ready
BI21 AT SETPOINT DCU status word, BIT7 0 = No, 1 = At Setpoint

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 105

N2 Binary Inputs:
Number Object Drive Parameter Range
BI22 RUN PERMISSIVES DCU status word, BIT1 0 = Not Enabled, 1 = Enabled
BI23 N2 LOCAL MODE DCU status word, BIT13 0 = Auto, 1 = N2 Local
BI24 N2 CONTROL SRC DCU status word, BIT26 0 = No, 1 = Yes
BI25 N2 REF1 SRC DCU status word, BIT27 0 = No, 1 = Yes
BI26 N2 REF2 SRC DCU status word, BIT28 0 = No, 1 = Yes

N2 analog output objects – Drive

The following table lists the N2 Analog Output objects defined for the ACH580 drive.
N2 Analog Outputs:
Drive
Number Object Resolution Units Range
Parameter
AO1 REFERENCE 1 Reference 1 0.1 % 0…100
AO2 REFERENCE 2 Reference 2 0.1 % 0…100
AO3 ACCEL TIME 1 Derived value 0.1 s 0.1…1800
AO4 DECEL TIME 1 Derived value 0.1 s 0.1…1800
AO5 CURRENT LIMIT 30.17 0.1 A 0…1.3•I2n
AO6 PID1-CONT GAIN 40.32 0.1 % 0.1…100
AO7 PID1-CONT I-TIME 40.33 0.1 s 0.1…600
AO8 PID1-CONT D-TIME 40.34 0.1 s 0…10
AO9 PID1-CONT D FILTER 40.35 0.1 s 0…10
AO10 PID2-CONT GAIN 41.32 0.1 % 0.1…100
AO11 PID2-CONT I-TIME 41.33 0.1 s 0.1…600
AO12 PID2-CONT D-TIME 41.34 0.1 s 0…10
AO13 PID2-CONT D FILTER 41.35 0.1 s 0…10
AO14 COMMAND AO 1 13.91 0.1 % 0…100
AO15 COMMAND AO 2 13.92 0.1 % 0…100
AO16 EXT PID SETPOINT 71.21 0.1 % 0…100
AO17 SPD OUT MIN Derived value 0.1 % 0…200
AO18 SPD OUT MAX Derived value 0.1 % 0…200
AO19 MB PARAM N/A 1 None 0…65535
AO20 MB DATA N/A 1 None 0…65535

Embedded fieldbus
106 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

N2 binary output objects – Drive

The following table lists the N2 Binary Output objects defined for the ACH580 drive.
N2 Binary Outputs:
Number Object Drive Parameter Range
BO1 STOP/START Command Word 0 = Stop, 1 = Start to Speed
BO2 FORWARD/REVERSE Command Word 0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse
BO3 PANEL LOCK Command Word 0 = Open, 1 = Locked
BO4 RUN PERMISSIVE Command Word 0 = Enable, 1 = Disable
BO5 REF1/REF2 SELECT Command Word 0 = Ref1, 1 = Ref2
BO6 FAULT RESET Command Word Change 0 -> 1 Resets
BO7 COMMAND RO 1 10.99, bit0 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO8 COMMAND RO 2 10.99, bit1 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO9 COMMAND RO 3 10.99, bit2 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO10 COMMAND RO 4 10.99, bit3 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO11 COMMAND RO 5 10.99, bit4 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO12 COMMAND RO 6 10.99, bit5 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO13 RESET RUN TIME Indirectly mapping 0 = N/A, 1 = On (Reset Run Time)
BO14 RESET KWH COUNT Indirectly mapping 0 = N/A, 1 = On (Reset kWh Count)
BO15 PRC PID SELECT 40.57 (indirectly) 0 = SET2, 1 = SET2
BO16 N2 LOCAL CTL (Note 1) DCU Control Word, 0 = Auto, 1 = N2
BIT16
BO17 N2 LOCAL REF (Note 1) DCU Control Word, 0 = Auto, 1 = N2
BIT17
BO18 SAVE PARAMETERS 96.07 (indirectly) 0 = N/A, 1 = On (Save Parameters)
BO19 READ MB N/A 0 = NO, 1 = READ
BO20 WRITE MB N/A 0 = NO, 1 = WRITE
1) N2 LOCAL CTL and N2 LOCAL REF have priority over drive input terminals. Use these binary
outputs for temporary N2 control of the drive when COMM is not the selected control source.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 107

DDL file for NCU – Drive

The listing below is the Data Definition Language (DDL) file for ACH580 drives used
with the Network Control Units.
This listing is useful when defining drive I/O objects to the Network Controller Units.
Below is the ACH580.DDL file listing.
*******************************************************************
* ABB Drives, ACH 580 Variable Frequency Drive
*******************************************************************
CSMODEL "ACH_580","VND"

AITITLE "Analog_Inputs"
BITITLE "Binary_Inputs"
AOTITLE "Analog_Outputs"
BOTITLE "Binary_Outputs"

CSAI "AI1",N,N,"FREQ_ACT","Hz"
CSAI "AI2",N,N,"PCT_ACT","%"
CSAI "AI3",N,N,"SPEED","RPM"
CSAI "AI4",N,N,"CURRENT","A"
CSAI "AI5",N,N,"TORQUE","%"
CSAI "AI6",N,N,"POWER","kW"
CSAI "AI7",N,N,"DRV_TEMP_PCT","%"
CSAI "AI8",N,N,"ENERGY_k","kWh"
CSAI "AI9",N,N,"ENERGY_M","MWh"
CSAI "AI10",N,N,"RUN_TIME","H"
CSAI "AI11",N,N,"DC_VOLT","V"
CSAI "AI12",N,N,"VOLT_ACT","V"
CSAI "AI13",N,N,"PID1_ACT","%"
CSAI "AI14",N,N,"PID2_DEV","%"
CSAI "AI15",N,N,"PID2_ACT","%"
CSAI "AI16",N,N,"PID2_DEV","%"
CSAI "AI17",N,N,"LAST_FLT","Code"
CSAI "AI18",N,N,"PREV_FLT","Code"
CSAI "AI19",N,N,"1ST_FLT","Code"
CSAI "AI20",N,N,"AI_1_ACT","%"
CSAI "AI21",N,N,"AI_2_ACT","%"
CSAI "AI22",N,N,"AO_1_ACT","mA"
CSAI "AI23",N,N,"AO_2_ACT","mA"
CSAI "AI24",N,N,"MTR_TEMP","°C"

CSBI "BI1",N,N,"STOP/RUN","STOP","RUN"
CSBI "BI2",N,N,"FWD/REV","FWD","REV"
CSBI "BI3",N,N,"FAULT","OK","FLT"
CSBI "BI4",N,N,"RELAY_1","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI5",N,N,"RELAY_2","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI6",N,N,"RELAY_3","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI7",N,N,"RELAY_4","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI8",N,N,"RELAY_5","OFF","ON"

Embedded fieldbus
108 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

CSBI "BI9",N,N,"DO_1","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI10",N,N,"INPUT_1","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI11",N,N,"INPUT_2","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI12",N,N,"INPUT_3","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI13",N,N,"INPUT_4","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI14",N,N,"INPUT_5","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI15",N,N,"INPUT_6","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI16",N,N,"EXT1/2","EXT1","EXT2"
CSBI "BI17",N,N,"HND/AUTO","AUTO","HAND"
CSBI "BI18",N,N,"WARNING","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI20",N,N,"DRV_REDY","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI21",N,N,"AT_SETPT","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI22",N,N,"RUN_PERMISSIVE","DISABLED","ENABLED"
CSBI "BI23",N,N,"N2_LOC_M","AUTO","N2_L"
CSBI "BI24",N,N,"N2_CTRL","NO","YES"

CSBI "BI25",N,N,"N2_R1SRC","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI26",N,N,"N2_R2SRC","NO","YES"
CSAO "AO1",Y,Y,"REF_1","%"
CSAO "AO2",Y,Y,"REF_2","%"
CSAO "AO3",Y,Y,"ACCEL_1","s"
CSAO "AO4",Y,Y,"DECEL_1","s"
CSAO "AO5",Y,Y,"CURR_LIM","A"
CSAO "AO6",Y,Y,"PID1_GN","%"
CSAO "AO7",Y,Y,"PID1_I","s"
CSAO "AO8",Y,Y,"PID1_D","s"
CSAO "AO9",Y,Y,"PID1_FLT","s"
CSAO "AO10",Y,Y,PID2_GN","%"
CSAO "AO11",Y,Y,"PID2_I","s"
CSAO "AO12",Y,Y,"PID2_D","s"
CSAO "AO13",Y,Y,"PID2_FLT","s"
CSAO "AO14",Y,Y,"CMD_AO_1","%"
CSAO "AO15",Y,Y,"CMD_AO_2","%"
CSAO "AO16",Y,Y,"PI2_STPT","%"
CSAO "AO17",Y,Y,"MIN_SPD","%"
CSAO "AO18",Y,Y,"MAX_SPD","%"
CSAO "AO19",Y,Y,"MB_PARAM",""
CSAO "AO20",Y,Y,"MB_DATA",""
CSBO "BO1",Y,Y,"START","STOP","START"
CSBO "BO2",Y,Y,"REVERSE","FWD","REV"
CSBO "BO3",Y,Y,"PAN_LOCK","OPEN","LOCKED"
CSBO "BO4",Y,Y,"RUN_ENAB","ENABLE","DISABLE"
CSBO "BO5",Y,Y,"R1/2_SEL","EXT_1","EXT_2"
CSBO "BO6",Y,Y,"FLT_RSET","-","RESET"
CSBO "BO7",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_1","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO8",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_2","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO9",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_3","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO10",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_4","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO11",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_5","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO12",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_6","OFF","ON"

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 109

CSBO "BO13",Y,Y,"RST_RTIM","OFF","RESET"
CSBO "BO14",Y,Y,"RST_KWH","OFF","RESET"
CSBO "BO15",Y,Y,"PID_SEL","SET1","SET2"
CSBO "BO16",Y,Y,"N2_LOC_C","AUTO","N2"
CSBO "BO17",Y,Y,"N2_LOC_R","AUTO","N2"
CSBO "BO18",Y,Y,"SAV_PRMS","OFF","SAVE"
CSBO "BO19",Y,Y,"READ_MB","NO","READ"
CSBO "BO20",Y,Y,"WRITE_MB","NO","WRITE"

Bypass overview
The ABB E-Clipse bypass does not support N2 Fieldbus communication “internal
values”.
All of the Binary I/O objects are listed below.
Binary Input – The binary input objects support the following features:
• Binary Input actual value
• Normal / Warning state specification
• Warning Enabled
• Change of State (COS) enabled
• Override value is received, but there is no action taken.
Binary Output – The binary output objects support the following features:
• Binary Output value
• Override value is used to change the Binary Output value. It is not possible to
return to the previous value by removing the override. The override feature is
used only to change the value.

N2 analog input objects – Bypass

The following table lists the N2 Analog Input objects defined for the ABB E-Clipse
bypass.
N2 Analog Inputs:
Bypass
Number Object Resolution Units Range
Parameter
AI1 CURRENT 0101 0.1 A 0…9999
AI2 LAST FAULT 0401 1 fault code
AI3 WARNING WORD 1 0308 1 Warning mask (see bypass
manual description of
parameter 0308)
AI4 WARNING WORD 2 0309 1 Warning mask (see bypass
manual description of
parameter 0309)
AI5 HAND OFF AUTO 0=Off, 1=Hand, 2=Auto
AI6 INPUT VOLT 0102 1 V Average of line-line input
voltage

Embedded fieldbus
110 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

N2 Analog Inputs:
Bypass
Number Object Resolution Units Range
Parameter
AI7 PCB TEMP 0105 0.1 °C Temperature of bypass
board
AI8 KW HOURS 0106 1 kWh Bypass-mode kilowatt hours
AI9 RUN TIME 0108 1 HR 0...65535
AI10 A-B VOLT 0111 1 V Phase A - Phase B voltage
AI11 B-C VOLT 0112 1 V Phase B - Phase C voltage
AI12 C-B VOLT 0113 1 V Phase C - Phase A voltage

N2 analog output objects – Bypass

The following table lists the N2 Analog Input objects defined for the ABB E-Clipse
bypass.
N2 Analog Inputs:
Bypass
Number Object Resolution Units Range
Parameter
AO1 BYP RUNDLY 1614 1 s 0…300
AO2 MB PARAM N/A 1 None 0…65535
AO3 MB DATA N/A 1 None 0…65535

N2 binary input objects – Bypass

The following table lists the N2 Binary Input objects defined for the ABB E-Clipse
bypass.
N2 Binary Inputs:
Number Object Drive Parameter Range
BI1 SYSTEM READY Status Word 1 = Ready
BI2 SYSTEM ENABLED Status Word 1 = Enabled
BI3 SYSTEM STARTED Status Word 1 = System Started
BI4 SYSTEM RUNNING Status Word 1 = System Running
BI5 N2 LOCAL MODE Status Word 1 = N2 Local
BI6 FAULT Status Word 1 = Bypass Fault
BI7 WARNING Status Word 1 = Bypass Warning
BI8 N2 CONTROL SCR Status Word 1 = Yes
BI9 OVERRIDE Status Word 1 = Override
BI10 INPUT 1 STATUS 0103 (bit mask 1) 1 = On
BI11 INPUT 2 STATUS 0103 (bit mask 2) 1 = On
BI12 INPUT 3 STATUS 0103 (bit mask 4) 1 = On
BI13 INPUT 4 STATUS 0103 (bit mask 8) 1 = On
BI14 INPUT 5 STATUS 0103 (bit mask 10h) 1 = On
BI15 INPUT 6 STATUS 0103 (bit mask 20h) 1 = On

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 111

N2 Binary Inputs:
Number Object Drive Parameter Range
BI16 RELAY 1 STATUS 0104 (bit mask 1) 1 = On
BI17 RELAY 2 STATUS 0104 (bit mask 2) 1 = On
BI18 RELAY 3 STATUS 0104 (bit mask 4) 1 = On
BI19 RELAY 4 STATUS 0104 (bit mask 8) 1 = On
BI20 RELAY 5 STATUS 0104 (bit mask 10h) 1 = On
BI21 BYPASS MODE Status Word 0 = Drive mode, 1 = Bypass mode
BI22 SYS UNDERLOAD Status Word 1 = System Underload
BI23 SYS FAULT Status Word 1 = System Fault
BI24 BYPASS RUNNING Status Word 1 = Bypass Running

N2 binary output objects – Bypass

The following table lists the N2 Binary Output objects defined for the ABB E-Clipse
bypass.
N2 Binary Outputs:
Number Object Drive Parameter Range
BO1 SYSTEM START Command Word 1 = Started
BO2 SYS RUN PERMISSIVE Command Word 1 = Enable
BO3 SYSTEM RESET Command Word Change 0 -> 1 Resets
BO4 OVERRIDE Command Word 1 = Override
BO5 COMMAND RO 1 107 (bit mask 1) 1 = On
BO6 COMMAND RO 2 107 (bit mask 2) 1 = On
BO7 COMMAND RO 3 107 (bit mask 4) 1 = On
BO8 COMMAND RO 4 107 (bit mask 8) 1 = On
BO9 COMMAND RO 5 107 (bit mask 10h) 1 = On
BO10 SYS INTERLOCK 1 Command Word 1 = Enable
BO11 SYS INTERLOCK 2 Command Word 1 = Enable
BO12 SYS INTERLOCK 3 Command Word 1 = Enable
BO13 SYS INTERLOCK 4 Command Word 1 = Enable
BO14 RESET KW HOURS 0106 Bypass-mode kilowatt hours - RESET
BO15 RESET RUN TIME 0108 0...65535 - RESET
BO16 PAR LOCK 1619 0 = LOCKED, 1 = OPEN
BO17 N2 LOCAL MODE Command Word 0 = AUTO, 1 = N2 LOCAL
BO18 READ MB N/A 0 = NO, 1 = READ
BO19 WRITE MB N/A 0 = NO, 1 = WRITE

Embedded fieldbus
112 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

DDL file for NCU – Bypass

The listing below is the Data Definition Language (DDL) file for ABB E-Clipse bypass
used with the Network Control Units.
This listing is useful when defining bypass I/O objects to the Network Controller
Units.
*******************************************************************
* ABB Drives, E-Clipse Bypass
*******************************************************************
CSMODEL "E-Clipse_Bypass","VND"

AITITLE "Analog Inputs"

BITITLE "Binary Inputs"
AOTITLE "Analog Outputs"
BOTITLE "Binary Outputs"

CSAI "AI1",N,N,"CURRENT","A"
CSAI "AI2",N,N,"LAST FLT","Code"
CSAI "AI3",N,N,"ALM WD 1","Code"
CSAI "AI4",N,N,"ALM WD 2","Code"
CSAI "AI5",N,N,"HOA","Code"
CSAI "AI6",N,N,"INP VOLT","V"
CSAI "AI7",N,N,"PCB TEMP","?C"
CSAI "AI8",N,N,"KW HOURS","kWh"
CSAI "AI9",N,N,"RUN TIME","H"
CSAI "AI10",N,N,"A-B VOLT","V"
CSAI "AI11",N,N,"B-C VOLT","V"
CSAI "AI12",N,N,"C-A VOLT","V"

CSBI "BI1",N,N,"SYS RDY","NO","YES"

CSBI "BI2",N,N,"SYS ENAB","DISABLED","ENABLED"
CSBI "BI3",N,N,"SYS STRT","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI4",N,N,"SYS RUN","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI5",N,N,"N2 LOC M","AUTO","N2 L"
CSBI "BI6",N,N,"FAULT","OK","FLT"
CSBI "BI7",N,N,"WARNING","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI8",N,N,"N2 CTRL","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI9",N,N,"OVERRIDE","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI10",N,N,"INPUT 1","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI11",N,N,"INPUT 2","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI12",N,N,"INPUT 3","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI13",N,N,"INPUT 4","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI14",N,N,"INPUT 5","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI15",N,N,"INPUT 6","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI16",N,N,"RELAY 1","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI17",N,N,"RELAY 2","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI18",N,N,"RELAY 3","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI19",N,N,"RELAY 4","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI20",N,N,"RELAY 5","OFF","ON"

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 113

CSBI "BI21",N,N,"BP MODE","DRIVE","BYPASS"

CSBI "BI22",N,N,"SYS UNLD","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI23",N,N,"SYS FLT","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI24",N,N,"BP RUN","NO","YES"

CSAO "AO1",Y,Y,"BP R DLY","s"

CSAO "AO2",Y,Y,"MB PARAM",""
CSAO "AO3",Y,Y,"MB DATA",""

CSBO "BO1",Y,Y,"SYS STRT","STOP","START"

CSBO "BO2",Y,Y,"SYS RUN PERMISSIVE","DISABLE","ENABLE"
CSBO "BO3",Y,Y,"SYS RSET","OFF","RESET"
CSBO "BO4",Y,Y,"OVERRIDE","OFF","OVERRIDE"
CSBO "BO5",Y,Y,"CMD RO 1","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO6",Y,Y,"CMD RO 2","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO7",Y,Y,"CMD RO 3","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO8",Y,Y,"CMD RO 4","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO9",Y,Y,"CMD RO 5","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO10",Y,Y,"SYS INTERLOCK 1","DISABLE","ENABLE"
CSBO "BO11",Y,Y,"SYS INTERLOCK 2","DISABLE","ENABLE"
CSBO "BO12",Y,Y,"SYS INTERLOCK 3","DISABLE","ENABLE"
CSBO "BO13",Y,Y,"SYS INTERLOCK 4","DISABLE","ENABLE"
CSBO "BO14",Y,Y,"RST KWH","OFF","RESET"
CSBO "BO15",Y,Y,"RST RTIM","OFF","RESET"
CSBO "BO16",Y,Y,"PAR LOCK","OPEN","LOCKED"
CSBO "BO17",Y,Y,"N2 LOC C","AUTO","N2"
CSBO "BO18",Y,Y,"READ MB","NO","READ"
CSBO "BO19",Y,Y,"WRITE MB","NO","WRITE"

Embedded fieldbus
114 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

BACnet protocol technical data – system

System overview -
When bypass parameter 1625 COMM CTL = (0) DRIVE ONLY, the drive’s BACnet
objects are supported using the drive’s device address. The bypass’s BACnet
objects related to the control word are no longer valid See Communication setup –
EFB on page 79.
Bypass BACnet objects not valid
Point # Name
BV10 RUN/STOP CMD
BV11 OVERRIDE CMD
BV12 RUN PERMISSIVE CMD
BV14 FAULT RESET
BV15 START INTERLOCK 1
BV16 START INTERLOCK 2
BV17 START INTERLOCK 3
BV18 START INTERLOCK 4

When bypass parameter 1625 COMM CTL = (1) SYSTEM, the drive’s BACnet
following objects related to control are no longer available when using the drive’s
device address.
Drive BACnet objects not valid
Point # Name
BV10 RUN/STOP CMD
BV12 RUN PERMISSIVE CMD
BV20 START INTERLOCK 1
BV21 START INTERLOCK 2

Drive overview
Bypass parameter Group 58 defines features used by all Embedded Fieldbus (EFB)
protocols.

Note: The system will function as a master with MAC IDs in the range of 1-127. With
MAC ID settings of 128-254, the drive is in slave only mode.

Changes made to drive parameter Group 58, EFB Protocol, do not take affect until
you perform one of the following:
• Cycle the bypass power OFF and ON, or
• Set bypass parameter 5803 to 0, and then back to a unique MAC ID, or
• Use the ReinitializeDevice service.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 115

Quick-start sequence - drive communications

The following steps summarize the process for enabling and configuring BACnet on
the ABB E-Clipse Bypass:
1. Enable BACnet protocol: Set bypass parameter 9802, COMM PROTOCOL SEL
BACNET (5).
• To confirm this selection, read bypass parameter 5803, EFB PROTOCOL ID. It
should read x5xx (where “x” is any value).
2. Place the BACnet channel in “reset”: Set bypass parameter 5803, EFB STATION
ID = 0.
• This setting holds the BACnet communication channel in reset while remaining
settings are completed.
3. Define the MS/TP baud rate.
• Set bypass parameter 5803, EFB BAUD RATE = appropriate value
4. Define the Device Object instance.
• To define a specific device object instance value, use bypass parameters 5840
and 5899 (object instance values must be unique and in the range 0
to 4,194,302).
• To use the bypass’ MS/TP MAC ID as the device object instance value, set
bypass parameter 5840 and 5899 = 0.
• BACnet requires a unique Device Object ID for each device on the BACnet
network.
5. Define a unique MS/TP MAC ID. Set bypass parameter 5802, EFB STATION ID =
appropriate value.
• Once this parameter is set to a non-zero value, current BACnet settings are
“latched” and used for communication until the channel is reset.
• In order to participate in MS/TP token passing, the MAC ID used must be within
the limits defined by other masters’ “Max Master” property.
6. Confirm proper BACnet communication.
• When BACnet communication is operating properly, bypass parameter 5813,
EFB PAR 16 (the MS/TP token counter), should be continually increasing.
• Bypass parameter 5811, UART ERRORS, should be stable.
7. Configure the Device Object Name.
• BACnet requires a unique name for each device on the BACnet network. Write
the Object Name of the Device Object of the drive to a unique text string using the
operator workstation or software tool capable of writing BACnet properties. The
Object Name cannot be modified with the ABB display panel and only the Device
object name is writable in this product. The E-Clipse bypass does not support
writing of Device Description.

Embedded fieldbus
116 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

BACnet Device Address Rules

-- MSTP MAC Addresses must be unique for all devices connected to the same RS485 network.
-- MSTP MAC Address is configurable via parameter 5003 in the bypass.
1..127 = range of supported Master addresses for the bypass
-- Network Number must be unique for each network (IP and MSTP)
-- Network Number of 0 is reserved for broadcasts
-- Device Object IDs must be unique across the entire BACnet network, all IP and MSTP subnetworks.
-- Device Object IDs are 22 bits, configurable via parameters 5840 and 5899 in the bypass.
-- The example Network Numbers and DeviceOIDs show a good way to maintain unique DeviceOIDs
across the network.

OWS
(Operator
Workstation)

IP Network#=1
IP

MSTP
Router 1

MSTP Network#=2
MSTP MAC=0
DeviceOID=2000
IP Network#=1 VAV1 VAV2 VAV3

MSTP MAC=1 MSTP MAC=2 MSTP MAC=3

DeviceOID=2001 DeviceOID=2002 DeviceOID=2003

MSTP
Router 2

MSTPNetwork#=3
E-Clipse
MSTP MAC=0
DeviceOID=3000
IP Network#=1 ACH 580

Drive Bypass
MSTP MAC=1
(param 58.03 = 1)
DeviceOID=3001
MSTP MAC = 2 MSTP MAC = 3
(param 58.40 = 3001)
(bypass param 5803 = 2) (bypass param 5003 = 3)
(param 58.99 = 0)
DeviceOID = 3002 DeviceOID = 3003
(bypass param 58.40 = 3002) (bypass param 50.40 = 3003)
(bypass param 58.99 = 0) (bypass param 50.99 = 0)

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 117

Activate drive control functions

Controlling the drive
Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
• Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function.
• Define as a fieldbus input, any system data required for control (drive only or
system)
• Define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.
The following sections describe the configuration required for each control function.

Note: The user should change only the parameters for the functions you wish to
control via BACnet. All other parameters should typically remain at factory default.

Start/stop direction control – Drive

Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location.
BACnet
Bypass Parameter Value Description
Access Point
1601 START/STOP 2 (COMM) Start/Stop by fieldbus with Ext1 or Ext21 BV10
selected
1625 COMM CTRL 0 (Drive 1625 = 0 for control signals (Start/Stop and N/A
Only) enables) to go to drive only
1 (System) 1625 = 1 for control signals to go to the
system (drive or bypass, depending on
keypad mode selection)
1) Ext1 = Ref 1
Ext 2 = Ref 2; Ref 2 normally used for PID setpoint commands.

Input reference select

Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location.)
Scalar Control Vector Control
Value
(Group 28) (Group 22)
Ext1/Ext2 Select 19.11 32, EFB MCW bit 11
Ref1 28.11 22.11
Ext1
Ref2 28.12 22.12 Flexibility to write to 3.09
(EFBRef1) or 3.10
Ref1 28.15 22.15 (EFBRef2)
Ext2
Ref2 28.16 22.16

Embedded fieldbus
118 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

EFB Ref1/Ref2
Drive Parameter BACnet Access Point
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 Selection BV13
3.09 EFB Ref1 AV16
3.10 EFB Ref2 AV17

Drive relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Only make these drive programming changes if you require control via BACnet.
• Fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate
location.
BACnet
Drive Parameter Value Setting
Access Point
10.24 RO1 RELAY OUTPUT 1 62, RO/DIO control Relay Output 1 BO0
Source word controlled by fieldbus.
10.27 RELAY OUTPUT 2 62, RO/DIO control Relay Output 2 BO1
word controlled by fieldbus.
10.30 RELAY OUTPUT 3 62, RO/DIO control Relay Output 3 BO2
word controlled by fieldbus.
15.071) RELAY OUTPUT 4 62, RO/DIO control Relay Output 4 BO3
word controlled by fieldbus.
15.101) RELAY OUTPUT 5 62, RO/DIO control Relay Output 5 BO4
word controlled by fieldbus.
15.231) DIGITAL OUTPUT 62, RO/DIO control Digital Output 1 BO5
DO1 Source 1 word controlled by fieldbus.
1) More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.

Analog output control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location.
BACnet
Drive Parameter Value Setting Access
Point
13.12 AO1 Source 37, AO1 Data Analog Output 1 controlled by –
Storage writing to parameter 13.91.
13.91 AO1 Data Storage – AO0
13.22 AO2 Content Sel 38, AO2 Data Analog Output 2 controlled by –
Storage writing to parameter 13.92.
13.92 AO2 Data Storage – AO1

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 119

Feedback from the drive

Pre-defined feedback
Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
a sample of feedback data.

Drive Parameter BACnet

01.01 Motor Speed Used AV0
01.06 Output Frequency AV1
01.07 Motor Current AV4
01.10 Motor Torque AV5
01.14 Output Power AV6
01.11 DC Voltage AV2
01.13 Output Voltage AV3
01.57 Inverter KWH Counter (resettable) AV8
10.02 DI Delayed Status BI6
10.21 RO Status BI0
58.19 EFB Status Word – bit 0 (STOP) BV0
58.19 EFB Status Word – bit 2 (REV) BV1

Mailbox read/write
The E-Clipse bypass provides a “Mailbox” function to access parameters that have
not been pre-defined by the protocol. Using mailbox, any drive parameter can be
identified and read. Mailbox can also be used to adjust parameter settings by writing
a value to any drive or bypass parameter identified. The following table describes the
use of this function.
BACnet Access Point
Name Description Drive node Bypass node
objects objects
Mailbox Parameter Enter the number of the drive group and AV25 AV13
parameter number using the format:
(group #) * 256 + parameter #.

Example: drive parameter 28.01 is entered as

(28 * 256) + 1 = 7169
Mailbox Data Contains the parameter value after a read, or AV26 AV14
enter the desired parameter value for a write.
Mailbox Read A binary value triggers a read – the value of the BV15 BV21
“Mailbox Parameter” appears in “Mailbox data”.
Mailbox Write A binary value triggers a write – the drive value BV16 BV22
for the “Mailbox Parameter” changes to the
value in “Mailbox data”.

Embedded fieldbus
120 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Note: You must read and write mailbox values using the drive’s internal scaling. For
example, the parameter 28.72 Freq acceleration time 1, has a resolution of 0.1 sec.,
which means that, in the drive (and in the mailbox), the value 1 = 0.1 seconds. So, a
mailbox value of 10 translates to 1.0 second, a mailbox value of 300 translates to
30.0 seconds, etc. Refer to the Parameter list and descriptions section for each
parameter’s resolution and units of measure.

Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.

Drive Parameter Value Setting BACnet

10.21 RO Status RO 1-3 STATUS Relay 1…3 status. N/A BI0…BI2
RO 4-5 STATUS Relay 4…6 status. N/A BI3…BI4
15.04 RO/DO Status
DOI STATUS N/A B15

Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) - Drive

PICS summary
BACnet Standard Device Profile. This version of the bypass BACnet fully conforms
to the ‘Application-Specific Controller’ standard device profile (B-ASC).
Services Supported. The following services are supported by the bypass:
• I-Am (Response to Who-Is, also broadcast on power-up and other reset)
• I-Have (Response to Who-Has)
• ReadProperty
• WriteProperty
• DeviceCommunicationControl
• ReinitializeDevice
Data Link Layer. The ACH580 implements MS/TP (Master) Data Link Layer. All
standard MS/TP baud rates are supported (9600, 19200, 38400 and 76800).
MAC ID / Device Object Instance. The bypass supports separate MAC ID and
Device Object Instance parameters:
• Set the MAC ID using bypass parameter 5803. Default: 5803 = 1.
• Set the Device Object Instance using drive parameters 5840 and 53.17. Default:
Both 5840 and 5899 = 0, which causes the MAC ID to “double” as the Device
Object Instance. For Device Object Instance values not linked to the MAC ID, set
ID values using 5840 and 5899 = a value other than 0.
– For IDs in the range of 1 to 65,535: Parameter 5840 sets the ID directly (5317
must be 0). For example, the following values set the ID to 49134:
5840 = 49134 and 5899 = 0.
– For IDs > 65,535: The ID equals 5311’s value plus 10,000 times 5317’s value.
For example, the following values set the ID to 71,234: 5840 = 1234 and
5899 = 7.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 121

Max Info Frames Property. Configure the Device Object Max Info Frames property
using bypass parameter 5842. Default: 5312 = 1.
Max Master Property. Configure the Device Object Max Master property using drive
parameter 5313. Default: 5841 = 127.
MS/TP token counter
Parameter 5813 stores the count of MS/TP tokens passed to this drive.

Embedded fieldbus
122 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Object definitions – Drive

Object/property support matrix
The following table summarizes the Object Types/Properties Supported:
Object Type

Property Multistate
Binary Binary Binary Analog Analog Analog Loop
Device Value
Input Output Value Input Output Value Properties
Properties
Object Identifier         
Object Name         
Object Type         
System Status 
Vendor Name 
Vendor Identifier 
Model Name 
Firmware Revision 
Appl Software Revision 
Protocol Version 
Protocol Revision 
Services Supported 
Object Types Supported 
Object List 
Max APDU Length 
Segmentation Support 
APDU Timeout 
Number APDU Retries 
Max Master 
Max Info Frames 
Device Address Binding 
Database Revision 
Present Value        
Status Flags        
Event State        
Out-of-Service        
Units   
Priority Array  1  1
Relinquish Default  1  1
Polarity  
Active Text   
Inactive Text   
Property List       

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 123

Object Type

Property Multistate
Binary Binary Binary Analog Analog Analog Loop
Device Value
Input Output Value Input Output Value Properties
Properties
Local Date 
Local Time 
2
Active COV Subscriptions 
COV Increment2  
Number of States 
State Text 
Output Units 
Manipulated Variable Reference 
Controlled Variable Reference 
Controlled Variable Value 
Controlled Variable Units 
Setpoint Reference 
Action 
Proportional Constant 
Proportional Constant Units 
Integral Constant 
Integral Constant Units 
Derivative Constant 
Derivative Constant Units 
Derivative Filter Time 
Priority for Writing 
Object Name ID 
1) For commandable values only.
2) If COV supported.

Binary input object instance summary – Drive

The following table summarizes the Binary Input Objects supported:
Instance Object Active/ Present Value
Description
ID Name Inactive Text Access Type
BI0 RO 1 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 1.
BI1 RO 2 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 2.
BI2 RO 3 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 3.
BI3 RO 4 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 4 (requires CMOD-01 or
CHD-01 option).

Embedded fieldbus
124 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Instance Object Active/ Present Value

Description
ID Name Inactive Text Access Type
BI4 RO 5 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 5 (requires CMOD-01 or
CHD-01 option).
BI5 DO 1 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 6 (requires CMOD-01 option).
BI6 DI 1 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 1.
BI7 DI 2 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 2.
BI8 DI 3 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 3.
BI9 DI 4 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 4.
BI10 DI 5 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 5.
BI11 DI 6 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 6.

Note: For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays and relinquish
defaults.

Binary output object instance summary – Drive

The following table summarizes the Binary Output Objects supported:

Instance Active/ Present Value

Object Name Description
ID Inactive Text Access Type
BO0 RO1 CMD This object controls the output stateof ON/OFF C
Relay 1. This control requires that drive
parameter 10.24 value = 62 (RO/DIO
CONTROL WORD).
BO1 RO2 CMD This object controls the output state of ON/OFF C
Relay 1. This control requires that drive
parameter 10.27 value = 62 (RO/DIO
control word).
BO2 RO3 CMD This object controls the output state of ON/OFF C
Relay 1. This control requires that drive
parameter 10.30 value = 62 (RO/DIO
control word).
BO3 RO4 CMD This object controls the output state of ON/OFF C
Relay 1. This control requires that drive
parameter 15.07 value = 62 (RO/DIO
control word). Also requires CMOD-01
option.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 125

Instance Active/ Present Value

Object Name Description
ID Inactive Text Access Type
BO4 RO5 CMD This object controls the output state of ON/OFF C
Relay 1. This control requires that drive
parameter 15.10 value = 62 (RO/DIO
control word). Also requires CMOD-01
option.
BO5 RO6 CMD This object controls the output state of ON/OFF C
Digital Output 1. This control requires
that drive parameter 15.23 value = 62
(RO/DIO control word). Also requires
CMOD-01 option.

Note: For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays and relinquish
defaults.

Binary value object instance summary – Drive

The following table summarizes the Binary Value Objects supported:
Instance Active/Inactive Present Value
Object Name Description
ID Text Access Type
BV0 RUN/STOP ACT This object indicates the drive RUN/STOP R
Run Status, regardless of the
control source.
BV1 FWD/REV ACT This object indicates the REV/FWD R
motor’s rotation direction,
regardless of the control
source.
BV2 FAULT ACT this object indicates the drive’s FAULT/OK R
fault status.
BV3 EXT 1/2 ACT This object indicates which EXT2/EXT1 R
control source is active:
External 1 or External 2.
BV4 HAND/AUTO ACT This object indicates whether HAND/AUTO R
the drive is under Hand or Auto
control.
BV5 WARNING ACT This object indicates the drive’s WARNING/OK R
warning status.
BV7 DRIVE READY This object indicates whether READY/NOT R
the drive is ready to accept a READY
run command.
BV8 AT SETPOINT This object indicates whether YES/NO R
the drive is at the commanded
setpoint.
BV9 ENABLE ACT This object indicates the System ENABLE/ R
Enable command status (the DISABLE
combination of all Run and Start
Interlocks), regardless of the
control source.

Embedded fieldbus
126 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Instance Active/Inactive Present Value

Object Name Description
ID Text Access Type
BV10 RUN/STOP CMD This object commands a drive RUN/STOP C
start. Control requires bypass
parameter 1601 value = comm.
BV11 FWD/REV CMD This object commands a motor REV/FWD C
rotation direction change.
Control requires 20.11 =
request (0) and drive configured
to receive the reference over
the fieldbus.
BV12 RUN This object commands Run ENABLE/ C
PERMISSIVE Permissive. Control requires DISABLE
CMD parameter 1601 value = COMM.
BV13 EXT 1/2 CMD This object selects EXT1 or EXT2/EXT1 C
EXT2 as the active control
source. Control requires
parameter 19.11 value = EFB
MCW bit 11 (32).
BV14 FAULT RESET This object resets a faulted RESET/NO C
drive. The command is
rising-edge triggered.
BV15 MBOX READ This object reads a parameter READ/RESET W
(defined by AV25 MBOX
PARAM) and returns it in AV26
MBOX DATA.
BV16 MBOX WRITE This object writes the data value WRITE/RESET W
specified by AV26, MBOX
DATA, to a parameter (defined
by AV25, MBOX PARAM).
BV17 LOCK PANEL This object locks the panel and LOCK/UNLOCK W
prevents parameter changes.
The corresponding drive
parameter is 96.02.
BV18 CTL OVERRIDE This object commands the drive ON/OFF C
CMD into BACnet Control Override.
In this mode, BACnet takes
drive control from the normal
source. However, the control
panel’s HAND mode has priority
over BACnet Control Override.
BV19 CTL OVERRIDE This object indicates whether ON/OFF R
ACT the drive is in BACnet Control
Override. (See BV18.)
BV20 START This object commands start ENABLE/ C
INTERLOCK 1 interlock1. Control requires DISABLE
bypass parameter 1603 value =
COMM.
BV21 START This object commands start ENABLE/ C
INTERLOCK 2 interlock1. Control requires DISABLE
bypass parameter 1604 value =
COMM.
BV24 STARTED MON This object indicates the drive’s START/NO R
started status. START

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 127

Instance Active/Inactive Present Value

Object Name Description
ID Text Access Type
BV25 STO MON This object indicates the drive’s ON/OFF R
Safe Torque Off status.
BV26 UL MON This object indicates the drive’s ON/OFF R
underload status.
BV27 OL MON This object indicates the drive’s ON/OFF R
overload status.
BV28 MTR HTG CMD This object activates the drive’s ON/OFF W
motor pre-heating function.
BV29 MTR HG MON This object indicates the drive’s ON/OFF R
motor pre-heating status.
BV30 USER0 MON This object indicates the drive’s ON/OFF R
User Bit0 status.
BV31 USER1 MON This object indicates the drive’s ON/OFF R
User Bit1 status.
BV32 USER2 MON This object indicates the drive’s ON/OFF R
User Bit2 status.
BV33 USER3 MON This object indicates the drive’s ON/OFF R
User Bit3 status.
BV34 USER0 CMD This object activates the drive’s ON/OFF C
User Bit0.
BV35 USER1 CMD This object activates the drive’s ON/OFF C
User Bit1.
BV36 USER2 CMD This object activates the drive’s ON/OFF C
User Bit2.
BV37 USER3 CMD This object activates the drive’s ON/OFF C
User Bit3.
BV39 PAR SAV CMD This object triggers the drive to SAVE/DONE W
save parameters to non-volatile
memory.
BV40 PID SET2 SEL This object selects which PID SET2/SET1 W
gain set is active.

Note: For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays and relinquish
defaults.

Analog input object instance summary – Drive

The following table summarizes the Analog Input Objects supported:
Instance Present Value
Object Name Description Units
ID Access Type
AI0 ANALOG INPUT 1 This object indicates the value of Percent R
Analog Input 1. The corresponding
drive parameter is 12.101.
AI1 ANALOG INPUT 2 This object indicates the value of Percent R
Analog Input 2. The corresponding
drive parameter is 12.102.

Embedded fieldbus
128 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Note: For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays and relinquish
defaults.

Analog output object instance summary – Drive

The following table summarizes the Analog Output Objects supported:
BACnet
Name Description
Access Point
Mailbox Parameter Enter the number of the drive group and parameter number AV25
using the format: (group #) * 256 + parameter #.

Example: drive parameter 28.01 is entered as (28 * 256)

+ 1 = 7169
Mailbox Data Contains the parameter value after a read, or enter the AV26
desired parameter value for a write.
Mailbox Read A binary value triggers a read – the value of the “Mailbox BV15
Parameter” appears in “Mailbox data”.
Mailbox Write A binary value triggers a write – the drive value for the BV16
“Mailbox Parameter” changes to the value in “Mailbox data”.

Note: For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays and relinquish
defaults.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 129

Analog value object instance summary – Drive

The following table summarizes the Analog Value Objects supported:
Instance Present Value
Object Name Description Units
ID Access Type
AV0 OUTPUT This object indicates the calculated motor RPM R
SPEED speed in RPM. The corresponding drive
parameter is 01.01.
AV1 OUTPUT FREQ This object indicates the output Hertz R
frequency applied to the motor in Hz. The
corresponding drive parameter is 01.06.
AV2 DC BUS VOLT This object indicates the drive’s DC bus Volts R
voltage level. The corresponding drive
parameter is 01.11.
AV3 OUTPUT VOLT This object indicates the AC output Volts R
voltage applied to the motor. The
corresponding drive parameter is 01.13.
AV4 CURRENT This object indicates the measured Amps R
output current. The corresponding drive
parameter is 01.07.
AV5 TORQUE This object indicates the calculated motor Percent R
output torque as a percentage of nominal
torque. The corresponding drive
parameter is 01.10.
AV6 POWER This object indicates the measured Kilowatts R
output power in kW. The corresponding
drive parameter is 01.14.
AV7 DRIVE TEMP This object indicates the measured Percent R
heatsink temperature expressed as
percent where:
0% = 0°C (32°F)
100% = Fault limit
The corresponding drive parameter is
05.11
AV8 KWH (R) This object indicates, in kW hours, the kWh W
drive’s accumulated energy usage since
the last reset. The value can be reset to
zero. The corresponding drive parameter
is 01.58.
AV9 KWH (NR) This object indicates the drive’s MWh R
accumulated energy usage in MW hours.
The value cannot be reset.
AV10 PRC PID FBCK This object is the Process PID feedback Percent R
signal. The corresponding drive
parameter is 40.97.
AV11 PRC PID DEV This object is the Process PID output Percent R
signal’s deviation from its setpoint. The
corresponding drive parameter is 40.99.
AV12 EXT PID FBCK This object is the External PID feedback Percent R
signal. Calculated as (drive parameter
71.02) / drive parameter 71.14).

Embedded fieldbus
130 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Instance Present Value

Object Name Description Units
ID Access Type
AV13 EXT PID DEV This object is the External PID output Percent R
signal’s deviation from its setpoint.
Calculated as (drive parameter 71.04) /
drive parameter 71.14).
AV14 RUN TIME (R) This object indicates, in hours, the drive’s Hours W
accumulated run time since the last reset.
The value can be reset to zero. The
corresponding drive parameter is 05.03.
AV15 MOTOR TEMP This object indicates the drive’s motor °C R
temperature, as set up in parameter
Group 35. The corresponding drive
parameter is 35.02 or 35.03 if either
enabled or 35.01.
AV16 INPUT REF 1 This object sets 03.09. Group 22 must be Percent C
configured to make use of EFB ref 1.
AV17 INPUT REF 2 • This object sets 03.10. Group 22 must Percent C
be configured to make use of EFB
ref 2.
AV18 LAST FLT This object indicates the most recent fault None R
entered in the drive’s fault log.
AV19 PREV FLT 1 This object indicates the second most None R
recent fault entered in the drive’s fault
log.
AV20 PREV FLT 2 This object indicates the third most recent None R
fault entered in the drive’s fault log.
AV21 AO 1 ACT This object indicates Analog Output 1’s mA or V R
level. The corresponding drive parameter
is 12.11. Units depend on drive
parameter 12.15.
AV22 AO 2 ACT This object indicates Analog Output 2’s mA or V R
level. The corresponding drive parameter
is 12.22. Units depend on drive
parameter 12.25.
AV23 ACCEL1 TIME This object sets the Ramp1 acceleration Seconds W
time. The corresponding drive parameter
is 28.72 if 99.04 value = Scalar; 23.12 if
99.04 value = Vector.
AV24 DECEL1 TIME This object sets the Ramp1 deceleration Seconds W
time. The corresponding drive parameter
is 28.73 if 99.04 value = Scalar; 23.13 if
99.04 value = Vector.
AV25 MBOX PARAM This object defines the parameter to be None W
read or written to by the mailbox function.
See BV15 and BV16.
AV26 MBOX DATA This object holds the mailbox function’s None W
parameter value – a value that was read,
or is to be written. See BV15 and BV16.
AV29 FRQ OUT MIN This object indicates the drive’s minimum Amps R
output frequency.
AV30 FRQ OUT MAX This object indicates the drive’s Percent R
maximum output frequency.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 131

Instance Present Value

Object Name Description Units
ID Access Type
AV31 SPD OUT PCT This object indicates the drive’s output Percent R
speed, as a percentage of rated.
AV32 CUR OUT PCT This object indicates the drive’s output Percent R
current, as a percentage of rated.
AV33 MAX This object indicates the drive’s Percent R
CURRENT maximum output current.
AV40 PRC PID FBK This object indicates the drive’s process Percent R
RD PID feedback.
AV41 PRC PID STPT This object indicates the drive’s process Percent R
RD PID setpoint.
AV42 PRC PID STPT This object sets the drive’s process PID Percent C
WR setpoint.
AV43 PRC PID FBK This object sets the drive’s process PID Percent C
WR feedback.
AV44 PRC PID OUT This object indicates the drive’s process Percent R
PID output.
AV45 PID SET1 GAIN This object sets the drive’s process PID None W
set1 proportional gain.
AV46 PID SET1 This object sets the drive’s process PID Seconds W
ITIME set1 integration time.
AV49 PRC PID DEV This object indicates the drive’s process Percent R
MON PID deviation.
AV53 PID SET2 GAIN This object sets the drive’s process PID None W
set2 proportional gain.
AV54 PID SET2 This object sets the drive’s process PID Seconds W
ITIME set2 integration time.
AV55 EXT PID FBK This object indicates the drive’s external Percent R
RD PID feedback.
AV56 EXT PID STPT This object indicates the drive’s external Percent R
RD PID setpoint.
AV59 EXT PID OUT This object indicates the drive’s external Percent R
PID output.
AV60 EXT PID This object sets the drive’s external PID None W
PGAIN proportional gain.
AV61 EXT PID ITIME This object sets the drive’s external PID Seconds W
integration time.
AV64 EXT PID DEV This object indicates the drive’s external Percent R
MON PID deviation.
AV130 KWH CUR HR This object indicates the drive’s energy kWh R
usage for the current hour.
AV131 KWH PRV HR This object indicates the drive’s energy kWh R
usage for the previous hour.
AV132 KWH CUR DAY This object indicates the drive’s energy kWh R
usage for the current day.
AV133 KWH PRV DAY This object indicates the drive’s energy kWh R
usage for the previous day.

Embedded fieldbus
132 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Multistate Value Objects

The following table summarizes the Multistate Value Objects supported
Instance ID Object Name Description
MSV0 HAND AUTO REF This object indicates the drive’s Hand/Off/
Auto status.
MSV1 ACTIVE FAULT 1 This object indicates the drive’s most
recent fault.
MSV2 ACTIVE FAULT 2 This object indicates the drive’s second
most recent fault.
MSV3 ACTIVE FAULT 3 This object indicates the drive’s third most
recent fault.
MSV4 ACTIVE WARNING 1 This object indicates the drive’s most
recent warning.
MSV5 ACTIVE WARNING 2 This object indicates the drive’s second
most recent warning.
MSV6 ACTIVE WARNING 3 This object indicates the drive’s third most
recent warning.

Loop Objects
The following table summarizes the Multistate Value Objects supported
Instance ID Object Name Description
LOOP0 LOOP SET 1 This object controls the drive’s first loop
object.
LOOP1 LOOP SET 2 This object controls the drive’s second
loop object.

BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

For the BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement, please see ABB
document 3AXD10000768421.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 133

Object definitions – Bypass

Object/property support matrix – Bypass
The following table summarizes the Object Types/Properties Supported:
Object Type
Property Binary Binary Binary Analog Analog Analog
Device
Input Output Value Input Output Value
Object Identifier       
Object Name       
Object Type       
Description 
System Status 
Vendor Name 
Vendor Identifier 
Model Name 
Firmware Revision 
Appl Software Revision 
Protocol Version 
Protocol Revision 
Services Supported 
Object Types Supported 
Object List 
Max APDU Length 
Segmentation Support 
APDU Timeout 
Number APDU Retries 
Max Master 
Max Info Frames 
Device Address Binding 
Database Revision 
Present Value      
Status Flags      
Event State      
Out-of-Service      
Units   
Priority Array  *  *
Relinquish Default  *  *
Polarity  
Active Text   
Inactive Text   
1) For commandable values only.

Embedded fieldbus
134 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

BACnet input object instance summary – Bypass

The following table summarizes the Binary Input Objects supported:
Instance Object Active/ Present Value
Description
ID Name Inactive Text Access Type
BI0 RO 1 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Relay Output 1.
BI1 RO 2 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Relay Output 2.
BI2 RO 3 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Relay Output 3.
BI3 RO 4 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Relay Output 4.
BI4 RO 5 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Relay Output 5.
BI5 DI 1 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Digital Input 1.
BI6 DI 2 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Digital Input 2.
BI7 DI 3 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Digital Input 3.
BI8 DI 4 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Digital Input 4.
BI9 DI 5 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Digital Input 5.
BI10 DI 6 ACT This object indicates the status of ON/OFF R
bypass Digital Input 6.

Note: For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays and relinquish
defaults.

BACnet output object instance summary – Bypass

The following table summarizes the Binary Output Objects supported:
Instance Active/ Present Value
Object Name Description
ID Inactive Text Access Type
BO0 RO1 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of bypass Relay Output 1. This
control requires that parameter
1401 value = COMM.
BO1 RO2 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of bypass Relay Output 2. This
control requires that parameter
1404 value = COMM.
BO2 RO3 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of bypass Relay Output 3. This
control requires that parameter
1407 value = COMM.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 135

Instance Active/ Present Value

Object Name Description
ID Inactive Text Access Type
BO3 RO4 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of bypass Relay Output 4. This
control requires that parameter
1410 value = COMM (also requires
OREL-01 option).
BO4 RO5 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of bypass Relay Output 5. This
control requires that parameter
1413 value = COMM (also requires
OREL-01 option).

Note: For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays and relinquish
defaults.

BACnet value object instance summary – Bypass

The following table summarizes the Binary Value Objects supported:
Instance Active/ Present Value
Object Name Description
ID Inactive Text Access Type
BV0 SYS RUN ACT This Object indicates the system RUN/STOP R
run status regardless of the
control source.
BV1 SYST START ACT This Object indicates the system START/NO R
started status regardless of the START
control source.
BV2 BYP FLT ACT This Object indicates the bypass FAULT/OK R
fault status.
BV3 SYS FLT ACT This Object indicates the system FAULT/OK R
fault status.
BV4 SYSTEM MODE This Object indicates if the BYPASS/ R
bypass or the drive is controlling DRIVE
the motor.
BV5 WARNING ACT This Object indicates the bypass WARNING/OK R
warning status.
BV6 BYP RUN ACT This Object indicates the bypass RUN/STOP R
run status regardless of the
control source.
BV7 READY TO RUN This Object indicates whether READY/NO R
the system is ready to receive a READY
run command.
BV8 UNDERLOAD This Object indicates whether YES/NO R
the system is in an underload
condition.
BV9 ENABLE ACT This Object indicates the System ENABLE/ R
Enable command status (the DISABLE
combination of all Run and Start
Interlocks), regardless of the
control source.

Embedded fieldbus
136 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Instance Active/ Present Value

Object Name Description
ID Inactive Text Access Type
BV10 RUN/STOP CMD This Object commands a system RUN/ STOP C
start. This requires bypass
parameter 1601 value = COMM
for BACnet to control.
BV11 OVERRIDE CMD This Object commands the YES/NO C
system to an override 2
condition. This requires bypass
parameter 1701 value = COMM
for BACnet to control.
BV12 RUN This Object commands the ENABLE/ C
PERMISSIVE system Run Permissive. This DISABLE
CMD requires bypass parameter 1602
value = COMM for BACnet to
control.
BV13 OVERRIDE ACT This Object indicates if override YES/NO R
1 or override 2 is active
regardless of the control source.
BV14 FAULT RESET This Object resets a faulted RESET/ NO C
bypass. This requires bypass
parameter 1607 value = COMM
for BACnet to control.
BV15 START This Object commands the ENABLE/ C
INTERLOCK 1 system Start Interlock 1. This DISABLE
requires bypass parameter 1603
value = COMM for BACnet to
control.
BV16 START This Object commands the ENABLE/ C
INTERLOCK 2 system Start Interlock 2. This DISABLE
requires bypass parameter 1604
value = COMM for BACnet to
control.
BV17 START This Object commands the ENABLE/ C
INTERLOCK 3 system Start Interlock 3. This DISABLE
requires bypass parameter 1605
value = COMM for BACnet to
control.
BV18 START This Object commands the ENABLE/ C
INTERLOCK 4 system Start Interlock 4. This DISABLE
requires bypass parameter 1606
value = COMM for BACnet to
control.
BV19 PAR LOCK When switched to locked LOCK / W
prevents parameter changes UNLOCK
from the panel.
BV20 CTL OVERRIDE Commands the bypass into ON / OFF C
CMD BACnet Control Override. In this
mode, BACnet takes the bypass
control from the normal source.
However, the panel’s HAND
mode still has priority.
BV21 MBOX READ This object reads a parameter READ / W
(defined by AV13 MBOX RESET
PARAM) and returns it in AV14
MBOX DATA

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 137

Instance Active/ Present Value

Object Name Description
ID Inactive Text Access Type
BV22 MBOX WRITE This object writes the data value WRITE / W
specified by AV14, MBOX DATA, RESET
to a parameter (defined by AV13,
MBOX PARAM).

Note: For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays and relinquish
defaults.

BACnet analog value object instance summary – Bypass

The following table summarizes the Analog Value Objects supported:
Instance Present Value
Object Name Description Units
ID Access Type
AV0 CURRENT This Object indicates the measured Amps R
output current. The corresponding
bypass parameter is 0101.
AV1 BYPASS MODE This Object indicates the Hand/Off/Auto None R
status of the bypass. 0=OFF; 1=HAND;
2=AUTO.
AV2 BYP RUN DLY This Object sets the bypass Run delay. Secs W
The corresponding bypass parameter is
1614
AV3 LAST FLT This Object indicates the last fault None R
recorded by the bypass. The
corresponding bypass parameter is 0401
AV4 WARNING This Object indicates the first warning None R
WORD 1 status word of the bypass. The
corresponding bypass parameter is 0308
AV5 WARNING This Object indicates the first warning None R
WORD 2 status word of the bypass. The
corresponding bypass parameter is 0309
AV6 INPUT VOLT Average of line-line input voltage Volts R
AV7 PCB TEMP DEG C of bypass board DEG C R
AV8 KW HOURS Bypass mode kilowatt hours kWh W
AV9 RUN TIME Bypass mode run hours Hrs W
AV10 A-B VOLT Phase A - Phase B voltage Volts R
AV11 B-C VOLT Phase B - Phase C voltage Volts R
AV12 C-B VOLT Phase C - Phase A voltage Volts R
AV13 MBOX PARAM This object defines the parameter to be None W
read or written to by the mailbox function.
See BV21 and BV22.
AV14 MBOX DATA This object holds the mailbox function’s None W
parameter value - a value that was read,
or is to be written. See BV21 and BV22.

Embedded fieldbus
138 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Modbus protocol technical data – Drive only

System overview
The Modbus® protocol was introduced by Modicon, Inc. for use in control
environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers. Due to its ease of use
and implementation, this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de-facto
standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices.
Modbus is a serial, asynchronous protocol. Transactions are half-duplex, featuring a
single Master controlling one or more Slaves. While RS232 can be used for point-to-
point communication between a single Master and a single Slave, a more common
implementation features a multi-drop EIA 485 network with a single Master
controlling multiple Slaves. The ABB E-Clipse bypass features EIA 485 for its
Modbus physical interface.
RTU
The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes: ASCII and RTU.
The ABB E-Clipse Bypass supports RTU only.
Feature summary
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the system.
Function Code (Hex) Description
Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status. For the system, the individual bits of
the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).
Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status. For the system, the individual bits of
Status the status word are mapped to Inputs 1…16 or 1…32, depending
on the active profile. Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially
beginning with Input 33 (e.g. DI1=Input 33).
Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers. For the system, the entire
Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers. For the system, the 2 analog input
Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 and 2.
Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output. For the system, the individual bits
of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).
Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register. For the system, the entire
Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics. Subcodes for Query (0x00),
Restart (0x01) and Listen Only (0x04) are supported.
Force Multiple Coils 0x0F Write multiple discrete outputs. For the system, the individual bits
of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).
Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers. For the system, the entire
Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
Read/Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single
Holding Registers command.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 139

Mapping summary
The following table summarizes the mapping between the system (parameters
and I/0) and Modbus reference space. For details, see Modbus addressing below.
ACH580 Modbus Reference Supported Function Codes
• Control Bits Coils(0xxxx) • 01 – Read Coil Status
• Relay Outputs • 05 – Force Single Coil
• 15 – Force Multiple Coils
• Status Bits Discrete Inputs(1xxxx) • 02 – Read Input Status
• Discrete Inputs
• Analog Inputs Input Registers(3xxxxx) • 04 – Read Input Registers
• Parameters Holding Registers(4xxxx) • 03 – Read 4X Registers
• Control/Status Words • 06 – Preset Single 4X Register
• References • 16 – Preset Multiple 4X Registers
• 23 – Read/Write 4X Registers

Communication profiles
When communicating by Modbus, the drive supports multiple profiles for control and
status information. Bypass parameter 5825 (EFB CTRL PROFILE) selects the profile
used. If bypass parameter 1625 = (1) SYSTEM then the drive and bypass profile are
fixed ABB BYPASS PROFILE. See section Bypass Overview for ABB BYPASS
PROFILE
• ABB DRV LIM – The primary (and default) profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile,
which standardizes the control interface with ACH580 and ACH550 drive
products. This profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface, and is discussed in
detail in the following sections.
• DCU PROFILE – Another profile is called the DCU PROFILE. It extends the
control and status interface to 32 bits.
• ABB DRV FULL – This profile standardizes the control interface with the ACH580
and ACH550 drive products. This profile is also based on the PROFIBUS
interface, and supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM
profile.

Modbus addressing
With Modbus, each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set.
Thus, the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message.

Note: The drive supports the zero-based addressing of the Modbus specification.
Holding register 400002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message. Similarly,
coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message.

Refer again to the Mapping summary above. The following sections describe, in
detail, the mapping to each Modbus reference set.
0xxxx Mapping – Modbus Coils. The drive maps the following information to the
0xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils:

Embedded fieldbus
140 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

• Bit-wise map of the CONTROL WORD (selected using bypass parameter 5825
EFB CTRL PROFILE). The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose.
• Relay output states, numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033.
The following table summarizes the 0xxxx reference set:
Modbus ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL
Internal Location
Ref. BP Param BP Param BP Param
(All Profiles)
(5825 = 0) (5825 = 1) (5825 = 2)
00001 CONTROL WORD – Bit 0 OFF11 STOP OFF1*
1
00002 CONTROL WORD – Bit 1 OFF2 START OFF2*
00003 CONTROL WORD – Bit 2 OFF31 REVERSE OFF3*
00004 CONTROL WORD – Bit 3 START N/A START
00005 CONTROL WORD – Bit 4 N/A RESET RAMP_OUT_ZERO*
00006 CONTROL WORD – Bit 5 RAMP_HOLD* EXT2 RAMP_HOLD*
00007 CONTROL WORD– Bit 6 RAMP_IN_ZERO* RUN_DISABLE RAMP_IN_ZERO*
00008 CONTROL WORD – Bit 7 RESET STPMODE_R RESET
00009 CONTROL WORD – Bit 8 N/A STPMODE_EM N/A
00010 CONTROL WORD – Bit 9 N/A STPMODE_C N/A
00011 CONTROL WORD – Bit 10 N/A RAMP_2 REMOTE_CMD*
00012 CONTROL WORD – Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP_OUT_0 EXT2
00013 CONTROL WORD – Bit 12 N/A RAMP_HOLD N/A
00014 CONTROL WORD – Bit 13 N/A RAMP_IN_0 N/A
00015 CONTROL WORD – Bit 14 N/A REQ_LOCALLOCK N/A
00016 CONTROL WORD – Bit 15 N/A TORQLIM2 N/A
00017 CONTROL WORD – Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL_CTL Does not apply
00018 CONTROL WORD – Bit 17 FBLOCAL_REF
00019 CONTROL WORD – Bit 18 START_DISABLE1
00020 CONTROL WORD – Bit 19 START_DISABLE2
00021… Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
00032
00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1
00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2
00035 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3
00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4
00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5
00038 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6
1) = Active low

For the 0xxxx registers:

• Status is always readable.
• Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control.
• Additional relay outputs are added sequentially.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 141

The system supports the following Modbus function codes for coils:
Function Code Description
01 Read coil status
05 Force single coil
15 (0x0F Hex) Force multiple coils

1xxxx Mapping – Modbus Discrete Inputs. The drive maps the following
information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs:
• Bit-wise map of the STATUS WORD (selected using bypass parameter 5825 EFB
CTRL PROFILE). The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose.
• Discrete hardware inputs, numbered sequentially beginning with input 33.
The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set:
Modbus ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
Internal Location
Ref. BP Param BP Param
(All Profiles)
(5825 = 0 or 2) (5825 = 1)
10001 STATUS WORD – Bit 0 RDY_ON READY
10002 STATUS WORD – Bit 1 RDY_RUN ENABLED
10003 STATUS WORD – Bit 2 RDY_REF STARTED
10004 STATUS WORD – Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING
10005 STATUS WORD – Bit 4 OFF_2_STA1 ZERO_SPEED
10006 STATUS WORD – Bit 5 OFF_3_STA1 ACCELERATE
10007 STATUS WORD – Bit 6 SWC_ON_INHIB DECELERATE
10008 STATUS WORD – Bit 7 WARNING AT_SETPOINT
10009 STATUS WORD – Bit 8 AT_SETPOINT LIMIT
10010 STATUS WORD – Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION
10011 STATUS WORD – Bit 10 ABOVE_LIMIT REV_REF
10012 STATUS WORD – Bit 11 EXT2 REV_ACT
10013 STATUS WORD – Bit 12 RUN_ENABLE PANEL_LOCAL
10014 STATUS WORD – Bit 13 N/A FIELDBUS_LOCAL
10015 STATUS WORD – Bit 14 N/A EXT2_ACT
10016 STATUS WORD – Bit 15 N/A FAULT
10017 STATUS WORD – Bit 16 Reserved WARNING
10018 STATUS WORD – Bit 17 Reserved REQ_MAINT
10019 STATUS WORD – Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK
10020 STATUS WORD – Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK
10021 STATUS WORD – Bit 20 Reserved CTL_MODE
10022 STATUS WORD – Bit 21 Reserved Reserved
10023 STATUS WORD – Bit 22 Reserved Reserved
10024 STATUS WORD – Bit 23 Reserved Reserved
10025 STATUS WORD – Bit 24 Reserved Reserved
10026 STATUS WORD – Bit 25 Reserved Reserved

Embedded fieldbus
142 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Modbus ABB DRV DCU PROFILE

Internal Location
Ref. BP Param BP Param
(All Profiles)
(5825 = 0 or 2) (5825 = 1)
10027 STATUS WORD – Bit 26 Reserved REQ_CTL
10028 STATUS WORD – Bit 27 Reserved REQ_REF1
10029 STATUS WORD – Bit 28 Reserved REQ_REF2
10030 STATUS WORD – Bit 29 Reserved REQ_REF2EXT
10031 STATUS WORD – Bit 30 Reserved ACK_STARTINH
10032 STATUS WORD – Bit 31 Reserved ACK_OFF_ILCK
10033 DI1 DI1 DI1
10034 DI2 DI2 DI2
10035 DI3 DI3 DI3
10036 DI4 DI4 DI4
10037 DI5 DI5 DI5
10038 DI6 DI6 DI6
1) = Active low

For the 1xxxx registers:

• Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially.
The system supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs:
Function Code Description
02 Read input status

3xxxx Mapping – Modbus Inputs. The drive maps the following information to the
3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers:
• Any user defined analog inputs.
The following table summarizes the input registers:
Internal
Modbus
Location Remarks
Reference
(All Profiles)
30001 AI1 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 (0…100%).
30002 AI2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 (0…100%).

The ACH580 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers:
Function Code Description
04 Read 3xxxx input status

4xxxxx Register Mapping. The drive maps its parameters and other data to the
4xxxxx holding registers as follows:
• 400001…400099 map to drive control and actual values. These registers are
described in the table below.
• 400101…465535 map to drive parameters or bypass parameters. Register
addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid. If there is an

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 143

attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses, the Modbus interface
returns an exception code to the controller.
• Register addressing is done as follows:
– For drive parameters use: 400000 + 256 * parameter group + parameter index.
For example: parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 400000 + 256 *
22 + 80 = 405712.
– For bypass parameters use: 400000 + 256 * (parameter group + 128) +
parameter index.
For example: bypass parameter 01.11 would be mapped to register 400000 +
256 * (1 + 128) + 11 = 433035.
The following table summarizes the 4xxxxx drive control registers 400001…400099
(for 4xxxxx registers above 400099, see the drive parameter list, e.g. 400258 is
parameter 0102):
Modbus Register Access Remarks
400001 ABB DRIVES R/W Maps directly to the profile’s Control Word. Supported
PROFILE CONTROL only if bypass parameter 5825 = 0 or 2 (ABB drive
WORD profile). Bypass parameter 5318 holds a copy in hex
format.
400002 Reference 1 R/W Range = 0...+20000 (scaled to +maximum reference),
or -20000...0 (scaled to -maximum reference). Where:
maximum reference is drive parameter 46.01, Speed
scaling if control mode is vector or parameter 46.02,
Frequency scaling if control mode is scalar.
400003 Reference 2 R/W Range = 0...+10000 (scaled to +maximum reference),
or -10000...0 (scaled to -maximum reference). Where:
maximum reference is drive parameter 46.01, Speed
scaling if control mode is vector or parameter 46.02,
Frequency scaling if control mode is scalar.
400004 ABB DRIVES R Maps directly to the profile‘S STATUS WORD.
PROFILE STATUS Supported only if bypass parameter 5825 = 0 or 2 (ABB
WORD bypass profile). Bypass parameter 5819 holds a copy in
hex format.
4000051 Actual 1. R By default, stores a copy of speed or frequency. Use
(select using drive drive parameter 58.28 to select a different value.
parameter 58.28,
EFB act1 type)
4000062 Actual 2. R By default, stores nothing. Use drive parameter 58.29
(select using drive to select a value.
parameter 58.29,
EFB act2 type)
400007 Actual 3. R By default, stores nothing. Use bypass parameter 5312
(select using bypass to select an actual value for this register.
parameter 58107)
400008 Actual 4. R By default, stores nothing. Use bypass parameter 5313
(select using bypass to select an actual value for this register.
parameter 58108)
400009 Actual 5. R By default, stores nothing. Use bypass parameter 5314
(select using bypass to select an actual value for this register.
parameter 58109)
400010 Actual 6. R By default, stores nothing. Use bypass parameter 5315
(select using bypass to select an actual value for this register.
parameter 58110)

Embedded fieldbus
144 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Modbus Register Access Remarks

400011 Actual 7. R By default, stores nothing. Use bypass parameter 5316
(select using bypass to select an actual value for this register.
parameter 58111)
400012 Actual 8. R By default, stores nothing. Use bypass parameter 5317
(select using bypass to select an actual value for this register.
parameter 58112)
400031 DCU CONTROL R/W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
WORD LSW profile’s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if BP Param
5825 = 1. See bypass parameter 0301.
400032 DCU CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
WORD MSW profile’s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if BP Param
5825 = 1. See bypass parameter 0302.
400033 DCU STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
WORD LSW profile’s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if BP Param
5825 = 1. See bypass parameter 0303.
400034 DCU STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
WORD MSW profile’s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if BP Param
5825 = 1. See bypass parameter 0304.
400045 ACH580 REF1 LSW R/W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
profile’s REF1. Supported only if BP Parameter
5825 = 1. See drive parameter 03.09, EFB reference 1.
400046 ACH580 REF1 MSW R/W Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
profile’s REF1. Supported only if BP Parameter
5825 = 1. See drive parameter 03.09, EFB reference 1.
400047 ACH580 REF2 LSW R/W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
profile’s REF2. Supported only if BP Parameter
5825 = 1. See drive parameter 03.10, EFB reference 2.
400048 ACH580 REF2 MSW R/W Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
profile’s REF2. Supported only if BP Parameter
5825 = 1. See drive parameter 03.10, EFB reference 2.
1) These Modbus Register numbers are selected using drive parameters 58.28 and 58.29.
2) These Modbus Register numbers are selected using drive parameters 58.28 and 58.29.

For the Modbus protocol, drive parameters in group 58 report the parameter
mapping to 4xxxxx Registers.
BP Param Description
58107 DV IO 7
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 400007.
58108 DV IO 8
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 400008.
58109 DV IO 9
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 400009.
58110 DV IO 10
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 400010.
58111 DV IO 11
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 400011.
58112 DV IO 12
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 400012.
5318 Reserved.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 145

Except where restricted by the system, all parameters are available for both reading
and writing. The parameter writes are verified for the correct value, and for a valid
register addresses.

Note: Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i.e. modified
values are not automatically stored to permanent memory. Use bypass parameter
1615 PARAM. SAVE to save all altered values.

The system supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxxx registers:
Function Code Description
03 Read holding 4xxxxx registers
06 Preset single 4xxxxx register
16 (0x10 Hex) Preset multiple 4xxxxx registers
23 (0x17 Hex) Read/write 4xxxxx registers

Actual values
The contents of the register addresses 400005…400012 are ACTUAL VALUES and
are:
• 400005 and 400006 are specified using drive parameters 58.28…58.29
• 400007…400012 are specified using bypass parameters 58107…58112.
• Read-only values containing information on the operation of the drive.
• 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer.
• When negative values, written as the two’s complement of the corresponding
positive value.
• Scaled as described earlier in Actual value scaling.
Exception codes
Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive. The drive
supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below.
Exception
Name Meaning
Code
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command
02 ILLEGAL DATA The data address received in the query is not allowable. It is not
ADDRESS a defined parameter/group.
03 ILLEGAL DATA A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable
VALUE value for the ACH580, because it is one of the following:
• Outside minimum or maximum. limits.
• Parameter is read-only.
• Message is too long.
• Parameter write not allowed when start is active.
• Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected.

Embedded fieldbus
146 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

ABB control profiles technical data – Drive

Overview
ABB drives profile
The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used with embedded
Modbus. Two implementations of the ABB drives profile are available:
• ABB DRV LIM – The primary (and default) profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile,
which standardizes the control interface with ACH580 and ACH550 drive
products.
• ABB DRV FULL – This profile standardizes the control interface with the ACH580
and ACH550 drive products.
Except as noted, the following ABB drives profile descriptions apply to both
implementations.
DCU profile
The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits.
Control Word
The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the bypass from a
fieldbus system. The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the
system. The drive switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in
the CONTROL WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD (ABB drives profile version)
requires that:
• The drive is in remote (REM) control.
• The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control
profile. For example, to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL, requires both
bypass parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 1 (STD MODBUS), and bypass
parameter 5825 EFB CTRL PROFILE = 2 (ABB DRV FULL).
ABB drives profile
The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the
CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives Profile.
ABB Drives Profile (EFB) CONTROL WORD
Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
State
0 OFF1 1 READY TO Enter READY TO OPERATE
CONTROL OPERATE
0 EMERGENCY Drive ramps to stop according to currently
OFF active deceleration ramp (22.13 or 22.15 if
control mode is vector. 28.73 or 28.75 if
control mode is scalar)
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF1 ACTIVE
• Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON,
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3)
are active.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 147

ABB Drives Profile (EFB) CONTROL WORD

Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
State
1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY Drive coasts to stop.
OFF Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF2 ACTIVE
• Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED
2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF3 inactive)
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY Drive stops within in time specified by
STOP drive parameter 23.23.
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF3 ACTIVE
• Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED
WARNING! Be sure motor and bypass
equipment can be stopped using this
mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the
OPERATION ENABLED Run Permissive signal must be active.
See bypass parameter 1601. If 1601 is set
to COMM, this bit also actives the Run
Permissive signal.)
0 OPERATION Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION
INHIBITED INHIBITED
4 Unused (ABB DRV LIM)
RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ZERO OPERATION ACCELERATION ENABLED
(ABB DRV
FULL) 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to
Zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC
voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT Enable ramp function.
ENABLED Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ACCELERATOR ENABLED
0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator
output held)
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT Normal operation. Enter OPERATING
ZERO ENABLED
0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to
zero.
7 RESET 0=>1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists (Enter
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED). Effective if
bypass parameter 1604 = COMM.
0 OPERATING Continue normal operation
8…9 Unused

Embedded fieldbus
148 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

ABB Drives Profile (EFB) CONTROL WORD

Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
State
10 Unused (ABB DRV LIM)
REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
(ABB DRV
FULL) 0 • CW =/ 0 or Ref =/ 0: Retain last CW and
Ref.
• CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
• Ref and deceleration/acceleration ramp
are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 (EXT2).
Effective if drive parameter 19.11 = EFB
MCW bit 11.
0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 (EXT1).
Effective if drive parameter 19.11 = EFB
MCW bit 11.
12…15 Unused

DCU profile
The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile.
DCU Profile CONTROL WORD
Bit Name Value Command/Req. Comments
0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop
mode parameter or the stop mode
0 (no op) requests (bits 7 and 8).
1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START
commands result in a stop command.
0 (no op)
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction Setting this bit forces the reference to
be negative regardless of the sign of
0 Forward direction the reference sent over fieldbus. If the
bit is cleared, the direction is set
according to the ABB Drives Profile
reference table on page 180.
3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit, it steals
control and the bypass moves to
0 External mode fieldbus local control mode.
4 RESET -> 1 Reset Edge sensitive.
other (no op)
5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2
0 Switch to EXT1
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run permissive.
0 Run permissive on
7 STPMODE_R 1 Normal ramp stop
mode
0 (no op)

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 149

DCU Profile CONTROL WORD

Bit Name Value Command/Req. Comments
8 STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency ramp
stop mode
0 (no op)
9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast stop mode
0 (no op)
10 RAMP_2 1 Ramp pair 2
0 Ramp pair 1
11 RAMP_OUT_0 1 Ramp output to 0
0 (no op)
12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Ramp freeze
0 (no op)
13 RAMP_IN_0 1 Ramp input to 0
0 (no op)
14 RREQ_LOCALLOC 1 Local mode lock In lock, drive will not switch to local
mode.
0 (no op)
15 TORQLIM2 1 Torque limit pair 2
0 Torque limit pair 1
16 FBLOCAL_CTL 1 FB Local mode for Field bus sets these bits-> drive moves
control word to field bus local control mode of
requested. control word or reference (field bus
steals the control)
0 FB Local mode for
control word
requested.
17 FBLOCAL_REF 1 FB Local mode for
control word
requested.
0 FB Local mode for
control word
requested.
18 START_DISABLE1 1 Start disabled 1 Inverted Start Interlock x2. When Start
Interlock is missing, the drive doesn’t
0 Start enabled 1 on set STARTED status bit.
19 START_DISABLE2 1 Start disabled 2
0 Start enabled 2 on

DCU Profile CONTROL WORD

Bit Name Value Function Comments
16…26 Reserved
27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed ref. These bits are only for supervision
purposes.
0 (no op)
28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed ref.
0 (no op)

Embedded fieldbus
150 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

DCU Profile CONTROL WORD

Bit Name Value Function Comments
29 LINK_ON 1 Master is detected
in link
0 Link is down
30 REQ_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit request
is pending
0 Start inhibit request
is OFF

Status Word
The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the
master station.
ABB drives profile
The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the status
word content for the ABB Drives Profile.
ABB Drives Profile (EFB) STATUS WORD
Description
Bit Name Value
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED
0 OPERATION INHIBITED
3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT
0 No fault
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 INACTIVE
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 INACTIVE
0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE
0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE
7 WARNING 1 Warning/warning (See Warning listing in the Diagnostics
section for details on warnings.)
0 No warning/warning
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance limits)
the reference value.
0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to
reference value).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 151

ABB Drives Profile (EFB) STATUS WORD

Description
Bit Name Value
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter’s value > supervision high limit.
Bit remains “1” until supervised parameter’s value <
supervision low limit.
See group 32, Supervision
0 Supervised parameter’s value < supervision low limit.
Bit remains “0” until supervised parameter’s value >
supervision high limit.
See group 32, Supervision
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 (EXT2) selected
0 External control location 1 (EXT1) selected
12 EXT RUN 1 External Run Permissive signal received
PERMISSIVE
0 No External Run Permissive signal received
13… 15 Unused

DCU profile
The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile.
DCU Profile STATUS WORD
Bit Name Value Status
0 READY 1 System is ready to receive start command.
0 System is not ready.
1 ENABLED 1 External run permissive signal received.
0 No external run permissive signal received.
2 STARTED 1 System has received start command.
0 System has not received start command.
3 RUNNING 1 System is modulating.
0 System is not modulating.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 System is at zero speed.
0 System has not reached zero speed.
5 ACCELERATE 1 System is accelerating.
0 System is not accelerating.
6 DECELERATE 1 System is decelerating.
0 System is not decelerating.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 System is at setpoint.
0 System has not reached setpoint.
8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 30 settings.
0 Operation is within Group 30 settings.
9 SUPERVISION 1 Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is above a
limit. Limit is set with drive parameters 46.31…46.
0 Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is within limits.

Embedded fieldbus
152 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

DCU Profile STATUS WORD

Bit Name Value Status
10 REV_REF 1 Reference is in reverse direction.
0 Reference is in forward direction.
11 REV_ACT 1 System is running in reverse direction.
0 System is running in forward direction.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel (or PC tool) local mode.
0 Control is not in control panel local mode.
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode (steals control panel local).
0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode.
0 Control is in EXT1 mode.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state.
0 Drive is not in a fault state.

DCU Profile STATUS WORD

Bit Name Value Status
16 WARNING 1 An warning is on.
0 No warnings are on.
17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending.
0 No maintenance request is pending.
18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked out.)
0 Direction lock is OFF.
19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked out.)
0 Local mode lock is OFF.
20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode.
0 Drive is in scalar control mode.
21…25 Reserved
26 REQ_CTL 1 Copy the control word
0 (no op)
27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel.
0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel.
28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel.
0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel.
29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel.
0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel.
30 ACK_STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted.
0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted.
31 ACK_OFF_ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button
0 Normal operation

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 153

State Diagram
ABB drives profile
To illustrate the operation of the state diagram, the following example (ABB DRV LIM
implementation of the ABB Drives profile) uses the control word to start the system:
• First, the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met.
• When the power is first connected, the state of the bypass is not ready to switch
on. See dotted lined path ( ) in the state diagram below.
• Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the
OPERATING state is reached, meaning that the bypass is running and follows the
given reference. See table below.
Step CONTROL WORD Value Description
1 CW = 0000 0000 0000 0110 This CW value changes the bypass state to READY TO
SWITCH ON.
bit 15 bit 0
2 Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding.
3 CW = 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the bypass state to READY TO
OPERATE.
4 CW = 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the bypass state to OPERATION
ENABLED. The drive starts, but will not accelerate.
5 CW = 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator (RFG)
output, and changes the drive state to RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED.
6 CW = 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator (RFG)
output, and changes the bypass state to OPERATING. The
bypass accelerates to the given reference and follows the
reference.

Embedded fieldbus
154 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CW)
and STATUS WORD (SW) bits for the ABB Drives profile.

From any state From any state From any state

Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)

OFF3 OFF2
(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit4=0) FAULT (SW Bit3=1)
ACTIVE ACTIVE

f=0 / l=0 (CW Bit7=1)*

From any state

SWITCH-ON
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0) MAINS OFF (SW Bit6=1)
INHIBITED

f=0 / l=0 Power ON (CW Bit0=0)

A C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON

(CW Bit3=0) (CW xxxx xxxx xxxx x110)

OPERATION READY TO
(SW Bit2=0) (SW Bit0=1)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON

(CW xxxx xxxx xxxx x111)

C D READY TO
(SW Bit1=1)
OPERATE

(CW Bit5=0) (CW Bit3=1 and

SW Bit12=1)

OPERATION
D ENABLED (SW Bit2=1)

A
(CW Bit6=0) (CW Bit5=1)

KEY
RFG: ACCELERATOR
State
ENABLED
CW = CONTROL WORD
SW = STATUS WORD C
Path described in example (CW Bit6=1)
l = Param. 0104 CURRENT
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
D
*This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source (e.g. digital input).

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 155

Modbus protocol technical data - system mode

Bypass overview
The new mode that is available on the E-Clipse bypass is selected by setting bypass
parameter 1625 to SYSTEM. With this configuration the drive node is still present
but network commands to start the drive are ignored. Instead, the user should send
start commands to the bypass node. In this mode, a start command will start the
bypass if in bypass mode or start the drive if in drive mode.
In system mode, the profile that controls system logic is always the ABB BYPASS
PROFILE which is sent to the bypass device. The setting of bypass parameter 5825,
PROFILE is only used for reference related control (e.g. ramp control bits) and for
the drive status word. These bits are used when writing to or reading the drive
device.
The following table defines the ABB bypass profile control word. Note that this word
is written to the bypass.
ABB Bypass Profile CONTROL WORD
Bit Name Value Description Comments
0 START 1 Start
0 Stop
1 RESET 0->1 Reset command Fault reset. Edge sensitive.
Other (no op)
2 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disabled Inverted Run Permissive. The
STARTED status bit may be set even
0 Run Permissive on when Run Permissive is missing.
3 FBLOCAL_CTL 1 FB Local mode for Field bus sets these bits to move the
control word bypass to field bus local control mode
requested of control word (field bus steals the
control).
0 FB Local mode for
control word not
requested
4 START_DISABLE1 1 Start disabled 1 Inverted Start Interlocks. When Start
Interlock is missing, the drive doesn’t
0 Start Interlock 1 on set STARTED status bit.
5 START_DISABLE2 1 Start disabled 2
0 Start Interlock 2 on
6 START_DISABLE3 1 Start disabled 3
0 Start Interlock 3 on
7 START_DISABLE4 1 Start disabled 4
0 Start Interlock 4 on
8 OVERRIDE 1 Override selected This selects override 2 which is
controlled by Group 17.
0 Override not
selected
9 LINK_ON 1 Master is detected This is not settable from the field bus
in link but reflects the internal state of the link.
0 Link is down

Embedded fieldbus
156 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

ABB Bypass Profile CONTROL WORD

Bit Name Value Description Comments
10...15 Reserved

The drive control words when bypass parameter 1625 = (1) SYSTEM are
summarized in the following table. Note that these are written to the drive.
DRIVE CONTROL WORD
Bit ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL
0 N/A N/A N/A
1 N/A N/A N/A
2 N/A REVERSE N/A
3 N/A N/A N/A
4 N/A RESET RAMP_OUT_ZERO
5 RAMP_HOLD EXT2 RAMP_HOLD
6 RAMP_IN_ZERO N/A RAMP_IN_ZERO
7 RESET STP_MODE_R RESET
8 N/A STP_MODE_EM N/A
9 N/A STP_MODE_C N/A
10 N/A RAMP_2 REMOTE_CMD (ref only)
11 EXT2 RAMP_OUT_0 EXT2
12 N/A RAMP_HOLD N/A
13 N/A RAMP_IN_0 N/A
14 N/A REQ_LOCALLOCK N/A
15 N/A TORQLIM2 N/A
16 N/A N/A N/A
17 N/A FBLOCAL_REF N/A
18 N/A N/A N/A
19 N/A N/A N/A
20-31 N/A Reserved N/A

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 157

The bypass status word is defined in table below. The drive status word depends on
the profile selected and does not change when bypass parameter 1625 = DRIVE
ONLY or SYSTEM modes (see drive manual).
BYPASS STATUS WORD
Bit NAME Value Description Comments
0 READY 1 Bypass is ready to receive
start command
0 Bypass is not ready
1 ENABLED 1 External Run Permissive and
Start Interlock signals
received
0 External Run Permissive or
Start Interlock signals missing
2 STARTED 1 Bypass has received start
command
0 Bypass has not received start
command
3 RUNNING 1 Motor is running
0 Motor is not modulating
4 FIELDBUS_LOCAL 1 Bypass is in fieldbus local Field bus is controlling all
mode inputs that can have COMM
setting.
0 Bypass is not in fieldbus local
mode
5 FAULT 1 Bypass is in fault state
0 No faults
6 WARNING 1 Warning is on
0 No warnings
7 Reserved
8 REQ_CTL 1 Control word requested in this This bit set indicates that
channel the bypass is expecting at
least one control bit from
the serial channel.
0 Control word not requested
9 OVERRIDE 1 In override Override 1 or override 2 is
active
0 Not in override
10 POWERED_UP 1 Powered up Input voltage has passed
minimum level beyond
which normal bypass
operation can proceed
including writing of
parameters from the field
bus.
11 MODE 1 Bypass mode
0 Drive mode
12 PANEL LOCAL 1 Bypass in local (Hand or Off)
0 Bypass in Auto
13...15 Reserved

Embedded fieldbus
158 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

MODBUS addressing – Bypass

0xxxx Registers
MODBUS addressing of 0xxxx registers maps the Bypass Control Word shown in
the following table to the first 16 coils when using the bypass device ID. The coil
number is the bit number plus 1. In other words, bits 0-31 are mapped to 1-32.
Relay output control is possible on the bypass by using coils 33-37 and the bypass
device ID. Relay control on the drive is described in the 0xxxx mapping subsection of
the Modbus addressing section for the drive device ID on page 139.
These registers are summarized in the following tables. Reminder: stop and enable
related bits are valid at only one device subject to the status of bypass
parameter 1625, COMM CTRL.
MODBUS Registers (0xxxx)
Bypass Device ID
MODBUS Ref. Bit
BCU PROFILE
00001 0 START
00002 1 RESET
00003 2 RUN_DISABLE
00004 3 FBLOCAL_CTL
00005 4 START_DISABLE1
00006 5 START_DISABLE2
00007 6 START_DISABLE3
00008 7 START_DISABLE4
00009 8 OVERRIDE
00010 9 LINK_ON
00011 10 N/A
00012 11 N/A
00013 12 N/A
00014 13 N/A
00015 14 N/A
00016 15 N/A
00017 16 N/A
00018 17 N/A
00019 18 N/A
00020 19 N/A
00021...00032 20-31 N/A
00033 Bypass Relay Output 1
00034 Bypass Relay Output 2
00035 Bypass Relay Output 3
00036 Bypass Relay Output 4
00037 Bypass Relay Output 5
00038 N/A

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 159

1xxxx Registers – Bypass

MODBUS addressing of 1xxxx registers maps the Bypass Status Word shown in the
following table to the first 16 coils when using the bypass device ID. The coil number
is the bit number plus 1. In other words, bits 0-31 are mapped to 1-32.
Bypass digital input status can be read using registers 33-37 and the bypass device
ID. Digital input status of the drive is described in the 1xxxx mapping subsection of
the Modbus addressing section for the drive device ID on page 139.
These registers are summarized in the following table.
1.1.1 MODBUS Registers (1xxxx)
Bypass Device ID
MODBUS Ref. Bit
BCU PROFILE
10001 0 READY
10002 1 ENABLED
10003 2 STARTED
10004 3 RUNNING
10005 4 FIELDBUS_LOCAL
10006 5 FAULT
10007 6 WARNING
10008 7 Reserved
10009 8 REQ_CTL
10010 9 OVERRIDE
10011 10 POWERED_UP
10012 11 N/A
10013 12 N/A
10014 13 N/A
10015 14 N/A
10016 15 N/A
10017 16 N/A
10018 17 N/A
10019 18 N/A
10020 19 N/A
10021 20
10022 21
10023 22
10024 23
10025 24
10026 25
10027 26
10028 27
10029 28

Embedded fieldbus
160 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

1.1.1 MODBUS Registers (1xxxx)

Bypass Device ID
MODBUS Ref. Bit
BCU PROFILE
10030 29
10031 30
10032 31
10033 Bypass DI1
10034 Bypass DI2
10035 Bypass DI3
10036 Bypass DI4
10037 Bypass DI5
10038 Bypass DI6

4xxxxx Registers – Bypass

MODBUS addressing of 4xxxxx registers maps the drive’s parameters and other
values when using the drive device ID. The bypass’s parameters and other values
are mapped when using the bypass device ID.
Registers 400001 … 400099 - Bypass
The bypass maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxxx holding registers as
follows:
400001...400099 map to bypass control and actual values. These registers are
descibed in the table below.
400267...465535 map to bypass parameters 0101...255255. Register addresses
that do not correspond to bypass parameters are invalid. If there is an attempt to
read or write outside the parameters addresses, the Modbus interface returns an
exception code to the controller.
Register addressing is done as follows: Use 400000 + 256 * (parameter group) +
parameter index.
For example: bypass parameter 0111 would be mapped to 400000 + 256 *
1 = 400267.

The following table summarizes the 4xxxxx bypass control registers

400001...400099:
MODBUS Registers (40001 to 40099)
Internal location
MODBUS Ref. Bypass Device ID
(All profiles)
400001 Control Word Maps directly to BCU profile
control word.
400004 Status Word Maps directly to BCU profile
status word.

Note: All parameters referenced are bypass parameters.

Embedded fieldbus
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 161

Fieldbus adapter

Overview
The ACH580 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard
communication protocols. When using fieldbus communication, the ACH580 can
either:
• Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or
• Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available
control locations, such as digital or analog inputs, and the control panel.
Fieldbus Controller
Fieldbus

Other Devices

Connect using either:

• Standard embedded fieldbus (EFB) at
terminals X2:26…30
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) module
mounted in slot 2 (option Fxxx)

Two basic fieldbus communications configurations are available:

• Embedded fieldbus (EFB) – See Embedded fieldbus on page 75.
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) – With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive’s
expansion slot 2, the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the
following protocols:
– Profibus-DP®
– LonWorks®
– DeviceNet®
– Ethernet/IP
– Modbus TCP/IP
The E-Clipse Bypass detects automatically which communication protocol is used by
the plug-in fieldbus adapter. The default settings for each protocol assume that the
profile used is the protocol’s industry-standard drive profile (e.g. PROFIdrive for
PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet). All of the FBA protocols can also be
configured for the ABB Drives profile.
Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used.These details are
provided in a user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.
Details for the ABB Drives profile (which apply for all protocols) are provided in ABB
drives profile technical data on page 175.

Fieldbus adapter
162 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Control interface
In general, the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive
consists of:
• Output Words:
– CONTROL WORD
– REFERENCE (speed or frequency)
• Input Words:
– STATUS WORD
– Actual Value (speed or frequency)

Note: The words “output” and “input” are used as seen from the fieldbus controller
point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller
to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.

The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACH580.
However, the profile used may set particular meanings.
Fieldbus Controller
Fieldbus

Control Word (CW)

References
Process I/O
(cyclic) Status Word (SW)
Actual Values

Service
Messages Parameter R/W Requests/Responses
(Acyclic)

Control Word
The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL
WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD requires that:
• The drive is in AUTO (AUTO) control.
• The communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands
from EXT1 or EXT2. Set E-Clipse Parameter 1601= COMM[2].
• The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is activated when:
– Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 4 (EXT FBA) in E-Clipse Bypass Control
Board.
– The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile
mode or drive profile objects.

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 163

The content of the control word depends on the protocol/profile used. See the user’s
manual provided with the FBA module and/or the ABB drives profile technical data.

Status Word
The STATUS WORD is a 16-bit word containing status information, sent by the drive
to the fieldbus controller. The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the
protocol/profile used. See the user’s manual provided with the FBA module and/or
the ABB drives profile technical data section.

Reference
The contents of each REFERENCE word:
• Is a 16-bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15-bit integer.
• Negative references (indicating reversed rotation direction) are indicated by the
two’s complement of the corresponding positive reference value.
The use of a second reference (REF2) is supported only when a protocol is
configured for the ABB Drives profile.
Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific. See the user’s manual provided with the
FBA module and/or the following sections as appropriate:
• ABB drives profile technical data
• Generic profile technical data
Actual Values
Actual Values are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the
drive. Drive Actual Values (for example, group 01 parameters) can be mapped to
Input Words using group 51 parameters (protocol-dependent, but typically
parameters 5104…5126).

Planning
Network planning should address the following questions:
• What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?
• What control information must be sent down to the drives?
• What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling
system?

Fieldbus adapter
164 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Mechanical and electrical installation – FBA

WARNING! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from
the power source.

Overview
The FBA (fieldbus adapter) is a plug-in module that fits in the bypass expansion
slot 2. The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and one screw. The
screws also ground the shield for the module cable, and connect the module GND
signals to the drive control board.
On installation of the module, electrical connection to the bypass is automatically
established through the 34-pin connector.

Mounting procedure

Note: Install the input power and motor cables first.

1. Insert the module carefully into the bypass expansion slot

until the retaining clips lock the module into position.
2. Fasten the screw (included) to the stand-off. 1

Note: Correct installation of the screw is essential for

fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of
the module.

3. Open the appropriate knockout for the conduit and route 2 5

the network cable into the enclosure.
4. Route the network cable using the appropriate cable tie points.
5. Connect the network cable to the module’s network connector.
6. For configuration information see the following:
• Communication setup – FBA below.
• Activate bypass control functions – FBA on page 170.
• The protocol specific documentation provided with the module.

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 165

Communication setup – FBA

Protocol selection
To activate the fieldbus adapter communication, use parameter 9802 COMM
PROTOCOL SEL. Set bypass parameter 9802 = 4 (EXT FBA).

Protocol configuration
Setting 9802, together with mounting a particular FBA module, automatically sets the
appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process.
These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user’s manual supplied with
the FBA module.
• Parameter 5101 is automatically configured.
• Parameters 5102…5126 are protocol-dependent and define, for example, the
profile used, and additional I/O words. These parameters are referred to as the
fieldbus configuration parameters. See the user’s manual provided with the FBA
module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters.
• Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102…5126. If
parameter 5127 is not used, changes to parameters 5102…5126 take affect only
after the drive power is cycled.
• Parameters 5128…5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed
(e.g. component versions and status).
• Parameters 5201…5210 provide parameter mapping data from E-Clipse Bypass
to field controller.
• Parameters 5301…5310 provide parameter mapping data from fieldbus controller
to E-Clipse Bypass.
• To map ACH580 parameters in groups 52 or 53 program parameters 5201…5210
or 5301…5310 with the actual ACH580 parameter value in hexadecimal. For
example: to read ACH580 parameter 2897 (Frequency ref unlimited) convert
group 28 to hexadecimal and parameter 97 to hexadecimal and combine as
follows:
28 = 1ch
97 = 61h
parameter 52.01 is set to:
1c61h
• To map E-Clipse Bypass parameters in groups 52 or 53 program parameters
5201…5210 or 5301…5310 add 8000h to the calculation:
Bypass parameter 0106 (KW HOURS):
01 = 01h
06 = 06h
parameter 5201 is set to:
0106h + 8000h = 8106h
The Parameters section lists the group 51 parameters.

Fieldbus adapter
166 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Activate drive control functions – FBA

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
• Tell the drive (via the bypass) to accept fieldbus control of the function.
• Define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control.
• Define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. The last column in each table below is deliberately blank. See
the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry.

Start/stop control
Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive only requires:
• Bypass parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Modbus TCP1
Bypass Parameter Value Description
DCU
ABB DRV
PROFILE
1601 START/STOP 2 (COMM) Selects Source for system 400001 bits 40031 bits 0, 1
start command. 0…3
1625 COMM CTRL 0 (DRIVE Enable drive only control. N/A
ONLY)

Input reference select

Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires:
• Drive parameter value set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Scalar Control Vector Control

Value
Ext1/Ext2 Select (Group 28) (Group 22)
19.11 2 FBA MCW bit 11
Ref1 28.11 22.11
Ext1
Ref2 28.12 22.12 Flexibility to write to 3.04
(FB A ref1) or 3.05 (FB A
Ref1 28.15 22.15 ref 2)
Ext2
Ref2 28.16 22.16

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 167

FBA Ref1/Ref2
Modbus TCP
Drive Parameter
ABB DRV DCU Profile
40001 40031
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 Selection
bit11 bit5
3.04 FBA Ref1 40002
3.05 FBA Ref2 40003

Note: Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile.

Reference scaling
Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the Reference scaling in the
following sections, as appropriate:
• ABB drives profile technical data
• Generic profile technical data

Fieldbus adapter
168 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Drive relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate
location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol
dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Drive Parameter Value Description Modbus TCP
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
10.24 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 402659 bit 0 or 00033
RO1 controlled by fieldbus.
Source
10.27 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 402659 bit 1 or 00034
controlled by fieldbus.
10.30 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 402659 bit 2 or 00035
62, RO/DIO controlled by fieldbus.
control
15.071 Relay Output 4 word Relay Output 4 402659 bit 3 or 00036
controlled by fieldbus.
15.101 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 402659 bit 4 or 00037
controlled by fieldbus.
15.231 Digital Output 1 Digital Output 1 402659 bit 8 or 00038
DO1 controlled by fieldbus.
Source
1) More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.

Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.

Protocol Reference
Drive Parameter Value Modbus TCP
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
10.21 RO Status RO 1-3 STATUS Relay 1…3 status. 402581 or 00033...35
15.04 RO/DO Status RO 4-6 STATUS Relay 4…6 status. 403844 or 00036...37

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 169

Analog output control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control (e.g. PID setpoint) requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Modbus TCP
Drive Parameter Value Description
ABB DCU
DRV PROFILE
13.12 AO1 Source 37, AO1 Data Analog Output 1 controlled –
Storage by writing to parameter
13.91.
13.91 AO1 Data Storage – 403419
13.15 AO1 Unit Selection V or mA Voltage or current output –
selection.
13.16 Filter AO1 – Filter time constant for
AO1
13.17 AO1 source min – Used for scaling
…
13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max
13.22 AO2 Source 38, AO2 Data Analog Output 2 controlled –
Storage by writing to parameter
13.92.
13.92 AO2 Data Storage – 403420
13.26 AO2 Filter Time – Filter time constant for –
AO2
13.27 AO2 source min – Used for scaling
… …
13.30 AO2 out at AO2 src max

PID control setpoint source

Using the fieldbus for the PID control setpoint requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied setpoint value in the appropriate location.
Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description
Reference
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 24 (Setpoint data Communication channel setpoint –
source storage) source
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 3 (AI1 scaled) Optional analog input value. –
source Needed if combining
communication reference with
analog input value
40.18 Set 1 setpoint 0 (In1) Setpoint is 40.92 value itself/ –
function 1 (In1+In2) +AI1/*AI1
3 (In1*In2)
40.92 Set point storage – Communication channel setpoint 410332
value
NOTE: For 41.16 – 41.18, PID set 2 can be used. Setpoint data storage still uses 40.92, even when
PID set 2 is used.

Fieldbus adapter
170 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Feedback from the drive – FBA

Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see all parameters listed in
Parameter list and descriptions.
Protocol Reference
Drive Parameter
Modbus TCP
01.01 Motor Speed Used 400257
01.06 Output Frequency 400262
01.07 Motor Current 400263
01.10 Motor Torque 400266
01.14 Output Power 400270
01.11 DC Voltage 400267
01.13 Output Voltage 400269
58.19 FB STATUS WORD – bit 0 (STOP) 414867 bit 0
58.19 FB STATUS WORD – bit 2 (REV) 414867 bit 2
10.02 DI Delayed Status 402562

Scaling
To scale the drive parameter values see the Actual value scaling in the following
sections, as appropriate:
• ABB drives profile technical data
• Generic profile technical data

Activate bypass control functions – FBA

Controlling the bypass

Fieldbus control of various bypass functions requires configuration to:
• Tell the system to accept fieldbus control of the function.
• Define as a fieldbus input, any bypass data required for control.
• Define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive/bypass.
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. The last column in each table below is deliberately blank. See
the User’s Manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry.

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 171

Start/stop direction control

Using the fieldbus for start/stop control of the system requires:
• Bypass parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Bypass Parameter Value Description Modbus TCP1
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1601 START/STOP 2 (COMM) Start/Stop by fieldbus with 400001 bits 40031 bits 0, 1
Ext1 or Ext2 selected. 0…3
1625 COMM CTRL 1 (SYSTEM) Enable system control. N/A
1) For Modbus TCP, the protocol reference can depend on the profile used, hence two columns in
these tables. One column refers to the ABB Drives profile, selected when parameter 51.02 = 0
(ABB Drives-Classic) or 51.02 = 1 (ABB Drives-Enhanced). The other column refers to the DCU
profile selected when parameter 51.02 = 2 (Transparent-16-Bit). See ABB drives profile technical
data section on page 175.

Miscellaneous system control

Note: Control of system commands is dependent upon the setting of bypass

parameter 1625.

Using the fieldbus miscellaneous system control requires:

• Bypass parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol
Bypass Parameter Value Setting Reference
Modbus TCP
1602 RUN PERMISSIVE 2 (COMM) Run permissive by 400001 bit 2
(Not Recommended) fieldbus.
1603 START INTERLOCK 1 2 (COMM) Source for Start 400001 bit 4
(Not Recommended) Interlock 1 is the
fieldbus Command
word.
1604 START INTERLOCK 2 2 (COMM) Source for Start 400001 bit 5
(Not Recommended) Interlock 2 is the
fieldbus Command
word.
1605 START INTERLOCK 3 2 (COMM) 400001 bit 6
(Not Recommended)
1606 START INTERLOCK 4 2 (COMM) 400001 bit 7
(Not Recommended)
1607 START RESET SEL 2 (COMM) Fault reset by fieldbus 400001 bit 1
1625 COMM CTROL 1 (SYSTEM) Enable System Control. N/A

Fieldbus adapter
172 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Bypass relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• Bypass parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate
location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol
dependent.)
Protocol
Bypass Parameter Value Description Reference
Modbus TCP
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 16 Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus. 433031 bit 0
(COMM
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 CTRL) Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus.
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus.
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus. 433031 bit 3
1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus.

Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.

Bypass Parameter Value Protocol Reference

0122 RO 1-3 STATUS Relay 1…3 status. 400278
0123 RO 4-5 STATUS Relay 4…5 status. 400279

Communication fault
When using fieldbus control, specify the bypass action if communication is lost.
Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description
Reference
50.02 FBA A COMM 0 = No action Set for appropriate drive/ –
LOSS FUNC 1 = Fault bypass response. NOTE: If the
system is in bypass mode
2 = Last speed when communication is lost,
3 = Speed ref safe choices 2 and 3 will cause the
4 = Fault always bypass contactor to remain in
its present state.
5 = Warning
50.03 FBA A COMM Set time delay before acting on a communication –
LOSS T OUT loss.

Diagnostics – FBA

Fault Handling
The ACH580 or E-Clipse provides fault information as follows:
• The control panel display shows a fault code and text. See Diagnostics starting on
page 185 for a complete description.
• Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT, 0402 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0403 PREVIOUS
FAULT2 store the most recent faults.

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 173

• For fieldbus access, the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value, assigned
and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification. See table below. Not all
profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification. For profiles that
support this specification, the profile documentation defines the proper fault
request process.
Fieldbus Fault Code
Drive Fault Code
(DRIVECOM specification)
1 OVERCURRENT 2310h
2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h
3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h
4 SHORT CIRC 2340h
5 Reserved FF6Bh
6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h
7 AI1 LOSS 8110h
8 AI2 LOSS 8110h
9 MOT TEMP 4310h
10 PANEL LOSS 5300h
11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h
12 MOTOR STALL 7121h
14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 9000h
15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 9001h
16 EARTH FAULT 2330h
17 UNDERLOAD FF6Ah
18 THERM FAIL 5210h
19 OPEX LINK 7500h
20 OPEX PWR 5414h
21 CURR MEAS 2211h
22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h
23 ENCODER ERR 7301h
24 OVERSPEED 7310h
25 Reserved FF80h
26 DRIVE ID 5400h
27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh
28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h
29 EFB CONFIG FILE 6306h
30 FORCE TRIP FF90h
31 EFB 1 FF92h
32 EFB 2 FF93h
33 EFB 3 FF94h
34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h
35 OUTPUT WIRING FF95h

Fieldbus adapter
174 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Fieldbus Fault Code

Drive Fault Code
(DRIVECOM specification)
36 INCOMP SWTYPE 630Fh
101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h
102 Reserved FF55h
103 SERF MACRO FF55h
104 Reserved FF55h
105 Reserved FF55h
201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h
202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h
203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h
204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h
205 Reserved 5000h
206 OMIO ID ERROR 5000h
207 EFB LOAD ERR 6100h
1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h
1001 PAR PFAREFNG 6320h
1002 Reserved (obsolete) 6320h
1003 PAR AI SCALE 6320h
1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h
1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h
1006 EXT ROMISSING 6320h
1007 PAR FBUSMISSING 6320h
1008 PAR PFAWOSCALAR 6320h
1009 PAR PCU 1 6320h
1010 PAR PFA OVERRIDE 6320h
1011 PAR OVERRIDE PARS 6320h
1012 PAR PFC IO 1 6320h
1013 PAR PFC IO 2 6320h
1014 PAR PFC IO 3 6320h

Communication diagnostics
Besides the drive fault codes, the FBA module has diagnostic tools. Refer to the
user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 175

ABB drives profile technical data

Overview
ABB drives profile
The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple
protocols, available on the FBA modules. This section describes the ABB Drives
profile implemented for FBA modules.
• ABB DRV LIM – The primary (and default) profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile,
which standardizes the control interface with ACH580 and ACH550 drive
products. This profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface, and is discussed in
detail in the following sections.
• ABB DRV FULL – This profile standardizes the control interface with the ACH580
and ACH550 drive products. This profile is also based on the PROFIBUS
interface, and supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM
profile.

Control Word
As described earlier in Control interface the CONTROL WORD is the principal means
for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system.
The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the
CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.

ABB Drives Profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD

Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
State
0 OFF1 1 READY TO Enter READY TO OPERATE
CONTROL OPERATE
0 EMERGENCY Drive ramps to stop according to currently
OFF active deceleration ramp (2203 or 2205)
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF1 ACTIVE
• Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON,
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3)
are active.
1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY Drive coasts to stop.
OFF Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF2 ACTIVE
• Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED

Fieldbus adapter
176 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

ABB Drives Profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD

Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
State
2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF3 inactive)
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY Drive stops within in time specified by
STOP parameter 2208.
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF3 ACTIVE
• Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED
WARNING! Be sure motor and driven
equipment can be stopped using this
mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the
OPERATION ENABLED Run Permissive signal must be active.
See 1601. If 1601 is set to COMM, this bit
also actives the Run Permissive signal.)
0 OPERATION Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION
INHIBITED INHIBITED
4 RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ZERO OPERATION ACCELERATION ENABLED
0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to
Zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC
voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT Enable ramp function.
ENABLED Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ACCELERATOR ENABLED
0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator
output held)
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT Normal operation. Enter OPERATING
ZERO ENABLED
0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to
zero.
7 RESET 0=>1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists (Enter
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED). Effective if
1604 = COMM.
0 OPERATING Continue normal operation
8…9 Unused
10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled
0 • CW =/ 0 or Ref =/ 0: Retain last CW and
Ref.
• CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
• Ref and deceleration/acceleration ramp
are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 (EXT2).
Effective if 1102 = COMM.
0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 (EXT1).
Effective if 1102 = COMM.
12…15 Unused

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 177

Status Word
As described earlier in Control interface, the contents of the STATUS WORD is status
information, sent by the drive to the master station. The following table and the state
diagram later in this sub-section describe the status word content.
ABB Drives Profile (FBA) STATUS WORD
Description
Bit Name Value
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED
0 OPERATION INHIBITED
3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT
0 NO FAULT
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 INACTIVE
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 INACTIVE
0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE
0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE
7 1 Warning/ (See Warning listing in the Diagnostics
section for details on warnings.)
0 No warning/
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance
limits) the reference value.
0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to
reference value).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter’s value > supervision high limit.
Bit remains “1” until supervised parameter’s value <
supervision low limit.
See group 32, Supervision
0 Supervised parameter’s value < supervision low limit.
Bit remains “0” until supervised parameter’s value >
supervision high limit.
See group 32, Supervision
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 (EXT2) selected
0 External control location 1 (EXT1) selected
12 EXT RUN PERMISSIVE 1 External Run Permissive signal received
0 No External Run Permissive signal received
13… 15 Unused

Fieldbus adapter
178 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD
(CW) and STATUS WORD (SW) bits.

From any state From any state From any state

Emergency Stop Emergency Off
Fault
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)

OFF3 OFF2 FAULT (SW Bit3=1)

(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit4=0)
ACTIVE ACTIVE
(CW Bit7=1)
n(f)=0 / l=0

From any state

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
SWITCH-ON
OFF1 MAINS OFF (SW Bit6=1)
(SW Bit1=0) INHIBITED
ACTIVE
Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
n(f)=0 / l=0

A B C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON

(CW Bit3=0) (CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)

OPERATION READY TO
(SW Bit2=0) (SW Bit0=1)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON

OPERATION INHIBITED (CW= xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)

B C D READY TO (SW Bit1=1)

OPERATE
(CW Bit4=0) (CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)

C D OPERATION (SW Bit2=1)

ENABLED
A
(CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)

RFG OUTPUT
D ENABLED

B
(CW Bit6=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
KEY
State
State change RFG: ACCELERATOR
CW = CONTROL WORD ENABLED
SW = STATUS WORD C
RFG = Ramp Function Generator (CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
l = Param. 0104 CURRENT
OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
n = Speed
D

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 179

Reference
As described earlier in Control interface, the REFERENCE word is a speed or
frequency reference.

Reference scaling
The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives Profile (FBA)
Reference
Reference Range Scalar Remarks
Type
Frequency -20000 = -(par 46.02) Final reference limited by
-32767… +20000 = (par 46.02) 30.13/30.14
REF1
+32767 Speed -20000 = -(par 46.01) Final reference limited by
+20000 = (par 46.01) 30.11/30.12
Frequency -20000 = -(par 46.02) Final reference limited by
-32767… +20000 = (par 46.02) 30.13/30.14
REF2
+32767 Speed -20000 = -(par 46.01) Final reference limited by
+20000 = (par 46.01) 30.11/30.12

Note: The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect
on the scaling of references.

Fieldbus adapter
180 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Reference handling
Use drive parameter 20.21 to control the rotation direction when using FBA A
reference 1, FBA A reference 2, EFB reference 1 or EFB reference 2. The following
diagrams illustrate how parameter 20.21 and the sign of the fieldbus reference
interact to produce Reference values.

Note: Fieldbus references are bipolar; that is, they can be positive or negative.

ABB Drives Profile

Parameter Value Setting Resultant Reference
20.21 Direction 1 (Forward) Resultant Ref.
Max. Ref

Fieldbus
Reference -100% 100%

-(Max. Ref.)
20.21 Direction 2 (Reverse) Max. Ref
Resultant Ref.

Fieldbus -100% 100%

Reference

-(Max. Ref.)

20.21 Direction 3 (Request) Resultant Ref.

Max. Ref

Fieldbus -100%
Reference 100%

-(Max. Ref.)

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 181

Actual value
As described earlier in Control interface, Actual Values are words containing drive
values.

Actual value scaling

The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the
resolution of the selected drive parameter. Except as noted for Data Words 5 and 6
below, scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in the
ACH580 HVAC control program firmware manual (3AXD50000027537). For
example:
Feedback Integer Scaling (Feedback Integer) / (Scaling) = Scaled Value
100 (example: 12.11 AI1 actual 1000 = 1 unit 100 / 1000 = 0.1 mA
feedback)
10 10 = 1% 10 / 10 = 1%

Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows:

ABB Drives Profile
Data Word Contents Scaling
5 Set by drive -20000 … +20000 = -(par 46.01) … +(par 46.01) if content is Speed
parameter -20000 … +20000 = -(par 46.02) … +(par 46.02) if content is Frequency
58.28
-10000 … +10000 = -(par 46.03) … +(par 46.03) if content is Torque
6 Set by drive -20000 … +20000 = -(par 46.01) … +(par 46.01) if content is Speed
parameter -20000 … +20000 = -(par 46.02) … +(par 46.02) if content is Frequency
58.29
-10000 … +10000 = -(par 46.03) … +(par 46.03) if content is Torque

Actual value mapping

See the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.

Fieldbus adapter
182 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Generic profile technical data

Overview
The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry-standard drive profile for each protocol
(e.g. PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet).

Control Word
As described earlier in Control interface the control word is the principal means for
controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. For specific CONTROL WORD content,
see the user’s manual provided with the FBA module.

Status Word
As described earlier in Control interface, the contents of the STATUS WORD is
status information, sent by the drive to the master station. For specific STATUS
WORD content, see the user’s manual provided with the FBA module.

Reference
As described earlier in Control interface, the REFERENCE WORD is a speed or
frequency reference.

Note: REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles.

Reference scaling
REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific. However, at the drive, the meaning of
a 100% REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below. For a detailed
description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE, see the user’s manual
supplied with the FBA module.
ABB Drives Profile (FBA)
Reference
Reference Range Scalar Remarks
Type
Frequency -20000 = -(par 46.02) Final reference limited
-32767… +20000 = (par 46.02) by 30.13/30.14
REF
+32767 Speed -20000 = -(par 46.01) Final reference limited
+20000 = (par 46.01) by 30.11/30.12

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 183

Actual Values
As described earlier in Control interface, Actual Values are words containing drive
values.

Actual value scaling

For Actual Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter’s resolution. (See
the ACH580 HVAC control program firmware manual (3AXD50000027537) for
parameter resolutions.) For example:
Feedback Integer Scaling (Feedback Integer) / (Scaling) = Scaled Value
100 (example: 12.11 AI1 1000 = 1 unit 100 / 1000 = 0.1 mA
actual feedback)
10 10 = 1% 10 / 10 = 1%

Actual value mapping

See the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.

Fieldbus adapter
184 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Fieldbus adapter
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 185

Diagnostics

WARNING! Do not attempt any measurement, parts replacement or other service

procedure not described in this manual. Such action will void the warranty, may
endanger correct operation, and increase downtime and expense.

WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter
should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel. The Safety instructions on
the first pages of this manual must be followed.

Diagnostic displays
The bypass detects error situations and reports them using:
• The green and red status LEDs on the bypass control panel
• The bypass control panel display
The form of the display depends on the severity of the error. You can specify the
severity for many errors by directing the bypass to:
• Ignore the error situation.
• Report the situation as a warning.
• Report the situation as a fault.

Red – faults
The bypass signals that it has detected a severe error, or fault, by:
• Enabling the red Faulted LED on the bypass (LED is either steady on or blinking).
• Overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code.
• Stopping the motor (if it was on).
The message reappears after 30 seconds if the control panel is not touched and the
fault is still active. The Faulted LED remains active (either steady on or blinking)
even when the fault display is silenced.

Flashing display – warnings

For less severe errors, called warnings, the diagnostic display is advisory. For these
situations, the bypass is simply reporting that it had detected something “unusual.” In
these situations, the bypass overrides the control panel display with the display of a
warning code and/or name.
The warning code on the display flashes over the current display. Pressing any key
silences the warning message. The message reappears after 30 seconds if the
control panel is not touched and the warning is still active.

Diagnostics
186 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Correcting faults
The recommended corrective action for faults is:
• Use the following Fault listing table to find and address the root cause of the
problem.
• Reset the system.

Fault listing
Fault Fault Name
Fault Possible Cause Corrective Action
Code In Panel
3001 COIL CURR RBCU is sensing Defective component Change RBCU
FBK abnormal current on RBCU
feedback when neither
contactor should be
energized
3002 BYP CNTACT M2 contactor indicates it Defective Contactor Disconnect incoming power
STUCK is not prepared to move Defective RBCU from unit
on a power up check of Check if contactor armature
the contactor or after moves freely. If armature
contact is commanded moves freely, then change the
to open RBCU. If armature does not
move freely, then change
individual contactor (M2) or
the complete assembly
(RCSA-0x)
3003 DRV CNTACT M1 contactor indicates it Defective Contactor Disconnect incoming power
STUCK is not prepared to move Defective RBCU from unit
on a power up check of Check if contactor armature
the contactor or after moves freely. If armature
contact is commanded moves freely, then change the
to open RBCU. If armature does not
move freely, then change
individual contactor (M1) or
the complete assembly
(RCSA-0x)
3004 BYPASS M2 contactor will not Loose J8 connector Verify that J8 connector is
COIL OPEN close when commanded on RBCU firmly seated.
to do so Loose wires on With incoming power
contactor terminals disconnected, check for
A1 and/or A2 tightness of A1 and A2
Bad Output on terminals
RBCU Swap RBCU
Bad Contactor Change Contactor/Assembly
3005 DRIVE COIL M1 contactor will not Loose J8 connector Verify that J8 connector is
OPEN close when commanded on RBCU firmly seated.
to do so Loose wires on With incoming power
contactor terminals disconnected, check for
A1 and/or A2 tightness of A1 and A2
Bad Output on terminals
RBCU Swap RBCU
Bad Contactor Change Contactor/Assembly

Diagnostics
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 187

Fault Fault Name

Fault Possible Cause Corrective Action
Code In Panel
3006 UNDERVOLT Fault will be generated Loose J7 connector Check that J7 connector is
AGE only if the drive is on RBCU unit (refer firmly seated in RBCU (refer
controlling the motor to page 17 for the J7 to page 17 for the J7
and the power to the connector location) connector location)
bypass is removed Loose input wiring Check tightness of incoming
before the drive shuts connections
down. This fault is Incoming power
generated when the problems Check Parameter 0413 to
drive contactor opens view voltage level at time of
while the drive is trip
operating. Check upstream protection
3008 DRIVE AI2 Only displayed when in Check ACH580 Check ACH580 manual for
LOSS Supervisory mode. manual for AI2 loss AI2 loss
Indicates that AI2 on the
drive has failed.
3009 MTR Bypass opens on motor Drive Mode: Check if overload condition
OVERLOAD overload conditions Bad Motor exists
defined in the drive Drive Mode:
Bad CTs
Bad RBCU Refer to 580 manual for
proper troubleshooting
Bypass mode: techniques
Bad motor Bypass Mode:
Bad CTs Check that J2 connector is
Bad RBCU firmly seated in RBCU
Either mode: Use clamp meter to verify mtr
low input voltage current vs. display in
parameter 0101
Check input voltage
3010 INP PHASE A Fault will be generated Loose J7 connector Check J7 connector (refer to
LOSS when the bypass (refer to page 17 for page 17 for the J7 connector
contactor is requested to the J7 connector location)
be closed and the RBCU location) Check yellow wire on input
does not sense voltage Loose wiring on block
on Phase A Contactor assembly. Check incoming voltage,
Blown upstream fuse phase to ground
3011 INP PHASE B Fault will be generated Loose J7 connector Check J7 connector (refer to
LOSS when the bypass (refer to page 17 for page 17 for the J7 connector
contactor is requested to the J7 connector location)
be closed and the RBCU location) Check black wire on input
does not sense voltage Loose wiring on block
on Phase B Contactor assembly. Check incoming voltage,
Blown upstream fuse phase to ground
3012 INP PHASE C Fault will be generated Loose J7 connector Check J7 connector (refer to
LOSS when the bypass (refer to page 17 for page 17 for the J7 connector
contactor is requested to the J7 connector location)
be closed and the RBCU location) Check red on input block
does not sense voltage Loose wiring on
on Phase C Check incoming voltage,
Contactor assembly. phase to ground
Blown upstream fuse
3013 DRIVE 1ST Fault generated if N/A Run bypass unit in drive mode
START attempting to close the before attempting bypass
bypass contactor with mode
out running the bypass
in drive mode first.

Diagnostics
188 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Fault Fault Name

Fault Possible Cause Corrective Action
Code In Panel
3014 COIL POW Coil power supply has Internal failure on Cycle power on bypass unit. If
SUPPLY failed to reach rated RBCU unit contactor coil is shorted, fault
voltage Shorted contactor 3023 or 3024 will be
coil generated.
If 3023 or 3024 is generated,
replace respective contactor
If 3023 or 3024 is not
generated on power up,
replace RBCU unit.
3016 EARTH Declared if attempting to Earth fault in motor Refer to the ACH580 manual
FAULT close the bypass
contactor when the drive
has earth fault declared
3017 MTR If motor power(%) level Broken belt Check load
UNDERLOAD falls below minimum Reset bypass keypad
power level establish in
parameter 3003 for the Check ACH580 manual, fault
time (s) set in parameter code 17, for further action
3002 fault will be
generated. Parameter
3003 is a percentage of
motor power as defined
in the drive via
parameter 9909. Fault
only applies to bypass
mode
3018 MAX CYCLE Supervisory Mode only. High and low levels Check parameters 3202–
FAULT Declared if bypass of hysteresis band 3205. Increase time delays on
contactor is closed by are too tight parameters 3204 and 3205
supervisory control 16
times within a 1 hour
period.
3019 DRIVE LINK Supervisory Mode Only. Bad cable/ Proper seating of cable in
FAULT Fault generated if connection between drive and RBCU
RS-485 link between drive and bypass. (connector J3).
drive and bypass stops Drive parameter Check that drive parameter
communicating. 95.21, bit 5 not set 95.21, bit 5 is set.
for Bypass present.
3020 PHASE SEQ Sequence of 3 phase Phase sequence Swap any two of the three
voltage input is such that unknown at time of input wires to the bypass unit
bypass operation will wiring
result in motor rotation
opposite of drive forward
operation.
3021 PH A CURR Fault is generated when Loose CT connection Check J2 connector for
FBK current in Phase A is Bad RBCU proper seating
detected and the bypass Check connector on Current
contactor is open Bad CT
Assembly
Replace RBCU
Replace RCSA unit
3022 PH C CURR Fault is generated when Loose CT connection Check J2 connector for
FBK current in Phase C is Bad RBCU proper seating
detected and the bypass Check connector on Current
contactor is open Bad CT
Assembly
Replace RBCU
Replace RCSA unit

Diagnostics
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 189

Fault Fault Name

Fault Possible Cause Corrective Action
Code In Panel
3023 BYP COIL Coil characteristics are Shorted contactor Replace RBCU
SHORTED checked only on power coil Replace RCSA unit
up and coil current is Shorted/damaged
greater than allowable cable
values
Bad RBCU
3024 DRV COIL Coil characteristics are Shorted contactor Replace RBCU
SHORTED checked only on power coil Replace RCSA unit
up and coil current is Shorted/damaged
greater than allowable cable
values
Bad RBCU
3027 INVALID SUB Contactor assembly as RBCU unit from a Contact ABB at
ASM recorded in the RBCU different size bypass 1-800-752-0696 option 1
unit does not match used to replace a
drive information defective RBCU.
communicated via 485 Parameters not
link matched after
Firmware change.
3028 EXT COMM Time between fieldbus Incorrect Check Group 51 and 58
LOSS messages has Communication Tighten Connections
exceeded timeout settings in Group 51
interval set with and 58. Check Communication Cable
parameter 3005 Grounding
Poor Connections
Noise on
Communication Line
3029 EFB CONFIG Error reading Internal Startup error Cycle Power
FILE configuration file for Replace RBCU
embedded fieldbus
3030 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by Overriding Control Check Overriding Control
external fieldbus System tripped System
E-Clipse unit via
fieldbus.
3031 EFB 1...EFB 3 Fault code reserved for For Bacnet: Device Check Parameters 5040,
… embedded fieldbus. object instances for 5099 and/or 5840, 5899
3033 the drive and or
bypass are set
greater than
4194302 in
parameters 5040
5099 and/or 5840
5899 respectively
3034 MTR PHASE Detects open motor Internal problem Check wiring in E-Clipse Unit
phase. Detection is Cable problem Check motor cabling
done by current
transformers in bypass Motor problem Check Motor
unit. Check if 3006 is Disabled
3037 PCB TEMP RBCU unit has reached Cabinet cooling has Stop drive and let cool down
190 degrees Fahrenheit, failed and restart
88 degrees Celsius Ambient conditions Add additional cooling
too high Replace RBCU
Bad RBCU unit

Diagnostics
190 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Fault Fault Name

Fault Possible Cause Corrective Action
Code In Panel
3038 NO DRIVE No drive data available Bypass not able to Proper seating of cable in
DATA (Group 112) extract drive data on drive and RBCU
initial power up due (connector J3).
to: Check that drive parameter
Bad cable/ 95.21, bit 5 is set.
connection between
drive and bypass.
Drive parameter
95.21, bit 5 not set
for Bypass present.
3039 FBA PAR Non embedded fieldbus Incorrect settings in Verify Group 51 parameters
CONF has detected an error in Group 51
Group 51 parameters
3101 SFLASH Internal checksum error N/A Cycle power
CORRUPT Replace RBCU
Upgrade firmware
3102 PMAP FILE Parameter file is corrupt Cycle Power
Contact ABB with information
that preceded fault
3201 T1 T1 program cycle is N/A Contact ABB with information
OVERLOAD overloaded that preceded fault
Cycle Power
Replace RBCU
3202 T2 T2 program cycle is N/A Contact ABB with information
OVERLOAD overloaded that preceded fault
Cycle Power
Replace RBCU
3203 T3 T3 program cycle is N/A Contact ABB with information
OVERLOAD overloaded that preceded fault
Cycle Power
Replace RBCU
3204 STACK Program cycle is N/A Contact ABB with information
OVERFLOW overloaded that preceded fault
Cycle Power
Replace RBCU
3205 UNKNOWN Bypass control board Firmware is not Contact ABB at
CB type is unknown. compatible with 1-800-752-0696 option 1
control board in
RBCU.
3206 UNKNOWN Drive reports rating not Drive does not match Replace RBCU or reload with
DRIVE found in bypass drives configured in most current firmware
software bypass RBCU
3207 UNKNOWN N/A N/A Replace RBCU or load most
BYPASS current firmware
Contact ABB at
1-800-752-0696 option 1
Replace RBCU or load most
current firmware

Diagnostics
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 191

Fault resetting

WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is active, the
system may start immediately after fault reset.

Flashing red LED

To reset the bypass for faults indicated by a flashing red LED:
• Turn off the power for 5 minutes.
Red LED
To reset the bypass for faults indicated by a red LED (on, not flashing), correct the
problem and do one of the following:
• From the bypass control panel, press OFF/RESET
• Turn off the power for 5 minutes.
Depending on the value of 1607, FAULT RESET SELECT, the following could also
be used to reset the drive:
• Digital input
• Fieldbus communication
When the fault has been corrected, the motor can be started.

Note: For some faults such as motor phase open and motor OC, it is suggested that
you check the drive to motor wiring and/or meggar the motor before attempting to
restart the system on bypass.

History
For reference, the last five fault codes are stored into parameters 0401, 0410, 0419,
0420 and 0421. For the most recent fault (identified by parameter 0401) and Fault 2
(identified by parameter 0410), the drive stores additional data (in group 4 and the
event log) to aid in troubleshooting a problem.
To clear the fault history (all of the Group 04, Fault History parameters):
1. Using the control panel in Parameters mode, select parameter 0401.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Press Up and Down simultaneously.
4. Press ENTER.

Correcting warnings
The recommended corrective action for warnings is:
• Determine if the Warning requires any corrective action (action is not always
required).
• Use the following Warning listing to find and address the root cause of the
problem.

Diagnostics
192 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Diagnostics

Warning listing
The following table lists the warnings by code number and describes each.
Warning Warning Name In
Warning Possible Cause Corrective Action
Code Panel
4001 INP PHASE A Warning will occur in Loose J8 connector Check J8 connector
LOSS drive mode. In bypass, Loose wiring on Check yellow wire on
warning will occur if Contactor assembly. input block
bypass contactor has
not closed. Unit will trip Blown upstream fuse Check incoming
on Fault 3010 if the voltage, phase to
bypass contactor is ground
closed
4002 INP PHASE B Warning will occur in Loose J8 connector Check J8 connector
LOSS drive mode. In bypass, Loose wiring on Check black wire on
warning will occur if Contactor assembly. input block
bypass contactor has
not closed. Unit will trip Blown upstream fuse Check incoming
on Fault 3011 if the voltage, phase to
bypass contactor is ground
closed
4003 INP PHASE C Warning will occur in Loose J8 connector Check J8 connector
LOSS drive mode. In bypass, Loose wiring on Check red wire on input
warning will occur if Contactor assembly. block
bypass contactor has
not closed. Unit will trip Blown upstream fuse Check incoming
on Fault 3012 if the voltage, phase to
bypass contactor is ground
closed
4004 AUTO TRANSFER Message is displayed Drive fault Check drive
when the drive faults
and the bypass
switches to bypass
mode as configured in
Parameter 1608
4005 EXT COMM ERR Time between fieldbus Incorrect Check Group 51
messages has Communication and 58
exceeded timeout settings in Group 51 Tighten Connections
interval set with and 58.
parameter 3005 Check Communication
Poor Connections Cable Grounding
Noise on
Communication Line
4006 Selected by PAR Warning will occur Run Permissive Check 24 Volts on
1620: when start order is condition is not RBCU unit
RUN PERMISSIVE given and the “RUN satisfied. Check for 24 volts on
Permissive” is not Bad 24v supply respective DI when
DAMPER END present
SWITCH Bad digital input condition is satisfied
VALVE OPENING Check Parameter 0103
PRE-LUBE CYCLE for status of digital input
4007 PCB TEMP RBCU unit reached Cabinet cooling has Stop drive and let cool
181 degrees failed down and restart
Fahrenheit, 83 degrees Ambient conditions too Add additional cooling
Celsius high Replace RBCU
Bad RBCU unit

Diagnostics
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 193

Warning Warning Name In

Warning Possible Cause Corrective Action
Code Panel
4008 DRIVE SETUP Warning generated Incorrect parameters Check that drive
when configuration of settings parameter 95.21,
drive is such that bit 5 = “Bypass
bypass can not present”
properly control the
drive. Specifically, drive
parameter 95.21, bit 5
4009 BYPASS RUN Warning is generated N/A N/A
DELAY when a bypass start
command is issued and
there is non zero time
value in bypass
parameter 1614
4010 MTR OVERLOAD Bypass warning if Overloaded motor drive Drive Mode:
motor overload mode: Refer to ACH580
conditions exist as Bad Motor manual for proper
defined in the drive troubleshooting
Bad CTs
techniques
Bad RBCU
Bypass Mode:
Bypass mode:
Check that
Bad motor J2 connector is firmly
Bad CTs seated in RBCU
Bad RBCU Check input voltage
Either mode: Does overload
low input voltage condition exist?
4011 MTR UNDERLOAD Warning comes at half N/A Parameter 3002 is the
the time of a mtr time
underload fault. See Parameter 3003 is the
fault 3017 for further level
text
4012 BYPASS Warning will be N/A N/A
DISABLED generated if parameter
1613 is set to “Disable”
4013 DRIVE LINK Same as Fault 3019 Bad cable between Proper seating of cable
ERROR however will occur drive and bypass in drive and RBCU
when not in supervisory Drive parameter 95.21, (connector J3)
mode bit 5 not set for Check that drive
“Bypass present” parameter 95.21, bit 5
= “Bypass present”
Follow DriveLink
recovery procedure
4014 DRIVE TEST Warning is generated N/A N/A
when bypass
parameter 1617 is set
to “enable”
4015 START DRIVE 1ST Message displayed on N/A Run drive in Hand
initial “out of box”
power up sequence

Diagnostics
194 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Warning Warning Name In

Warning Possible Cause Corrective Action
Code Panel
4016 INP VOLTAGE 3-Phase input voltage N/A Loose J7 connector
LOW has not reached a Low input voltage.
sufficient level to Incoming voltage has
enable editing of not reached at least
parameters via the 155 VAC within a few
keypad. This message seconds of powerup
is generated within a
few seconds of power
up
4019 OVERRIDE 1 Warning is generated N/A Check Parameter 0103
when override 1 is and 0104 for digital
active input status
4020 OVRD2 BYP Warning is generated N/A Check Parameter 0103
when override 2 is and 0104 for digital
active and the bypass input status
is controlling the motor
4021 Selected by PAR Warning will occur Run Permissive Check 24 Volts on
1621 when start order is condition is not RBCU unit
START given and the “RUN satisfied. Check for 24 volts on
INTERLOCK 1 Permissive” is not Bad 24 V supply respective DI when
VIBRATION present condition is satisfied
Bad digital input
SWITCH Check Parameter 0103
24 V common is not
FIRESTAT tied to Digital input For status of digital
FREEZESTAT common on bypass input
OVERPRESSURE when using external
24 V supply
VIBRATION TRIP
SMOKE
SAFETY OPEN
LOW SUCTION
PRES
4022 Selected by PAR Warning will occur Run Permissive Check 24 Volts on
1622 when start order is condition is not RBCU unit
START given and the “RUN satisfied. Check for 24 volts on
INTERLOCK 2 Permissive” is not Bad 24v supply respective DI when
present condition is satisfied
VIBRATION Bad digital input
SWITCH 24 V common is not Check Parameter 0103
... tied to Digital input For status of digital
common on bypass input
LOW SUCTION
PRES when using external 24
v supply
4023 Selected by PAR Warning will occur Run Permissive Check 24 Volts on
1623 when start order is condition is not RBCU unit
START given and the “RUN satisfied. Check for 24 volts on
INTERLOCK 3 Permissive” is not Bad 24 V supply respective DI when
present condition is satisfied
VIBRATION Bad digital input
SWITCH 24 V common is not Check Parameter 0103
... tied to Digital input For status of digital
common on bypass input
LOW SUCTION
PRES when using external
24 V supply

Diagnostics
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 195

Warning Warning Name In

Warning Possible Cause Corrective Action
Code Panel
4024 Selected by PAR Warning will occur Run Permissive Check 24 Volts on
1624 when start order is condition is not RBCU unit
START given and the “RUN satisfied. Check for 24 volts on
INTERLOCK 4 Permissive” is not Bad 24 V supply respective DI when
present condition is satisfied
VIBRATION Bad digital input
SWITCH 24 V common is not Check Parameter 0103
... tied to Digital input For status of digital
common on bypass input
LOW SUCTION
PRES when using external
24 V supply
4025 LOCAL DISABLED Warning is displayed if
MODE LOCK (16.29) is
set to AUTO MODE
and the Hand or Off key
is pressed
4026 AUTO DISABLED This warning is
displayed if MODE
LOCK (1629) is set to
LOCAL MODE and the
Auto key is pressed.
4027 COMM CONFIG Warning is displayed if E-Clipse parameters Change MAC address
ERR the drive and bypass 5003 (BP MAC ID) and to unique values
MAC addresses are 5803 (DV MAC ID) are
equal or invalid. set to the same value
4028 FBA PAR CONF Non embedded Verify Group 51
fieldbus has detected parameters
an error in Group 51
parameters
4029 DRIVE FAULTED The drive is faulted. Reset drive
4030 OVRD2 VFD Warning is generated N/A Check Parameter 0103
when override 2 is and 0104 for digital
active and the drive is input status
controlling the motor
4031 OVRD2 STOP Warning is generated N/A Check Parameter 0103
when override 2 is and 0104 for digital
active and both the input status
bypass and drive
output contactors are
deenergized

Diagnostics
196 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Bypass status listing

Bypass Status
Condition Description
(16 Characters)
DRIVE/BYPASS? DRIVE SELECTED Displays which one is selected, drive or
BYPASS SELECTED bypass
SAFETIES? OPEN Displays if safeties (=START INTERLOCK 1
CLOSED and/or START INTERLOCK 2) have been
applied, or if they are missing
RUN PERMISSIVES? OPEN Displays if RUN PERMISSIVE is present or
CLOSED not
START REQUEST? NOT PRESENT Displays if start request has been applied to
PRESENT the system
AUTO TRANSFER? NOT TRANSFERRED Displays if the system is in Auto Transfer state
TRANSFERRED or not. Does not reflect to PAR 16.08 AUTO
XFER value itself
BYP OVERRIDE 1? NOT ACTIVATED Status of Override 1
ACTIVATED
BYP OVERRIDE 2? NOT ACTIVATED Status of Override 2
ACTIVATED
DRIVE FAULTED? NO Displays if drive is faulted or not
YES
BYPASS FAULTED? NO Displays if bypass is faulted or not
YES
SYSTEM STARTED? NO Displays if system is started or not
YES
SYSTEM RUNNING? NO Displays if system is running or not
YES
BYPASS ALARMS? NO ALARMS Displays if there is an active warning(s) in
ACTIVE bypass or not
HAND/OFF/AUTO? OFF MODE Displays operating mode of the bypass - OFF,
HAND MODE HAND or AUTO
AUTO MODE

Diagnostics
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 197

Error messages
# Error Message Description
1 CAN’T EDIT Try to save value (=press the ENTER key in Parameter Edit
PAR IS READ ONLY State) of a read-only parameter. E.g. try to change value PAR
01.02 INPUT VOLT
2 CAN’T EDIT Try to change value of a parameter, which is allowed to be
WHEN STARTED changed only when system is not started. E.g. PAR 16.02
RUN PERMISSIVE
3 CAN’T EDIT Try to change value of a “reset only” parameter other than
UP+DOWN ONLY zero. UP+DOWN buttons must be pressed simultaneously
for requesting default value of the PAR on the display (value
zero), and after that ENTER pressed for saving it (reset the
parameter). E.g. PAR 04.01 LAST FAULT
4 CAN’T EDIT Input voltage too low. Changing of parameters prohibited
INP VOLTAGE LOW since system cannot save values to nv-mem w/ insufficient
voltage.
5 CAN’T EDIT Try to save value (=press the ENTER key in Parameter Edit
PAR IS HIDDEN State) of a hidden parameter. Should not be possible. If
hidden parameters are turned visible, this message is not
given.
6 CAN’T EDIT Try to save value which is over LO-LIMIT of the parameter.
UNDER LO-LIMIT Should not be possible when changing parameters from
control panel.
7 CAN’T EDIT Try to save value which is over HI-LIMIT of the parameter.
UNDER HI-LIMIT Should not be possible when changing parameters from
control panel.
8 CAN’T EDIT Try to save value which is out of enumerated value list.
ENUM VAL ONLY Should not be possible when changing parameters from
control panel.
9 CAN’T EDIT Try to request default value (=press UP and DOWN buttons
NO DEFAULT simultaneously) for a parameter which is defined not to have
a default value. Should not be possible when changing
parameters from control panel.
10 CAN’T EDIT Parameter system is busy, e.g. application macro change is
TRY AGAIN. in process at the same time when someone is trying to save
a value for a parameter. Should not be possible when
changing parameters from control panel.

Diagnostics
198 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Diagnostics
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 199

Maintenance

Maintenance

Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB for ACH580
enclosures.
Maintenance Configuration Interval Instruction
Check/replace hinged Hinged door wall Check every Enclosure air filter replacement
door wall mount mount UL (NEMA) 3 months. Replace – UL (NEMA) Type 12 hinged
enclosure inlet air filter Type 12 enclosures as needed. door wall mount enclosures on
page 199.

Enclosure air filter replacement – UL (NEMA) Type 12 hinged door

wall mount enclosures
Filter material
Material Filter Type
American Air Filter (358-35-06A-12A) POLYKLEON WHITE 12.7mm (1/2 in.) X 152.4mm (6 in.) X
304.6mm (12 in.) stk.

This procedure applies to drive with input disconnect configurations in UL (NEMA)

Type 12 hinged door wall mount enclosures. This filter is located at the bottom of the
enclosure. Use the following procedure to check and replace filters.
1. On the enclosure, remove the screws holding the filter bracket in place.
2. Remove the filter kit from the enclosure.

Enclosure Door
Back of
Enclosure

Bottom of Enclosure

Mounting
Screws (4X)
Filter Bracket

Maintenance
200 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

3. Lift the filter out of the filter bracket and replace as appropriate.
4. With the filter in the filter bracket, reinstall filter kit onto enclosure.
5. Replace the mounting screws. Tighten to the recommended torque of 2 N•m
(1.47 ft-lbs) per installation instruction 3AXD50000221370.

Maintenance
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 201

Technical data

Vertical enclosure terminals maximum wire size and terminal torque values
Nominal Output Maximum Wire Size and Terminal Torque
Ratings
Type Code1 Drive Package Frame
Size Circuit Disconnect Motor Ground
Current Power
Breaker Switch Termination Lugs
A HP
208/230 Volts
ACH580-VxR-04A6-2 4.6 1 R1
ACH580-VxR-06A6-2 6.6 1.5 R1 #10 #10
ACH580-VxR-07A5-2 7.5 2 R1 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#6 #4
ACH580-VxR-10A6-2 10.6 3 R1 11-13 in-lbs 35 in-lbs

ACH580-VxR-017A-2 16.7 5 R1 #6
ACH580-VxR-024A-2 24.2 7.5 R2 #8 55 in-lbs
62 in-lbs
ACH580-VxR-031A-2 30.8 10 R2 #4 #1
55 in-lbs 35 in-lbs
#2
ACH580-VxR-046A-2 46.2 15 R3
55 in-lbs #2
#2 #1 #2/0 50 in-lbs
ACH580-VxR-059A-2 59.4 20 R3
62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 110 in-lbs
#1/0
ACH580-VxR-075A-2 74.8 25 R4 75 in-lbs
1) “VxR” represents both VCR and VDR.

Nominal Output
Maximum Wire Size and Terminal Torque
Ratings
1 Frame
Type Code Drive Package Size
Current Power Circuit Disconnect Motor Ground
Breaker Switch Termination Lugs
A HP
460 Volts
ACH580-VxR-02A1-4 2.1 1 R1
ACH580-VxR-03A0-4 3.0 1.5 R1
ACH580-VxR-03A5-4 3.5 2 R1 #12 #10
ACH580-VxR-04A8-4 4.8 3 R1 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
ACH580-VxR-07A6-4 7.6 5 R1 #6 #4
11-13 in-lbs 35 in-lbs
ACH580-VxR-012A-4 12 7.5 R1
#8
ACH580-VxR-014A-4 14 10 R2 55 in-lbs
#10
62 in-lbs #6
ACH580-VxR-023A-4 23 15 R2
55 in-lbs

ACH580-VxR-027A-4 27 20 R3 #4
55 in-lbs
#8 #1
ACH580-VxR-034A-4 34 25 R3 62 in-lbs #3 35 in-lbs
ACH580-VxR-044A-4 44 30 R3 55 in-lbs
#2 #2
ACH580-VxR-052A-4 52 40 R4 55 in-lbs 50 in-lbs
#2 #1 #2/0
ACH580-VxR-065A-4 65 50 R4
62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 110 in-lbs
ACH580-VxR-077A-4 77 60 R4 #1/0
75 in-lbs
1) “VxR” represents both VCR and VDR.

Technical data
202 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Nominal Output Maximum Wire Size and Terminal Torque

Ratings
Type Code 1 Drive Package Frame
Size Circuit Disconnect Motor Ground
Current Power
Breaker Switch Termination Lugs
A HP
575 Volts2
ACH580-VxR-02A7-6 2.7 2 R2
ACH580-VxR-03A9-6 3.9 3 R2
#10
ACH580-VxR-06A1-6 6.1 5 R2 #6 #4
55 in-lbs
ACH580-VxR-09A0-6 9 7.5 R2 11-13 in-lbs 35 in-lbs
#10
ACH580-VxR-011A-6 11 10 R2
62 in-lbs
ACH580-VxR-017A-6 17 15 R2 #6
ACH580-VxR-022A-6 22 20 R3 55 in-lbs
#1 #2
ACH580-VxR-027A-6 27 25 R3 #4 35 in-lbs 50 in-lbs
ACH580-VxR-032A-6 32 30 R3 55 in-lbs

1) “VxR” represents both VCR and VDR.

2) VCR is rated 600Y/347V. For use on a solidly grounded Wye source only.

Box enclosure terminals maximum wire size and terminal torque values
Nominal Output
Maximum Wire Size and Terminal Torque
Ratings
Drive Package Base Circuit Ground
Drive Circuit Disconnec Disconnect Motor Ground
Type Code1 Current Power
Frame
Breaker Breaker t Switch Terminals Motor Lugs Lugs
UL UL UL (NEMA) ULSwitch UL (NEMA) Terminals UL UL
Size (NEMA) (NEMA) UL (NEMA) (NEMA)
A HP (NEMA) Type Type (NEMA)
Type Type 3R 1 and 12
Type 3R
1 and 2
Type 3R Type Type 3R
1 and 12 1 and 2
208/230 Volts
ACH580-BxR-04A6-2 4.6 1 R1
ACH580-BxR-06A6-2 6.6 1.5 R1 #12 #12 #10 #10
ACH580-BxR-07A5-2 7.5 2 R1 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#6 #6 #4 #4
ACH580-BxR-10A6-2 10.6 3 R1 11-13 in-lbs 11-13 in-lbs 35 in-lbs 35 in-lbs
ACH580-BxR-017A-2 16.7 5 R1 #8 #8 #6 #6
ACH580-BxR-024A-2 24.2 7.5 R2 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#6 #6 #4 #4 #1 #1
ACH580-BxR-031A-2 30.8 10 R2 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 35 in-lbs 35 in-lbs
#2 #2
ACH580-BxR-046A-2 46.2 15 R3
55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs #2 #2
#2 #2 #1 #1 #2/0 #2/0 50 in-lbs 50 in-lbs
ACH580-BxR-059A-2 59.4 20 R3
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 110 in-lbs 110 in-lbs
#1/0 #1/0
ACH580-BxR-075A-2 74.8 25 R4
75 in-lbs 75 in-lbs
#2/0 #2/0
ACH580-BxR-088A-2 88 30 R5
#1/0 275 in-lbs 71 in-lbs
124 in-lbs #4/0 300 MCM
ACH580-BxR-114A-2 114 40 R6 275 in-lbs 301 in-lbs
Consult Consult Consult #1/0 Consult
ACH580-BxR-143A-2 143 50 R6 #3/0 300 MCM 500 MCM
factory factory factory 50 in-lbs factory
ACH580-BxR-169A-2 169 60 R7 124 in-lbs 275 in-lbs 372 in-lbs
ACH580-BxR-211A-2 211 75 R7 373 2 X 500 2 X 500
MCM MCM MCM
ACH580-BxR-248A-2 248 1002 R8 274 in-lbs 274 in-lbs 372 in-lbs
1) “BxR” represents both BCR and BDR.
2) 100 HP @ 230V.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 203

Nominal Output Maximum Wire Size and Terminal Torque

Ratings
Drive Package Base Circuit Circuit Disconnect Motor
Ground Ground
Drive
Type Code1 Current Power
Frame
Breaker Breaker Switch
Disconnect Terminals Motor Lugs Lugs
UL Switch Terminals UL
Size UL UL (NEMA) UL (NEMA) UL
(NEMA) (NEMA) Type
UL (NEMA) Type UL (NEMA) (NEMA) (NEMA)
A HP Type Type 3R Type 3R Type
Type 3R 1 and 12 1 and 2 Type 3R
1 and 12 1 and 2
460 Volts
ACH580-BxR-02A1-4 2.1 1 R1
ACH580-BxR-03A0-4 3.0 1.5 R1
ACH580-BxR-03A5-4 3.5 2 R1 #12 #12 #10 #10
ACH580-BxR-04A8-4 4.8 3 R1 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
ACH580-BxR-07A6-4 7.6 5 R1 #6 #6 #4 #4
11-13 in-lbs 11-13 in-lbs 35 in-lbs 35 in-lbs
ACH580-BxR-012A-4 12 7.5 R1
#8 #8
ACH580-BxR-014A-4 14 10 R2
#10 #10 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs #6 #6
ACH580-BxR-023A-4 23 15 R2
55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#4 #4
ACH580-BxR-027A-4 27 20 R3
55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#8 #8 #1 #1
ACH580-BxR-034A-4 34 25 R3 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs #3 #3 35 in-lbs 35 in-lbs
ACH580-BxR-044A-4 44 30 R3 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#2 #2 #2 #2
ACH580-BxR-052A-4 52 40 R4 50 in-lbs 50 in-lbs
55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#2 #2 #1 #1 #2/0 #2/0
ACH580-BxR-065A-4 65 50 R4
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 110 in-lbs 110 in-lbs
#1/0 #1/0
ACH580-BxR-077A-4 77 60 R4
75 in-lbs 75 in-lbs
#1/0 #3/0 #2/0
ACH580-BxR-096A-4 96 75 R5
124 in-lbs 275 in-lbs 71 in-lbs
#2/0 250 MCM 300 MCM
ACH580-BxR-124A-4 124 100 R6
124 in-lbs 275 in-lbs 301 in-lbs
Consult Consult Consult #1/0 Consult
ACH580-BxR-156A-4 156 125 R7 #3/0 300 MCM 500 MCM
factory factory factory 50 in-lbs factory
ACH580-BxR-180A-4 180 150 R7 124 in-lbs 275 in-lbs 372 in-lbs
350 350 2 X 500
ACH580-BxR-240A-4 240 200 R8 MCM MCM MCM
274 in-lbs 274 in-lbs 372 in-lbs
1) “BxR” represents both BCR and BDR.

Technical data
204 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Nominal Output Maximum Wire Size and Terminal Torque

Ratings
Drive Package Base Circuit Circuit Disconnect Motor
Ground Ground
Drive
Type Code1 Current Power
Frame
Breaker Breaker Switch
Disconnect Terminals Motor Lugs Lugs
UL Switch Terminals UL
Size UL UL (NEMA) UL (NEMA) UL
(NEMA) (NEMA) Type
UL (NEMA) Type 1 UL (NEMA) (NEMA) (NEMA)
A HP Type 1 Type 3R Type 3R Type 1
Type 3R 1 and 12 and 2 Type 3R
and 12 and 2
575 Volts2
ACH580-BxR-02A7-6 2.7 2 R2
ACH580-BxR-03A9-6 3.9 3 R2
#12 #12 #10 #10
ACH580-BxR-06A1-6 6.1 5 R2 #6 #6 #4
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
ACH580-BxR-09A0-6 9 7.5 R2 11-13 in lbs 11-13 in lbs 35 in-lbs
#4
ACH580-BxR-011A-6 11 10 R2
35 in-lbs
ACH580-BxR-017A-6 17 15 R2 #6 #6
ACH580-BxR-022A-6 22 20 R3 #10 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
62 in-lbs #10
62 in-lbs #1
ACH580-BxR-027A-6 27 25 R3 #4 #4
#1 35 in-lbs
ACH580-BxR-032A-6 32 30 R3 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
35 in-lbs
#6
62 in-lbs #3 #2
ACH580-BxR-041A-6 41 40 R5
55 in-lbs 50 in-lbs
#2 #2
ACH580-BxR-052A-63 52 50 R5
62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#1 #1 #2/0
ACH580-BxR-062A-6 62 60 R5
62 in-lbs 275 in-lbs 110 in-lbs
#1/0 Consult #1/0 Consult Consult Consult
ACH580-BxR-077A-6 77 75 R5
62 in-lbs factory 275 in-lbs factory factory factory

ACH580-BxR-099A-6 99 100 R7 #3/0 #3/0 #2/0

124 in-lbs 275 in-lbs 71 in-lbs 3 x #3/0

ACH580-BxR-125A-6 125 125 R7 250 MCM 250 in-lbs

250 275 in-lbs 300 MCM
MCM
300 MCM 301 in-lbs
ACH580-BxR-144A-6 144 150 R8 124 in-lbs
275 in-lbs
1) “BxR” represents both BCR and BDR.
2) BCR is rated 600Y/347V unless otherwise specified. For use on a solidly grounded Wye source only.
3) BCR supports Delta network configuration.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 205

Branch circuit protection

Input power is connected to the ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass through a door
interlocked disconnect switch or circuit breaker. Neither of these inputs are fused.
The branch circuit that provides power to the ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass with
disconnect switch must include the specified external fuses to provide short circuit
and ground fault protection for the motor in the bypass mode.
When connected to a 240V or 480V power source, the ACH580 with E-Clipse
Bypass with the circuit breaker option is suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. When connected
to a 600V power source ABB E-Clipse units provided with a circuit breaker,
VCR and BCR configurations, are suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
Fuses

Note: The UL listed drive fuses in the table are provided in the purchased product.
• Replacement fuses are required to be of the same class, current rating, and
voltage rating. Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they are 600V
rated and meet the specifications given in the table.
• Fuses with higher current rating than specified must not be used.

208/230 Volt fuses for vertical enclosures

Internal Drive External Fuse for
Nominal Output Ratings Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Base
Drive
Type Code1 Drive Package Frame Max Max
Current Power Class Current Class Current
Size
A HP Rating Rating

208/230 Volts
ACH580-VxR-04A6-2 4.6 1 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-VxR-06A6-2 6.6 1.5 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-VxR-07A5-2 7.5 2 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 20A
ACH580-VxR-10A6-2 10.6 3 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 25A
ACH580-VxR-017A-2 16.7 5 R1 Class CC 30A Class J 40A
ACH580-VxR-024A-2 24.2 7.5 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 45A
ACH580-VxR-031A-2 30.8 10 R2 Class T 40A Class J 60A
ACH580-VxR-046A-2 46.2 15 R3 Class T 80A Class J 100A
ACH580-VxR-059A-2 59.4 20 R3 Class T 80A Class J 100A
ACH580-VxR-075A-2 74.8 25 R4 Class T 100A Class J 100A
1) “VxR” represents both VCR and VDR.

Technical data
206 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

460 Volt fuses for vertical enclosures

Nominal Output Internal Drive External Fuse for
Ratings Base Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Drive
Type Code1 Drive Package Frame Max Max
Current Power Class Current Class Current
Size
A HP Rating Rating

460 Volts
ACH580-VxR-02A1-4 2.1 1 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-VxR-03A0-4 3.0 1.5 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-VxR-03A5-4 3.5 2 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-VxR-04A8-4 4.8 3 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-VxR-07A6-4 7.6 5 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 20A
ACH580-VxR-012A-4 12 7.5 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 25A
ACH580-VxR-014A-4 14 10 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 35A
ACH580-VxR-023A-4 23 15 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 45A
ACH580-VxR-027A-4 27 20 R3 Class T 40A Class J 60A
ACH580-VxR-034A-4 34 25 R3 Class T 60A Class J 60A
ACH580-VxR-044A-4 44 30 R3 Class T 60A Class J 60A
ACH580-VxR-052A-4 52 40 R4 Class T 80A Class J 100A
ACH580-VxR-065A-4 65 50 R4 Class T 90A Class J 100A
ACH580-VxR-077A-4 77 60 R4 Class T 100A Class J 100A
1) “VxR” represents both VCR and VDR.

575 Volt fuses for vertical enclosures

Nominal Output Internal Drive External Fuse for
Ratings Base Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Drive
Type Code1 Drive Package Frame
Current Power Max Current Max Current
Size Class Class
Rating Rating
A HP
575 Volts2
ACH580-VxR-02A7-6 2.7 2 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 15A

ACH580-VxR-03A9-6 3.9 3 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 15A

ACH580-VxR-06A1-6 6.1 5 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 15A

ACH580-VxR-09A0-6 9 7.5 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 20A

ACH580-VxR-011A-6 11 10 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 25A

ACH580-VxR-017A-6 17 15 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 40A

ACH580-VxR-022A-6 22 20 R3 Class T 40A Class J 50A

ACH580-VxR-027A-6 27 25 R3 Class T 40A Class J 60A

1) “VxR” represents both VCR and VDR.

2) VCR is rated 600Y/347V. For use on a solidly grounded Wye source only.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 207

208/230 Volt fuses for box enclosures

Nominal Output Internal Drive External Fuse for
Ratings Base Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Drive
Type Code1 Drive Package Max Max
Current Power Frame
Size Class Current Class Current
A HP Rating Rating

208/230 Volts
ACH580-BxR-04A6-2 4.6 1 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-BxR-06A6-2 6.6 1.5 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-BxR-07A5-2 7.5 2 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 20A
ACH580-BxR-10A6-2 10.6 3 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 25A
ACH580-BxR-017A-2 16.7 5 R1 Class CC 30A Class J 40A
ACH580-BxR-024A-2 24.2 7.5 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 60A
ACH580-BxR-031A-2 30.8 10 R2 Class T 40A Class J 60A
ACH580-BxR-046A-2 46.2 15 R3 Class T 80A Class J 100A
ACH580-BxR-059A-2 59.4 20 R3 Class T 80A Class J 100A
ACH580-BxR-075A-2 74.8 25 R4 Class T 100A Class J 100A
ACH580-BxR-088A-2 88 30 R5 Class T 110A Class J 200A
ACH580-BxR-114A-2 114 40 R5 Class T 150A Class J 300A
ACH580-BxR-143A-2 143 50 R6 Class T 200A Class J 350A
ACH580-BxR-169A-2 169 60 R7 Class T 250A Class J 350A
ACH580-BxR-211A-2 211 75 R7 Class T 300A Class J 400A
ACH580-BxR-248A-2 248 1002 R8 Class T 350A Class J 400A
1) “BxR” represents both BCR and BDR.
2) 100 HP @ 230V.

460 Volt fuses for box enclosures

Nominal Output Internal Drive External Fuse for
Ratings Base Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Drive
Type Code1 Drive Package Frame Max Max
Current Power Class Current Class Current
Size
A HP Rating Rating

460 Volts
ACH580-BxR-02A1-4 2.1 1 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-BxR-03A0-4 3.0 1.5 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-BxR-03A5-4 3.5 2 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-BxR-04A8-4 4.8 3 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-BxR-07A6-4 7.6 5 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 20A
ACH580-BxR-012A-4 12 7.5 R1 Class CC 15A Class J 25A
ACH580-BxR-014A-4 14 10 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 35A
ACH580-BxR-023A-4 23 15 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 50A
ACH580-BxR-027A-4 27 20 R3 Class T 40A Class J 60A
ACH580-BxR-034A-4 34 25 R3 Class T 60A Class J 60A
ACH580-BxR-044A-4 44 30 R3 Class T 60A Class J 60A
ACH580-BxR-052A-4 52 40 R4 Class T 80A Class J 100A

Technical data
208 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Nominal Output Internal Drive External Fuse for

Ratings Base Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Drive
Type Code1 Drive Package Frame Max Max
Current Power Class Current Class Current
Size
A HP Rating Rating

ACH580-BxR-065A-4 65 50 R4 Class T 90A Class J 100A

ACH580-BxR-077A-4 77 60 R4 Class T 100A Class J 100A
ACH580-BxR-096A-4 96 75 R5 Class T 150A Class J 225A
ACH580-BxR-124A-4 124 100 R6 Class T 200A Class J 300A
ACH580-BxR-156A-4 156 125 R7 Class T 225A Class J 350A
ACH580-BxR-180A-4 180 150 R7 Class T 300A Class J 350A
ACH580-BxR-240A-4 240 200 R8 Class T 350A Class J 400A
1) “BxR” represents both BCR and BDR.

575 Volt fuses for box enclosures

Nominal Output Internal Drive External Fuse for
Ratings Base Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Drive
Type Code1 Drive Package Frame Max Max
Current Power Class Current Class Current
Size
A HP Rating Rating

575 Volts2
ACH580-BxR-02A7-6 2.7 2 R2 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-BxR-03A9-6 3.9 3 R2 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-BxR-06A1-6 6.1 5 R2 Class CC 15A Class J 15A
ACH580-BxR-09A0-6 9 7.5 R2 Class CC 15A Class J 20A
ACH580-BxR-011A-6 11 10 R2 Class CC 15A Class J 25A
ACH580-BxR-017A-6 17 15 R2 Class CC 30A Class J 40A
ACH580-BxR-022A-6 22 20 R3 Class T 40A Class J 50A
ACH580-BxR-027A-6 27 25 R3 Class T 40A Class J 60A
ACH580-BxR-032A-6 32 30 R3 Class T 40A Class J 60A
ACH580-BxR-041A-6 41 40 R5 Class T 50A Class J 100A
ACH580-BxR-052A-63 52 50 R5 Class T 80A Class J 100A
ACH580-BxR-062A-6 62 60 R5 Class T 80A Class J 150A
ACH580-BxR-077A-6 77 75 R5 Class T 100A Class J 175A
ACH580-BxR-099A-6 99 100 R7 Class T 150A Class J 225A
ACH580-BxR-125A-6 125 125 R7 Class T 175A Class J 300A
ACH580-BxR-144A-6 144 150 R8 Class T 200A Class J 350A
1) “BxR” represents both BCR and BDR.
2) BCR is rated 600Y/347V unless otherwise specified. For use on a solidly grounded Wye source only.
3) BCR supports Delta network configuration.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 209

Motor connections

Motor Terminals
See Wiring overview on page 8.

Bypass Contactors
The bypass circuit available with the ACH580 E-Clipse Bypass includes two
contactors. One contactor is the bypass contactor (2M) that can be used to manually
connect the motor directly to the incoming power line in the event that the ACH580 is
out of service. The other contactor is the ACH580 output contactor (1M) that
disconnects the ACH580 from the motor when the motor is operating in the Bypass
mode. The drive output contactor and the bypass contactor are interlocked to
prevent “back feeding,” applying line voltage to the ACH580 output terminals.

Motor Overload Protection

Motor overload protection is set using the ACH580 drive control panel. Refer to the
ACH580 HVAC control program firmware manual (3AXD50000027537). The
overload protection parameters set on the ACH580 drive are used by both the drive
and the bypass.
In the Drive mode, motor overload protection is provided by the ACH580.
In the Bypass mode, motor overload protection is provided by the bypass control
board.

WARNING! If power is applied and the switches and contacts in the control circuit
are commanding the motor to run, the motor will start as soon as the overload
protection is reset.
Use caution when resetting the overload protection to make sure it is safe to start the
motor.

Maximum recommended motor cable length

Operational functionality and motor cable length
The drive is designed to operate with optimum performance with maximum motor
cable lengths found in the ACH580-01 Hardware Manual (3AXD50000044839) or
ACH580 Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual (3AXD50000049127).

Technical data
210 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

E-Clipse Bypass control unit connections (RBCU)

Control cable requirements for connections to the E-Clipse Bypass (RBCU) (X2) are the
same as those described for the ACH580 control panel (X1). Refer to the ACH580-01
Hardware Manual (3AXD50000044839) for additional information.

Bypass control unit connection specifications

Control Connection Specifications
Digital Inputs Digital input impedance 1.5 k. Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V AC/DC
• Max. contact voltage: 30 V DC, 250 V AC
• Max. contact current / power: 6 A, 30 V DC; 1500 VA, 250 V AC
Relays • Max. continuous current: 2 A rms (cos . = 1), 1 A rms (cos. = 0.4)
(Digital Outputs) • Minimum load: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
• Contact material: Silver-nickel (AgN)
• Isolation between relay digital outputs, test voltage: 2.5 kV rms, 1 minute

WARNING! Relay coils generate noise spikes

0.47 uF Control
in response to steps in applied power. To avoid AC Coil Panel
drive damage from such spikes, all AC relay 33 Ohm Inputs
coils mounted across control panel inputs Typical R-C
Snubber
require R-C snubbers, and all DC relay coils
mounted across control panel outputs require + Control
DC Coil Diode Panel
diodes – see figure. - Outputs

Bypass control unit terminals

The following table provides specifications for the E-Clipse Bypass’s control unit
terminals.
Control
Frame Size Maximum Wire Size Torque
mm2 AWG N•m lb-ft
All 0.12…2.5 26…14 0.4 0.3

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 211

Dimensional references
The following tables contain dimensional references that identify the dimensional
information applying to a given type code.
Vertical enclosures – E-Clipse bypass drive with circuit breaker

Nominal Output Ratings

Frame Dim
Type Code
Package Size Ref
Drive Current Power
A
HP

U1 = 208 to 240V. Power ratings are valid at nominal output voltage UN = 208/230 V 60 Hz
ACH580-VxR-04A6-2 4.6 1 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-06A6-2 6.6 1.5 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-07A5-2 7.5 2 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-10A6-2 10.6 3 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-017A-2 16.7 5 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-024A-2 24.2 7.5 R2 Vx1-2
ACH580-VxR-031A-2 30.8 10 R2 Vx1-3
ACH580-VxR-046A-2 46.2 15 R3 Vx1-3
ACH580-VxR-059A-2 59.4 20 R3 Vx1-4
ACH580-VxR-075A-2 74.8 25 R4 Vx1-4
1) “VxR” represents VCR and VDR.

Nominal Output Ratings

Frame Dim
Type Code Package Size
Drive Current Ref
A Power
HP

U1 = 440 to 480V. Power ratings are valid at nominal output voltage UN = 460 V 60 Hz
ACH580-VxR-02A1-4 2.1 1 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-03A0-4 3 1.5 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-03A5-4 3.5 2 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-04A8-4 4.8 3 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-07A6-4 7.6 5 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-012A-4 12 7.5 R1 Vx1-1
ACH580-VxR-014A-4 14 10 R2 Vx1-2
ACH580-VxR-023A-4 23 15 R2 Vx1-2
ACH580-VxR-027A-4 27 20 R3 Vx1-3
ACH580-VxR-034A-4 34 25 R3 Vx1-3
ACH580-VxR-044A-4 44 30 R3 Vx1-3
ACH580-VxR-052A-4 52 40 R4 Vx1-4
ACH580-VxR-065A-4 65 50 R4 Vx1-4
ACH580-VxR-077A-4 77 60 R4 Vx1-4
1) “VxR” represents VCR and VDR.

Technical data
212 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Nominal Output Ratings

Frame Dim
Type Code1
Package Size Ref
Drive Current Power
A
HP

U1 = 500 to 600V. Power ratings are valid at nominal output voltage UN = 575 V 60 Hz2
ACH580-VxR-02A7-6 2.7 2 R2 Vx1-2
ACH580-VxR-03A9-6 3.9 3 R2 Vx1-2
ACH580-VxR-06A1-6 6.1 5 R2 Vx1-2
ACH580-VxR-09A0-6 9 7.5 R2 Vx1-2
ACH580-VxR-011A-6 11 10 R2 Vx1-2
ACH580-VxR-017A-6 17 15 R2 Vx1-2
ACH580-VxR-022A-6 22 20 R3 Vx1-3
ACH580-VxR-027A-6 27 25 R3 Vx1-3
ACH580-VxR-032A-6 32 30 R3 Vx1-3
1) “VxR” represents VCR and VDR.
2) VCR is rated 600Y/347V. For use on a solidly grounded Wye source only.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 213

Standard enclosures – E-Clipse bypass drive with circuit breaker

Nominal Output
Ratings UL (NEMA) UL (NEMA) UL (NEMA)
Frame Type 12 Type 3R
Type Code1 Package Size Type 1 Dim (+B056) Dim (+B058)
Current Power Ref
A Ref Dim Ref
HP
U1 = 208 to 240V. Power ratings are valid at nominal output voltage UN = 208 V 60 Hz
ACH580-BxR-04A6-2 4.6 1 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-06A6-2 6.6 1.5 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-07A5-2 7.5 2 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-10A6-2 10.6 3 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-017A-2 16.7 5 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-024A-2 24.2 7.5 R2 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-031A-2 30.8 10 R2 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-046A-2 46.2 15 R3 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-059A-2 59.4 20 R3 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-075A-2 74.8 25 R4 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-088A-2 88 30 R5 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
ACH580-BxR-114A-2 114 40 R5 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
ACH580-BxR-143A-2 143 50 R6 Bx1-3 Bx12-3 Consult
ACH580-BxR-169A-2 169 60 R7 Bx1-3 Bx12-3 factory

ACH580-BxR-211A-2 211 75 R7 Bx1-3 Bx12-3

2
ACH580-BxR-248A-2 248 100 R8 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
1) “BxR” represents BCR and BDR.
2) 100 HP @ 230V

Nominal Output
Ratings UL (NEMA) UL (NEMA) UL (NEMA)
Frame Type 12 Type 3R
Type Code1 Package Size Type 1 Dim (+B056) Dim (+B058)
Current Power Ref
A Ref Dim Ref
HP
U1 = 440 to 480V. Power ratings are valid at nominal output voltage UN = 460 V 60 Hz
ACH580-BxR-02A1-4 2.1 1 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-03A0-4 3 1.5 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-03A5-4 3.5 2 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-04A8-4 4.8 3 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-07A6-4 7.6 5 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-012A-4 12 7.5 R1 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-014A-4 14 10 R2 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-023A-4 23 15 R2 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-027A-4 27 20 R3 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-034A-4 34 25 R3 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-044A-4 44 30 R3 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-052A-4 52 40 R4 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-065A-4 65 50 R4 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-077A-4 77 60 R4 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2

Technical data
214 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

ACH580-BxR-096A-4 96 75 R5 Bx1-3 Bx12-3

ACH580-BxR-124A-4 124 100 R6 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
ACH580-BxR-156A-4 156 125 R7 Bx1-3 Bx12-3 Consult
factory
ACH580-BxR-180A-4 180 150 R7 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
ACH580-BxR-240A-4 240 200 R8 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
1) “BxR” represents BCR and BDR.

Nominal Output
Ratings UL (NEMA) UL (NEMA)
UL (NEMA)
Type Code1 Frame Type 1 Dim Type 12 Type 3R
Current Package Size (+B056) Dim (+B058)
Power Ref Ref Dim Ref
A HP
U1 = 575 to 600V. Power ratings are valid at nominal output voltage UN = 575 V 60 Hz2
ACH580-BxR-02A7-6 2.7 2 R2 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-03A9-6 3.9 3 R2 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-06A1-6 6.1 5 R2 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-09A0-6 9 7.5 R2 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-011A-6 11 10 R2 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-017A-6 17 15 R2 Bx1-1 Bx12-1 Bx3R-1
ACH580-BxR-022A-6 22 20 R3 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-027A-6 27 25 R3 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-032A-6 32 30 R3 Bx1-2 Bx12-2 Bx3R-2
ACH580-BxR-041A-6 41 40 R5 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
3
ACH580-BxR-052A-6 52 50 R5 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
ACH580-BxR-062A-6 62 60 R6 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
Consult
ACH580-BxR-077A-6 77 75 R6 Bx1-3 Bx12-3 factory
ACH580-BxR-099A-6 99 100 R7 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
ACH580-BxR-125A-6 125 125 R7 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
ACH580-BxR-144A-6 144 150 R8 Bx1-3 Bx12-3
1) “BxR” represents BCR and BDR.
2) BCR is rated 600Y/347V unless otherwise specified. For use on a solidly grounded Wye source only.
3) BCR supports Delta network configuration.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 215

Dimensions and weights 580-01

Dimensions: ACH580-VxR UL (NEMA) Type 1, R1 through R4 Frame Size

Wall Mount (Vx1-1 - Vx1-4)
W D

Drawing is not for engineering purposes.

Height (H) Width (W) Depth (D) Weight Dimensional

Frame
in mm in mm in mm lb kg Drawings

Vx1-1 40.18 1020 5.39 136 10.55 268 30.0 13.6 3AXD50000037428
Vx1-2 44.10 1120 5.39 136 10.77 273 50.7 23.0 3AXD50000037429
Vx1-3 38.81 985 8.44 214 10.90 276 59.5 27.0 3AXD50000153787
Vx1-4 47.93 1217 8.44 214 12.00 304 86.0 39.0 3AXD50000153770
*Keep a minimum of 50 mm (2 in) of free space on each side and 200 mm (8 in) of free space above
and below all units from non-heat producing sources. Double these distances from heat producing
sources.

Technical data
216 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Dimensions ACH580-BxR UL (NEMA) Type 1, R1 through R8 Frame Size

Wall Mount (Bx1-1) Wall Mount (Bx1-2 to Bx1-3)

W W D
D

BYPASS CONTROL
BYPASS CONTROL
ESC ENTER
ESC ENTER

ENABLE
ENABLE

H
SELECTED HAND
FAULTED SELECTED HAND
FAULTED

H
DRIVE BYPASS
OFF/RESET DRIVE BYPASS
OFF/RESET
AUTO
AUTO
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR RUN

Drawing is not for engineering purposes.

Height (H) Width (W) Depth (D) Weight Dimensional

Frame
in mm in mm in mm lb kg Drawings

Bx1-1 33.16 842 17.63 447 13.90 353 84.0 38.1 3AXD50000234028
Bx1-2 40.60 1030 20.50 521 15.30 388 139.0 63.0 3AXD50000234639
Bx1-3 47.72 1212 28.24 717 19.04 483 448.0 203.0 3AXD50000203253
*Keep a minimum of 50 mm (2 in) of free space on each side and 200 mm (8 in) of free space above
and below all units from non-heat producing sources. Double these distances from heat producing
sources.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 217

Dimensions: ACH580-BxR UL (NEMA) Type 12, R1 through R8 Frame Size

Wall Mount (Bx12-1 - Bx12-3)
W D

H ESC
BYPASS CONTROL

ENABLE

SELECTED
FAULTED
ENTER

HAND

DRIVE BYPASS
OFF/RESET

AUTO
MOTOR RUN

Drawing is not for engineering purposes.

Height (H) Width (W) Depth (D) Weight Dimensional

Frame
in mm in mm in mm lb kg Drawings

Bx12-1 33.16 842 17.63 447 13.90 353 84.0 38.1 3AXD50000234028
Bx12-2 40.60 1030 20.50 521 15.30 388 139.0 63.0 3AXD50000235193
Bx12-3 54.17 1376 28.24 717 19.04 483 448.0 203.0 3AXD50000211159
*Keep a minimum of 50 mm (2 in) of free space on each side and 200 mm (8 in.) of free space above
and below all units from non-heat producing sources. Double these distances from heat producing
sources.

Technical data
218 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Dimensions: ACH580-BxR UL (NEMA) Type 3R, R1 through R4 Frame Size

Wall Mount (Bx3R-1 - Bx3R-2)

W D

Drawing is not for engineering purposes.

Height (H) Width (W) Depth (D) Weight Dimensional

Frame
in mm in mm in mm lb kg Drawings

Bx3R-1 33.30 846 17.70 449 14.00 355 83.8 38.0 3AXD50000234622
Bx3R-2 40.60 1032 20.10 511 15.40 391 193.0 88.0 3AXD50000235315
*Keep a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of free space on each side and 200 mm (8 in.) of free space above
and below all units from non-heat producing sources. Double these distances from heat producing
sources.

Note: UL (NEMA) Type 3R, Bx3R-1...Bx3R-2 enclosures are designed to be

mounted on a wall. Mounting these 3R enclosures on an open rack system requires
the use of the supplied 3R enclosure back plates to maintain 3R integrity.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 219

Applicable standards
E-Clipse bypass compliance with the following standards is identified by the
standards “marks” on the drive type code label.
Mark Applicable Standards
UL 508A UL Standard for Industrial Control Panels

Compliance is valid with the following provisions:

• The motor and control cables are chosen as specified in this manual.
• The installation rules of this manual are followed.
Additional ACH580-01 standards information can be located in the Technical data/
applicable standards section of the ACH580 Hardware Manual
(3AXD50000044839).

Technical data
220 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Technical data
 ACH580-PCR/PDR Packaged Drives
with Disconnect
1…200 HP

 2018 ABB. All Rights Reserved.

ACH580-PCR/PDR Packaged Drives with Disconnect 1…200 HP

ACH580-PCR/PDR Packaged Drives with Disconnect 1…200 HP
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 223

Installation

Installation
This information is unique to ACH580 input disconnect configurations (PCR or PDR).
The ACH580 with Input Disconnect is an ACH580 AC adjustable frequency drive
packaged with an input disconnect switch or circuit breaker. Refer to the Preparing
for installation instructions on page 226, for all other information. Failure to observe
the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard.

WARNING! Before you begin read Safety instructions on page iv.

WARNING! When the ACH580 with Input Disconnect is connected to the line power,
the Motor Terminals T1, T2, and T3 are live even if the motor is not running. Do not
make any connections when the ACH580 with Input Disconnect is connected to the
line. Disconnect and lock out power to the drive before servicing the drive. Failure to
disconnect power may cause serious injury or death.

Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding. Failure to observe

the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard.

WARNING!
• Metal shavings or debris in the enclosure can damage electrical equipment and
create a hazardous condition. Where parts, such as conduit plates require cutting
or drilling, first remove the part. If that is not practical, cover nearby electrical
components to protect them from all shavings or debris.
• Do not connect or disconnect input or output power wiring, or control wires, when
power is applied.
• Never connect line voltage to drive output Terminals T1, T2, and T3.
• Do not make any voltage tolerance tests (Hi Pot or Megger) on any part of the
unit. Disconnect motor wires before taking any measurements in the motor or
motor wires.
Make sure that power factor correction capacitors are not connected between the
drive and the motor.

Input disconnect configuration

The ACH580 with Input Disconnect is an ACH580 AC adjustable frequency drive
packaged with an input disconnect switch or circuit breaker, and with a door
interlocked, external operating handle. The operating handle can be padlocked in
the OFF position (padlock not supplied). Enclosure options are UL (NEMA) Type 1,
UL (NEMA) Type 12, and UL (NEMA) Type 3R.

Installation
224 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

The following is a typical power diagram.

Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker
Drive With Input Disconnect

3 Phase ACH580
Drive Motor
Input Power 3 3

Drive Input
Fuses

Application
This manual contains supplemental information that is unique to ACH580 input
disconnect configurations (PCR or PDR). Refer to the ACH580-01 Hardware Manual
(3AXD50000044839) for all other information.
The following shows the front view of the ACH580 Drive with Input Disconnect
standard configurations, and identifies the major components.
UL (NEMA) Type 1 and UL (NEMA) Type 12
Hinged Door Wall Mount Enclosures

UL (NEMA) Type 1and UL (NEMA) Type 12 ACH580 Drive

Control Panel
Vertical Construction
Enclosures

Operating Handle
for Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker

UL (NEMA) Type 3R
ACH580 Drive
Control Panel with
Hinged Cover

UL (NEMA) Type 3R Enclosures

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 225

Installation flow chart

The installation of Input Disconnect configurations for ACH580 drives follows the
outline below. The steps must be carried out in the order shown. At the right of each
step are references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of
the unit.

Note: References in the middle column below are to the ACH580-01 Hardware
Manual (3AXD50000044839). References in the third column below are to this
manual.

Reference in ACH580-01
Additional References in the
Hardware Manual
Task ACH580-01 Hardware Manual
(3AXD50000044839)
(3AXD50000044839), including:
Installation section
PREPARE for Preparing for installation in • Drive identification
installation the ACH580-01 Hardware • Suitable mounting/venting
Manual
(3AXD50000044839) Note: Some instructions in this
document vary, depending on the
drive’s frame size.

PREPARE the mounting PREPARE the mounting --

location location

REMOVE the front cover REMOVE the front cover --

MOUNT the drive MOUNT the drive --

INSTALL wiring Wiring overview and Install Installing the wiring (ACH580-01
the wiring Hardware Manual
[3AXD50000044839]).

CHECK installation Check installation --

RE-INSTALL the cover Re-install cover --

APPLY power Apply power --

START-UP -- --

For more details, refer to the ACH580-01 Hardware Manual (3AXD50000044839).

Installation
226 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Preparing for installation

Drive identification
Drive label
To identify the type of device you are installing, refer to the type code number on the
device identification label.
• Wall mounting base drives – label attached on the side surface of the enclosure.
• Packaged drive with screw cover – label on side surface of the enclosure.
• Enclosure with hinged cover/door – label on inside surface of the cover/door.
• 3R enclosure with hinged cover/door – label attached to outside surface on the
left side of enclosure.
Type code
Use the following to interpret the type code found on the identification label.
ACH580-PCR-012A-4 +…+…
AC, HVAC Drive = 580 Product Series
Construction
01 = Base Drive
BCR = E-Clipse Bypass with circuit breaker
BDR = E-Clipse Bypass with disconnect switch
PCR = Packaged Drive with circuit breaker
PDR = Packaged Drive with disconnect switch
VCR = Vertical bypass with circuit breaker
VDR = Vertical bypass with disconnect switch
VFD output current rating (See ratings chart for details)
Voltage rating
2 = 208…240 VAC
4 = 440…480 VAC
6 = 575…600 VAC
Enclosure protection class
No specification = UL (NEMA) Type 1
+B056 = UL (NEMA) Type 12
+B058 = UL (NEMA) Type 3R
Power options
+E213 = Line reactor (PxR or BxR Configurations)
+F267 = Service switch (VxR or BxR Configurations)
Input/Output option modules
+L501 = Ext 24V DC/AC and digital I/O Extension
+L512 = 115/230 V digital input interface
+L523 = Ext 24V and isolated PTC Interface
Fieldbus adaptors
+K451 = DeviceNet Adapter
+K452 = LonWorks Adapter
+K454 = Profibus Adapter
+K462 = ControlNet Adapter
+K465 = BACnet/IP (2-port) Adapter (PxR or -01 configurations)
+K475 = Ethernet Adapter
Keypad
+J429 = Control panel with Bluetooth® interface

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 227

Ratings and frame size

The charts in the Ratings section of the ACH580-01 Hardware Manual
(3AXD50000044839) list technical specifications, and identify the drive’s frame size.

Note: Some instructions in this document vary, depending on the drive’s frame size.
To read the Ratings table, you need the “Output current rating” entry from the Type
code (see page 226).

Suitable mounting location

For selecting a suitable mounting location for PCR/PDR configurations, refer to:
• The ACH580-01 Hardware Manual (3AXD50000044839), and
• The Technical data section on page 237 in this manual for the appropriate
information on dimensions and weights
• UL (NEMA) Type 3R, Px3R-1...Px3R-4 enclosures are designed to be mounted
on a wall. Mounting these 3R enclosures on an open rack system requires the
use of the supplied 3R enclosure back plates to maintain 3R integrity.

Installing the wiring

•

Wiring requirements
The wiring requirements apply to all ACH580 drives. In particular:
• Use separate, metal conduit runs for the following different classes of wiring:
– Input power wiring.
– Motor wiring.
– Control/communications wiring.
• Properly and individually ground the drive, the motor and cable shields.

Installation
228 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Connection diagrams – Vertical Packaged Drive with input disconnect

ACH580 Vertical Packaged Drive units are configured for wiring access from the
bottom only. The following figures show the layout and wiring connection points.
Refer to the ACH580-01 Hardware Manual (3AXD50000044839) for control
connections to the drive. Maintain appropriate separation of control and power wires.

ACH580
Drive

Motor
Terminals

Motor
Ground Lug

Fuses

Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker

Input
Ground Lug
Input Power
Terminals

P1/P2
(Px1-1, Px12-1, Px1-2, Px12-2)

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 229

ACH580
Drive

Motor
Terminals

Motor
Ground Lug

Fuses

Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker

Input
Terminals
Input
Ground Lug

P3/P4
(Px1-3, Px12-3, Px1-4, Px12-4)

Installation
230 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Connection diagrams – Box Packaged Drive with input disconnect

ACH580 Packaged Drive units are configured for wiring access from the top (for UL
(NEMA) Type 1 and 12) and from the bottom (for UL (NEMA) Type 3R). The
following figures show the layout and wiring connection points. Refer to the
ACH580-01 Hardware Manual (3AXD50000044839) for control connections to the
drive.

User Power
Cable Guides

ACH580
Drive

Fuses

Disconnect Switch Motor

or Circuit Breaker Terminals
Motor
Ground Lug

Input
Terminals

Line Reactor
Input (Optional)
Ground Lug

PB1
(PxB1-1, PxB12-1)

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 231

User Power
Cable Guides

ACH580
Drive

Disconnect Switch
or Circuit Breaker

Motor
Input Terminals
Ground Lug

Motor
Input Ground Lug
Terminals
Line Reactor
(Optional)

Fuses

PB2
(PxB1-2, PxB12-2)

Installation
232 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Motor
Ground Lug

Input
Ground Lug ACH580 Drive

User
Power Cable
Guide

Input
Terminals

Disconnect
Switch or Motor
Circuit Terminals
Breaker

User
Power Cable Fuses
Guide

Motor
Ground Lug

PB3
(PxB1-3, PxB12-3)

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 233

RHTR Temperature Heater ON Heater OFF

HI/LO Jumber (X1) Temperature Temperature
Default Setting
14.4 °C 21.4 °C
(X1 jumper in LO
58 °F 70.5 °F
position)
Alternate Setting
17.8 °C 24.4 °C
(X1 jumper in HI
64 °F 76.5 °F
position)

The alternate (HI) setting further reduces the likeli-

hood of condensate in high humidity environments.

Fuses ACH580 Drive

Service Motor
Switch Terminals
(Optional)
Motor
Ground Lug
Disconnect
Switch or
Circuit
Breaker

Input
Terminals

Motor
Input Line Reactor Terminals
Ground Lug (Optional) T1 T2 T3

Output
Ground Lug

PB1/PB2
(PxB3R-1, PxB3R-2)

Installation
234 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Installation
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 235

Maintenance

Maintenance

Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB for ACH580
enclosures.
Maintenance Configuration Interval Instruction
Check/replace hinged Hinged door wall Check every Enclosure air filter replacement
door wall mount mount UL (NEMA) 3 months. Replace – UL (NEMA) Type 12 hinged
enclosure inlet air filter Type 12 enclosures as needed. door wall mount enclosures on
page 235.

Enclosure air filter replacement – UL (NEMA) Type 12 hinged door

wall mount enclosures
Filter material
Material Filter Type
American Air Filter (358-35-06A-12A) POLYKLEON WHITE 12.7mm (1/2 in.) X 152.4mm (6 in.) X
304.6mm (12 in.) stk.

This procedure applies to drive with input disconnect configurations in UL (NEMA)

Type 12 hinged door wall mount enclosures. This filter is located at the bottom of the
enclosure. Use the following procedure to check and replace filters.
1. On the enclosure, remove the screws holding the filter bracket in place.
2. Remove the filter kit from the enclosure.

Enclosure Door
Back of
Enclosure

Bottom of Enclosure

Mounting
Screws (4X)
Filter Bracket

Maintenance
236 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

3. Lift the filter out of the filter bracket and replace as appropriate.
4. With the filter in the filter bracket, reinstall filter kit onto enclosure.
5. Replace the mounting screws. Tighten to the recommended torque of 2 N•m
(1.47 ft-lbs) per installation instruction 3AXD50000221370.

Maintenance
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 237

Technical data

Power connection terminals

The following tables show maximum wire size and required tightening torque for
incoming power, grounding and motor terminals.
Output
208/230 Volt Ratings Maximum Power Wiring Data

Base Circuit Ground

Drive Disconnect Ground
Breaker Circuit Disconnect Lugs
Frame Breaker Switch Switch Lugs
UL Motor UL
Type Code1 A HP Size UL (NEMA) UL
(NEMA) UL (NEMA) UL (NEMA) Terminals (NEMA)
Type 1 Type 3R Type 1 Type 3R Type 1 (NEMA)
and 12 Type 3R
and 12 and 12
ACH580-PxR-04A6-2 4.6 1 R1
ACH580-PxR-06A6-2 6.6 1.5 R1 #10 #10 #10 #10
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs #10
ACH580-PxR-07A5-2 7.5 2 R1 0.7 ft-lbs
ACH580-PxR-10A6-2 10.6 3 R1
ACH580-PxR-017A-2 16.7 5 R1 #6 #6 #6 #6
ACH580-PxR-024A-2 24.2 7.5 R2 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#6 #2 #2
#4 #4 #4 #4 1.1 ft-lbs 50 in-lbs 50 in-lbs
ACH580-PxR-031A-2 30.8 10 R2
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#2 #2 #2 #2
ACH580-PxR-046A-2 46.2 15 R3 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs #2
#1 #1 #1 #1 2.6 ft-lbs
ACH580-PxR-059A-2 59.4 20 R3
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#1/0 #1/0 #1/0 #1/0 #1
ACH580-PxR-075A-2 74.8 25 R4
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 3.0 ft-lbs
#2/0 #2/0
ACH580-PxR-088A-2 88 30 R5 124 in-lbs 275 in-lbs #2/0
#1/0 #4/0 4.1 ft-lbs
ACH580-PxR-114A-2 114 40 R5
124 in-lbs 275 in-lbs
#3/0 300 MCM
ACH580-PxR-143A-2 143 50 R6
124 in-lbs 200 MCM 22.1 ft-lbs
#4/0 Consult 275 in-lbs Consult #1/0 Consult
ACH580-PxR-169A-2 169 60 R7 124 in-lbs Factory Factory 50 in-lbs Factory
500 MCM
2 X 500 29.5 ft-lbs
ACH580-PxR-211A-2 211 75 R7 MCM
274 in-lbs 2 X 500
MCM
373 274 in-lbs 2 x 300
ACH580-PxR-248A-2 248 1002 R8 MCM MCM
274 in-lbs 29.6 ft-lbs
1) “PxR” represents both PCR and PDR.
2) 100 HP @ 230V.

Technical data
238 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

460 Volt Output Maximum Power Wiring Data

Ratings
Base Circuit Ground
Drive Circuit Disconnect Ground
Breaker Breaker Switch Disconnec Lugs Lugs
1
Frame UL t Switch Motor UL
Type Code A HP Size UL UL (NEMA) UL
(NEMA) (NEMA) Type 1 UL (NEMA) Terminals (NEMA) (NEMA)
Type 1 Type 3R Type 1
and 12 Type 3R and 12 and 12 Type 3R

ACH580-PxR-02A1-4 2.1 1 R1
ACH580-PxR-03A0-4 3 1.5 R1
ACH580-PxR-03A5-4 3.5 2 R1 #12 #12 #10 #10 #10
ACH580-PxR-04A8-4 4.8 3 R1 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 0.7 ft-lbs

ACH580-PxR-07A6-4 7.6 5 R1
ACH580-PxR-012A-4 12 7.5 R1

ACH580-PxR-014A-4 14 10 R2 #8 #8
#10 #10 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs #6
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs #6 #6 1.1 ft-lbs
ACH580-PxR-023A-4 23 15 R2 #2 #2
55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
50 in-lbs 50 in-lbs
#8 #8 #4 #4
ACH580-PxR-027A-4 27 20 R3 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#2
ACH580-PxR-034A-4 34 25 R3 #6 #3 #3 2.6 ft-lbs
ACH580-PxR-044A-4 44 30 R3 62 in-lbs #6 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
62 in-lbs
ACH580-PxR-052A-4 52 40 R4 #1/0 #2 #2
124 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#1 #1 #1
ACH580-PxR-065A-4 65 50 R4
#1/0 #1/0 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 3.0 ft-lbs
124 in-lbs 124 in-lbs #1/0 #1/0
ACH580-PxR-077A-4 77 60 R4 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs

ACH580-PxR-096A-4 96 75 R5 #1/0 #3/0 #2/0

124 in-lbs 275 in-lbs 4.1 ft-lbs
#2/0 250 MCM 300 MCM
ACH580-PxR-124A-4 124 100 R6
124 in-lbs 275 in-lbs 22.1 ft-lbs
#3/0
ACH580-PxR-156A-4 156 125 R7 124 in-lbs Consult Consult 3 x #3/0 Consult
Factory 300 MCM Factory 500 MCM 250 in-lbs Factory
#4/0 275 in-lbs 29.5 ft-lbs
ACH580-PxR-180A-4 180 150 R7
124 in-lbs
350 2 x 500 2 x 300
ACH580-PxR-240A-4 240 200 R8 MCM MCM MCM
274 in-lbs 274 in-lbs 29.6 ft-lbs
1) “PxR” represents both PCR and PDR.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 239

575 Volt Output Range Maximum Power Wiring Data

Base Circuit
Drive Ground
Breaker Circuit Disconnect Disconnect ACH580 Lugs Ground
Frame UL Breaker UL Switch UL Switch Lugs
Type Code1, 2 A HP Size Motor UL (NEMA)
(NEMA) (NEMA) (NEMA) Type UL (NEMA) Terminals Type 1 UL (NEMA)
Type 1 Type 3R 1 and 12 Type 3R and 12 Type 3R
and 12

#10 #10
ACH580-PxR-02A7-6 2.7 2 R2 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs

#12 #12
ACH580-PxR-03A9-6 3.9 3 R2 62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs #10 #10
55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs #6
ACH580-PxR-06A1-6 6.1 5 R2 1.1 ft-lbs
ACH580-PxR-09A0-6 9 7.5 R2 #10 #10
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs #2
50 in-lbs
ACH580-PxR-011A-6 11 10 R2

ACH580-PxR-017A-6 17 15 R2
#6 #6 #6 #6
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs #2
ACH580-PxR-022A-6 22 20 R3 50 in-lbs
#2
ACH580-PxR-027A-6 27 25 R3 #4 #4 #4 #4 2.6 ft-lbs
62 in-lbs 62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
ACH580-PxR-032A-6 32 30 R3

ACH580-PxR-041A-6 41 40 R5 #3 #3
62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs
#2/0
4.1 ft-lbs
ACH580-PxR-052A-6 3 52 50 R5 #2 #2
62 in-lbs 55 in-lbs

ACH580-PxR-062A-6 62 60 R6 #1 #1
62 in-lbs 275 in-lbs
300 MCM
22.1 ft-lbs
#1/0 Consult #1/0 Consult Consult
ACH580-PxR-077A-6 77 75 R6 62 in-lbs 275 in-lbs
Factory Factory Factory

ACH580-PxR-099A-6 99 100 R7 #3/0 #3/0

124 in-lbs 275 in-lbs 3 x #3/0
500 MCM 250 in-lbs
29.5 ft-lbs
ACH580-PxR-125A-6 125 125 R7 250 MCM
275 in-lbs
250 MCM
124 in-lbs 2 x 300
ACH580-PxR-144A-6 144 150 R8 300 MCM MCM
275 in-lbs 29.6 ft-lbs
1) “PxR” represents both PCR and PDR.
2) PCR is rated 600Y/347V unless otherwise specified. For use on a solidly grounded Wye source only.
3) PCR supports Delta network configuration.

Technical data
240 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Branch circuit protection

Input power is connected to the ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass through a door
interlocked disconnect switch or circuit breaker. Neither of these inputs are fused.
The branch circuit that provides power to the ACH580 with E-Clipse Bypass with
disconnect switch must include the specified external fuses to provide short circuit
and ground fault protection for the motor in the bypass mode.
When connected to a 240V or 480V power source, the ACH580 with E-Clipse
Bypass with the circuit breaker option is suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. When connected to a
600V power source, PCR configurations are suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes (75-150 HP), and not
more than 25,000 RMS symmetrical amperes (2-60 HP).
Fuses

Note: The UL listed drive fuses in the table are provided in the purchased product.
• Replacement fuses are required to be of the same class, current rating, and
voltage rating. Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they are 600V
rated and meet the specifications given in the table.
• Fuses with higher current rating than specified must not be used.

208 Volt fuses for packaged drive

208 Volt Nominal Output

Range Internal Drive External Fuse for
Base
Drive Packag Drive Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Current e Power Frame
Type Code1 Size
Current Max Current
A HP Class Class
Rating Rating
ACH580-PxR-04A6-2 4.6 1 R1 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-06A6-2 6.6 1.5 R1 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-07A5-2 7.5 2 R1 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-10A6-2 10.6 3 R1 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-017A-2 16.7 5 R1 Class CC 30A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-024A-2 24.2 7.5 R2 Class CC 30A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-031A-2 30.8 10 R2 Class T 40A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-046A-2 46.2 15 R3 Class T 80A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-059A-2 59.4 20 R3 Class T 80A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-075A-2 74.8 25 R4 Class T 100A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-088A-2 88 30 R5 Class T 110A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-114A-2 114 40 R5 Class T 150A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-144A-2 143 50 R6 Class T 200A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-169A-2 169 60 R7 Class T 250A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-211A-2 211 75 R7 Class T 300A Class J or RK1 400A
ACH580-PxR-248A-2 248 1002 R8 Class T 350A Class J or RK1 400A
1) “PxR” represents both PCR and PDR.
2) 100 HP @ 230V

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 241

460 Volt fuses for packaged drive

480 Volt Nominal Output

Range Internal Drive External Fuse for
Base
Drive Package Drive Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Current Power Frame
Type Code1 Size
Current Max Current
A HP Class Class
Rating Rating
ACH580-PxR-02A1-4 2.1 1 R1 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-03A0-4 3 1.5 R1 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-03A5-4 3.5 2 R1 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-04A8-4 4.8 3 R1 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-07A6-4 7.6 5 R1 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-012A-4 12 7.5 R1 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-014A-4 14 10 R2 Class CC 30A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-023A-4 23 15 R2 Class CC 30A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-027A-4 27 20 R3 Class T 40A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-034A-4 34 25 R3 Class T 60A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-044A-4 44 30 R3 Class T 60A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-052A-4 52 40 R4 Class T 80A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-065A-4 65 50 R4 Class T 90A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-077A-4 77 60 R4 Class T 100A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-096A-4 96 75 R5 Class T 150A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-124A-4 124 100 R6 Class T 200A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-156A-4 156 125 R7 Class T 225A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-180A-4 180 150 R7 Class T 300A N/A N/A
Class J
ACH580-PxR-240A-4 240 200 R8 Class T 350A or RK1 400A Max

1) “PxR” represents both PCR and PDR.

575 Volt fuses for packaged drive

Nominal Output
575 Volt Range
Base Internal Drive External Fuse for
Drive Package Drive Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Current Power Frame
Type Code1, 2 Size
A HP Class Current Class Max Current
Rating Rating
ACH580-PxR-02A7-6 2.7 2 R2 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-03A9-6 3.9 3 R2 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-06A1-6 3.5 6.1 R2 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-09A0-6 4.8 9 R2 Class CC 15A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-011A-6 7.6 11 R2 Class CC 30A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-017A-6 17 15 R2 Class CC 30A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-022A-6 22 20 R3 Class T 40A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-027A-6 27 25 R3 Class T 40A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-032A-6 32 30 R3 Class T 40A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-041A-6 41 40 R5 Class T 50A N/A N/A

Technical data
242 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Nominal Output
575 Volt
Range Internal Drive External Fuse for
Base
Drive Package Drive Fuse Rating Disconnect Option
Current Power Frame
Type Code1, 2 Size
Current Max Current
A HP Class Rating Class Rating
ACH580-PxR-052A-63 52 50 R5 Class T 80A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-062A-6 62 60 R5 Class T 80A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-077A-6 77 75 R5 Class T 100A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-099A-6 99 100 R7 Class T 150A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-125A-6 125 125 R7 Class T 175A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-144A-6 144 150 R8 Class T 200A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-180A-4 180 150 R2 Class T 300A N/A N/A
ACH580-PxR-240A-4 240 200 R2 Class T 350A Class J 400A Max
or RK1
1) “PxR” represents both PCR and PDR.
2) PCR is rated 600Y/347V unless otherwise specified. For use on a solidly grounded Wye source only.
3) PCR supports Delta network configuration.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 243

Dimensions and weights

Mounting dimensions
Dimensions: ACH580-PxR UL (NEMA) Type 1

W D W D

H H

Px1-1 to Px1-4 PxB1-1 to PxB1-4

Height (H) Width (W) Depth (D) Weight Dimensional

Frame
in mm in mm in mm lb kg Drawings

Px1-1 24.60 624 6.34 160 12.42 315 18.1 8.2 3AXD50000220946
Px1-2 28.49 723 6.34 161 12.63 320 22.0 10.0 3AXD50000221738
Px1-3 34.86 885 8.39 213 13.22 335 39.0 17.7 3AXD50000222636
Px1-4 40.61 1031 8.39 213 14.26 362 60.0 27.2 3AXD50000222940
PxB1-1 33.16 842 17.63 447 13.90 353 77.0 35.0 3AXD50000236596
PxB1-2 40.60 1030 20.50 521 15.30 388 122.0 55.3 3AXD50000236602
PxB1-3 47.72 1212 28.24 717 19.04 483 393.0 178.3 3AXD50000236374

See page 243 for mounting dimension details and additional free space
recommendations.

Note: Keep a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of free space on each side and 200 mm
(8 in.) of free space above and below all units from non-heat producing sources.
Double these distances from heat producing sources.

Technical data
244 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Dimensions: ACH580-PxR UL (NEMA) Type 12

W D W D W D

H H

Px12-1 to Px12-4 PxB12-1 to PxB12-2 PxB12-3

Height (H) Width (W) Depth (D) Weight Dimensional

Frame
in mm in mm in mm lb kg Drawings

Px12-1 26.50 673 6.50 164 12.40 315 18.2 8.2 3AXD50000220953
Px12-2 30.22 768 6.50 164 12.64 321 22.0 10.0 3AXD50000221912
Px12-3 36.51 927 8.39 213 13.22 335 39.0 17.7 3AXD50000222834
Px12-4 42.50 1079 8.39 213 14.26 362 60.0 27.2 3AXD50000222674
PxB12-1 33.16 842 17.63 447 13.90 353 77.0 35.0 3AXD50000236305
PxB12-2 40.60 1030 20.50 521 15.30 388 122.0 55.3 3AXD50000236619
PxB12-3 54.17 1376 28.24 717 19.04 483 393.0 178.3 3AXD50000236718

See page 243 for mounting dimension details and additional free space
recommendations.

Note: Keep a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of free space on each side and 200 mm
(8 in.) of free space above and below all units from non-heat producing sources.
Double these distances from heat producing sources.

Technical data
ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual 245

Dimensions: ACH580-PxR UL (NEMA) Type 3R

W D

PxB3R-1 to PxB3R-2

Height (H) Width (W) Depth (D) Weight Dimensional

Frame
in mm in mm in mm lb kg Drawings

PxB3R-1 33.30 846 17.70 449 14.00 355 83.8 38.0 3AXD50000236367
PxB3R-2 40.60 1032 20.10 511 15.00 391 193.0 88.0 3AXD50000237531

Note: UL (NEMA) Type 3R, Px3R-1...Px3R-4 enclosures are designed to be

mounted on a wall.

Note: Keep a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of free space on each side and 200 mm
(8 in.) of free space above and below all units from non-heat producing sources.
Double these distances from heat producing sources.

Degrees of protection
Available enclosures:
• UL (NEMA) Type 1 enclosure. The site must be free of airborne dust, corrosive
gases or liquids, and conductive contaminants such as condensation, carbon
dust, and metallic particles.
• UL (NEMA) Type 12 enclosure. This enclosure provides protection from airborne
dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions.
• UL (NEMA) Type 3R enclosure. This enclosure provides protection from the
ingress of water (rain, sleet, or snow). The external formation of ice does not
damage this enclosure.

Technical data
246 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual

Applicable standards
Packaged drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the
standards “marks” on the type code label.
Mark Applicable Standards
UL 508A UL Standard for Industrial Control Panels

Compliance is valid with the following provisions:

• The motor and control cables are chosen as specified in this manual.
• The installation rules of this manual are followed.
Additional ACH580-01 standards information can be located in the Technical data/
applicable standards section of the ACH580 Hardware Manual
(3AXD50000044839).

Technical data
 3AXD50000289554 REV A
Effective: 09/01/2018
Supersedes: —

ABB Inc.
16250 West Glendale Drive
New Berlin, WI 53151
USA
Telephone +1 800 752-0696
Fax +1 262 785-0397
Internet www.abb.us/drives